NCIDQ - IDFX EXAM STUDY SET

Commercial-grade cabinets are most often constructed of panel products with a thickness of A. 1/2 in B. 5/8 in C. 7/8 in D. 3/4 in

D. 3/4 in The majority of a cabinet is built with 3⁄4 in panels including the bottom, sides, and top bracing. The back is typically 1⁄4 in, but this was not one of the options.

HID lighting

high intensity discharge

In the floor plan below, the symbol C denotes which type of drawing will follow for referencing? A. Elevation B. Detail C. Demolition D Section

D Section Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings and Measurement and Drafting, Reference Systems This is a section symbol through the cabinetry next to the refrigerator.

The Critical Radiant Flux Test (NFPA ___) measures a materials ability to resist flame spread. The result derived from this test is the Critical Radiant Flux (CRF) of the sample.

253

What is the minimum width of an interior corridor? A. 36" B. 48" C. 54" D. 44"

44"

What is the principle of emphasis in interior design?

highlights and draws attention to a specific area of the room, creating visual impact and a foundation upon which to build the rest of the design.

Crypton

is a specially engineered fabric treatment process that is stain, water, flame and bacteria resistant, making it a good choice for retirement facilities and healthcare where durability and fire resistance are important factors.

The return

is the distance from the wall to the drapery rod. Returns are usually 3 in (76 mm) to 3.5 in (89 mm) deep on each side. Multi-layer treatments, such as blackout plus sheers, require deeper returns on the outer layers.

Stacking Space (of Drapery)

is the space needed on either side of the window so that when the drapery is fully open, it is clear of the window. This is usually one-third the window width or window width/3.

What is compositional unity in interior design?

leads to order and overall holds any design together; It determines whether or not an interior design is truly appealing and at its thematic best.

Detailed quantity takeoffs

lists quantities and costs of all materials required to complete a project, including construction costs, furniture costs, or both.

What is a double loaded corridor?

locates the corridor within the building

Candelas (cd)

luminous intensity

monolithic

massive and uniform

Carbon Footprint

measure of the impact human activities have on the environment in terms of the amount of greenhouse gases produced, measured in units of carbon dioxide

pattern matching

required when a fabric has a repeated design matched up at corners, curves, and edges. For example, stripes, plaids, paisleys, floral bouquets, geometrics, and medallions will require pattern matching. In some cases, pattern matching can add considerable yardage and extra labor costs to the upholstery job.

What is harmony in interior design?

the sense that everything fits together.

What is symbolism?

the use of symbols to represent ideas or qualities

Square Footage Method

utilizes exterior dimensions to calculate the cost per square foot

Fitwel

was created by the U.S. Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and Prevention and U.S. General Services Administration (GSA). The CDC remains the research and evaluation partner for Fitwel. The Center for Active Design was selected as the licensed operator of Fitwel, charged with expanding Fitwel to the global market.

Fire exit plan

A plan that shows occupants of a house the quickest and safest way to get out of the house should a fire occur

Which of the following would you be most likely to see on a reflected ceiling plan? A B C D

A. Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting The answer is A. This symbol designates a smoke detector which would most likely be found on a ceiling plan. The other symbols would be found on an electrical/ power plan.

What is the height of the ceiling in the dry good storage? A. 10'-0" B. OTA C. 9'-8" D. 8'-6"

A. 10'-0" Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings The spot elevation symbol on this drawing tells you the ceiling height in each room. We can tell that in the room marked Dry Good Storage, the height is marked 10'-0".

In a smaller scale set of drawings, plumbing would typically be included in which set of consultant's drawings? A. Mechanical B. Interior Design C. Electrical D. Fire Protection

A. Mechanical Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Organization of Construction Drawings. If the project is of a larger scale plumbing drawings may be separated from the mechanical drawings. Typically mechanical drawings include information about heating, ventilating, and air condition systems (HVAC), as well as any plumbing systems.

When installing a counter on base cabinets what would the installer use to precisely fit the countertop to the wall? A. scribe piece B. filler C. spacer D. furring strip

A. scribe piece Source: Interior Construction and Detailing for Designers and Architects, eTextbook, Architectural Woodwork, Countertop Construction Building and installing countertops separately allows the installer to fit the countertop to the wall precisely. This is done in two ways: the installer may provide a scribe piece on top of the backsplash or at the back of the countertop. Scribe: the process of fitting materials, such as woodwork or counter backsplashes, to irregular faces of a wall or floor surface. A scribe piece is an oversized piece of plastic laminate or wood trimmed in the field to follow any minor irregularities of the wall. The installer may also create a template from thin hardboard or cardboard after placing the base cabinets. This template is then taken back to the shop and used to precisely cut the countertop, including any out-of-square conditions, wall irregularities, or odd shapes.

Which of the following is a common commercial lighting system? A. task/ambient system B. fluorescent system C. direct system D. recessed system

A. task/ambient system A task/ambient system is a common commercial lighting system. This kind of system provides a general background illumination level with separate focused task light fixtures used at individual workstations or wherever light is needed.

The full extent of slab-to-slab partitions on a project is best shown on A. the reflected ceiling plan B. the finish plan C. wall section D. details

A. the reflected ceiling plan' The reflected ceiling plan should show slab-to-slab partitions as well as ceiling-high partitions. Although this information is usually indicated on wall-section details and sometimes on interior elevations, the reflected ceiling plan is the one place where it is all shown at once in an obvious manner.

Area of Refuge

An area where people unable to use stairways can remain temporarily while waiting for assistance

Public Way

Any street or similar parcel of land, at least 10 feet wide and unobstructed to the sky, which is permanently appropriated to the public for public use.

Which switching symbol indicates that a light can be controlled from two different areas or two different switches? A. $2 B. $3 C. $2OS D. $DSS

B. $3 Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, : Lighting: Reflected Ceiling and Electrical Plans $3 is the symbol for a 3-way switch, which means it is controlled from 2 (two) locations - NOT 3 (it has 3 terminals inside the switch). Always refer to the lighting legend for the symbols used on a particular drawing.

Which of the following is TRUE about a circular accessible handrail for stairs? A. must be made of a non-slip material B. should have a diameter between 1 1/4" to 2" C. must be mounted between 36" and 42" above the front edge of the step D. must have a 1 1/2" clear space between the handrail and the wall

B. should have a diameter between 1 1/4" to 2" Source: 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 505.7.1 Circular Cross Section. 505.7.1 Circular Cross Section. Handrail gripping surfaces with a circular cross section shall have an outside diameter of 1 1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum and 2 inches (51 mm) maximum. 1 1/2″ is the MINIMUM clear space required between the handrail and wall, it can be more.

When goods are shipped FOB destination, who has title to them while they are in transit? A. the insurer B. the seller C. the carrier D. the designer

B. the seller FOB (free on board) destination means that the seller retains title to the goods while in transit, because the title is transferred at the destination (delivery). FOB (shipping point) means that title is transferred to the buyer when the goods leave the manufacturer or seller.

Which of the follow is TRUE about furniture panel systems? A. They are available as freestanding, divider products only. B. They can only be used to form open office workstations layouts. C. They need to meet code when used as freestanding furniture. D. They cannot be used to help distribute power or communications.

C. They need to meet code when used as freestanding furniture. Source: BIFMA, Panels and Panel-Based Systems The correct answer is "They need to meet code when used as freestanding furniture." Projects using an open plan and systems furniture must still meet code requirements even when not fixed construction. The codes and the ADA Standards set minimum widths for both aisles and aisle access ways. Aisles can be created by fixed seats or movable furniture, for example, aisles are created between movable panel systems in offices. An exit access aisle is similar to an exit access corridor in that it is a passageway required to reach an exit. The difference is that a corridor is enclosed by full-height walls, whereas an aisle is a pathway created by furniture or equipment. This applies to all systems furniture that uses interconnecting vertical monolithic panels or frames with attaching skins to divide space, form workstations, support work surfaces, and other components, and route power and data cables. Panels and frames may also be used with freestanding products.

symetrical balance A. uses images radiating from a center, such as wheel spokes or ripples around a pebble thrown into water. B. can be divided down its length into similar right and left halves aling only one plane C. established when both sides of the composition are exactly equal. Formal balance D. occurs when you have different visual images on either side of a design, and yet the image still seems balanced.

C. established when both sides of the composition are exactly equal. Formal balance

If a material does not ignite and burn it is considered to be? A. fire retardant B. fire resistant C. noncombustible D. flame resistant

C. noncombustible

What is the correct sequence of documentation during the final phases of a project? A. FF&E punch list for movable furniture, construction Certificate of Occupancy, final payment to the contractor, Certificate of Substantial Completion, warranty documents, maintenance schedule B. Construction punch list, construction Certificate of Occupancy, Certificate of Final Payment to the designer, post-occupancy evaluation, Certificate of Substantial Completion, training documents C. Electrical inspection, construction Certificate of Occupancy, punch list, Certificate of Substantial Completion, certificate of final payment to the designer, maintenance schedule D. As-built drawings, site inspection list, Certificate of Occupancy, final punch list, Certificate of Substantial Completion, retainage payment to the contractor

C. Electrical inspection, construction Certificate of Occupancy, punch list, Certificate of Substantial Completion, certificate of final payment to the designer, maintenance schedule Source: Kennon, K. E. (2018). Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition (3rd Edition). Wiley Global Education US., The Project Management Process The correct answer is "Electrical inspection, construction Certificate of Occupancy, punch list, Certificate of Substantial Completion, certificate of final payment to the designer, maintenance schedule." Construction inspections and punch list documentation will need to be done before the Certificate of Occupancy is issued. Unless specified in the contract, movable Furniture Fixtures and Equipment are done AFTER the Certificate of Occupancy and propels the issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. As-built drawings are one of the final documents issued and would not be issued until AFTER final completion and installation of all items. A site inspection list is another common term for a punch list. Payment to the designer would not come until the project is complete. The Certificate of Substantial Completion would need to happen BEFORE the post-occupancy evaluation. There are many moving parts to the project sequence and documentation. It is important to note that site inspections and punch lists can be made during many project phases. They are specifically related to the type of product or labor inspection being reviewed. All post-installation and post-occupancy activities are an acknowledged part of the contract administration phase. This includes a final site inspection called a walk-through, where the designer, with the client, determines if there are any omissions or damages. Notations are made on a form commonly called a punch list. Final payment to the designer is often withheld until all items on the punch list are completed. Larger design firms often prepare post-occupancy evaluations a short time after the client has moved in. Several additional documents or permits may also be provided to the client. The size and type of project will determine the necessity for any of these documents as the client is preparing to move into the project space. Certificate of OccupancyThe property owner must receive this certificate for construction projects before any movable interior furniture can be delivered or installed. This certificate applies to the structure and is obtained from the local building department after an inspection. Issuance of the certificate means that the building or space has been inspected, meets codes, and is approved for occupancy. Certificate of Substantial CompletionAnother document is issued after the interior products have been delivered and installed and a punch list has been created. The designer or architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion to clarify everything has been done and indicates missing items or work. Certificates for paymentCertificates for payment may be issued during the project, as some subcontractors will complete all their work, have it inspected, and get final approval significantly before the end of the project. The term retainage (also referred to as a holdback) is associated with the certificate for payment. Depending on the contract, the client may retain a certain amount—commonly 5 to 10 percent—to ensure that all the work is done properly and that any omissions or problems are taken care of. Warranties and maintenance informationWarranties, maintenance information, and operation instructions for all equipment and products delivered as part of the project comprise another set of documents provided to the client at the end of the project. The vendors who supplied and installed the merchandise provide these documents, which are transferred to the client when the designer is the reseller of goods. Maintenance schedulesCommercial clients frequently request that the designer prepare maintenance schedules. In general, maintenance schedules inform staff how to clean, wax, vacuum, remove stains, and otherwise maintain the furniture, fabrics, and architectural finishes. The preparation of a formal maintenance schedule is often treated as a separate design service, though it is sometimes included and charged for in the design contract.

Based on the image shown, we can determine that this drawing is what type of plan? A. Finish plan B. Floor plan C. Electrical plan D. Furniture plan

D. Furniture plan Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Construction Drawings, Specifications You can see in the drawing above that the symbols shown are furniture. This plan is used to tell the installer the locations of the different types of furniture. Outlets are often included on this plan to help determine where certain pieces may need to be located.

What type of finish is located on the east wall of the sitting area? A. Tile B. Wall covering C. Plastic laminate D. Paint

D. PAINT

To minimize conflicts in the contract documents, what is the LEAST important action the interior designer can take? A. Make sure terminology in the specifications is the same as in the drawings. B. Show only dimensions on the drawings. C. Have someone check the drawings before they are issued. D. Write the specifications after the drawings are essentially complete.

D. Write the specifications after the drawings are essentially complete. The specifications should be outlined and begun while the drawings are being done. The specifications writer and the job captain should be in constant contact and coordination while both documents are being completed, to minimize conflicts.

Placing emphasis on providing simple, rational solutions to design problems without extraneous decoration is known as? A. culturalism B. realism C. modernism D. functionalism

D. functionalism Source: Kilmer, R., Kilmer, W. O. Designing Interiors., The Origins of Design, Functional and Visual Design Concepts To some designers, functional design requires an "integrity" or unity in the designer's idea and "honesty" in the method of transforming that idea into reality. Integrity as in the design axiom "form follows function," is often attributed to the American architect Louis Henry Sullivan and closely linked to the Bauhaus, a design school founded about 1919 in Weimar, Germany. Functionalism places emphasis on providing simple, rational solutions to design problems without extraneous decoration. It is best represented by the modernism of the early 20th century. In the 1960s, criticism that Modernist buildings and interiors lacked sensitivity to the users and the general public caused some designers to rebel against the styles of pure Modernism and embrace ornamentation and the historicism of earlier styles. Today, we must carefully scrutinize the concept that "form follows function," because there is more than one way to express function or solve a problem in function. A window can be a simple glassed opening in a wall to let in light and air, or it can be elaborately embellished, yet serve the same purposes. Function is important, but purely functional design is not necessarily inherently successful or beautiful. Read more: The Interior Design Reference Manual, Developing Design Concepts, Design Theory, Functional Needs

Asymetrical Balance/ informal balance A. uses images radiating from a center, such as wheel spokes or ripples around a pebble thrown into water. B. can be divided down its length into similar right and left halves aling only one plane C. established when both sides of the composition are exactly equal. Formal balance D. occurs when you have different visual images on either side of a design, and yet the image still seems balanced.

D. occurs when you have different visual images on either side of a design, and yet the image still seems balanced.

Drywall finish levels

Level 0 - Gyp board only Level 1 - Just tape (Above Ceiling) Level 2- One coat joint compound (Garage & warehouse) Level 3- 2 coats (Behind wallpaper or with heavy texture) Level 4- 3 coats (typical) Level 5 - 3 coats + Final skim coat (Museum)

According to CIDQ, Project Management is the

Management of project budget, contracts, schedule, consultants, staffing, resources, and general business practices. Establish contractually independent relationships to coordinate with, and/or hire allied design professionals and consultants.

Rectified photography

Method of field measuring and recording that uses digital cameras to photograph facades.

What daylighting strategies can be used effectively in all climate zones for improving energy efficiency?

The four answer choices that apply are: 1. Top lighting with skylights or clerestory windows 2. Reflect diffused lighting deeper into the building core with light tubes 3. Use glazing with a lower visible transmittance (VT) to minimize heat gain 4. Use of architectural features such as light shelves, vanes, or louvers During the schematic and design development phases, the architect and interior designer will seek to arrange the building orientation and interior to take advantage of daylighting opportunities. By aligning the long axis parallel with East/West (not N/S), this presents the maximum building face to direct daylighting along the South face and indirect northern light along the North face. There are two types of daylighting: sidelighting — through windows in the walls top lighting — through skylights, roof monitors, or clerestories One means of top lighting is using a light tube when a greater separation exists between the roof and ceiling. Designers should also choose materials with high reflectance (not low reflectance) to maximize inter-reflection, which helps daylight penetrate deeper into the building. The use of architectural features such as light shelves, vanes, or louvers can help redirect light where needed and provide shade to block direct sun and glare. Visible light transmittance (VT) is the percentage of light that passes through glazing. A lower VT for South facing glazing controls the light intensity and minimizes heat gain from direct sun. "Active heating through sunlight collection" can save energy, and "compliance with locations for accessibility" are beneficial to design strategies but do not have to do with daylighting.

Detailed information about furniture is commonly found on A. a furniture schedule B. the specifications only C. the furniture plan D. a schedule or the specifications

The furniture plan typically contains tags with code numbers for each piece of furniture. The code number refers either to a schedule on the drawings or to the specifications where the information such as a manufacturer, model number, color, finish, and other criteria are listed.

Life Safety

The portion of fire safety that focuses on the minimum building design, construction, operation, and maintenance requirements necessary to assure occupants of a safe exit from the burning portion of the building.

Exit Discharge

The portion of the egress system between the termination of an exit and a public way.

Exit

The portion of the egress system that provides a protected path of egress brethren the exit access and the exit discharge

Exit access

The portion of the means of egress that leads to the entrance of an exit

Stereophotogrammetry

Use two overlapping photographs that are loaded into a computer program to produce a digital stereo image. The image can then be used to extract information to make a three-dimensional drawing. This technique also produces a photographic record. It does require specialized equipment and computer software, as well as trained technicians, to do the work

Building Commissioning

process of ensuring that system are designed, installed, and functionally tested for effective operation/maintenance for an owner's operational needs.

Orthophotography

similar to rectified, except that is relies on DIGITAL photography and correction of optical distortion through computer software -technology of correcting aerial photographs so that displayed distances are uniform and can be measured like MAP (flat)

What is the five-step programming process outlined by the book Problem Seeking?

(1) Establish Goals (2) Collect and Analyze Facts (3) Uncover and Test Concepts (4) Determine Needs (5) State the Problem.

What does ASHRAE do?

Creates standards and defines comfort

GBI

Green Building Initiative

A window covering that is made from fabric and is generally not intended to be opened is called (A) a curtain (B) an Austrian shade (C) a vertical blind (D) drapery

(A) a curtain

A clothing store located on the ground floor contains 15,000 ft2 (1394 m2) of retail area, a 2000 ft2 (186 m2) space for fashion shows for a seated audience with small cocktail tables, and a 3000 ft2 (279 m2) stock room. Using the table shown, determine the total occupant load. (A) 394 occupants (B) 434 occupants (C) 546 occupants (D) 660 occupants

(A) 394 occupants From the table, mercantile areas have an occupant load of 60 ft2 (5.6 m2) per occupant. An assembly area without fixed seats of unconcentrated use has an occupant load of 15 ft2 (1.4 m2). A stock room has an occupant load of 300 ft2 (27.9 m2) per occupant. The formula to calculate this is to divide the square footage by the occupant load: 15,000 / 60 = 250

Which of the following is a true statement about the difference between a programmatic concept and a design concept? (A) A design concept specifies a particular way to achieve the programmatic concept. (B) There are many more programmatic concepts for a problem than there are design concepts. (C) A design concept is a performance requirement. (D) Design concepts are developed before programmatic concepts.

(A) A design concept specifies a particular way to achieve the programmatic concept.

What characterizes an isometric drawing? (A) All axes are drawn to the same scale. (B) A three-dimensional view can easily be created by tilting a floor plan and extending vertical lines. (C) Lines of projection are perpendicular to the picture plane. (D) The view shows a cut approximately 5 ft (1525 mm) above the floor.

(A) All axes are drawn to the same scale.

Which of the following statements is true about seismic restraint for suspended acoustical ceilings in seismic design categories D, E, and F as defined in the International Building Code (IBC)? (A) All ceiling-high partitions must be braced independently from the grid. (B) After determining the appropriate seismic design category, the interior designer can follow industry-standard detailing. (C) Main runners must be securely attached to the ceiling angles on opposite sides of a room. (D) Rigid compression struts are required at the grid intersections every 96 in (2.44 m) on center.

(A) All ceiling-high partitions must be braced independently from the grid. Seismic design categories D, E, and F are the most restrictive and require that ceiling-high partitions be braced independently from the ceiling grid.

Which of the following are correct statements about corridors? (Choose the three that apply.) (A) Corridors are part of the exit access. (B) Corridors are part of the exit. (C) Corridors must be used exclusively for egress. (D) Corridor construction must be fire rated. (E) Corridors are included in calculating travel distance. (F) Corridors must never have dead ends.

(A) Corridors are part of the exit access. (C) Corridors must be used exclusively for egress. (E) Corridors are included in calculating travel distance. Corridors are part of the exit aces portion of the egress system, not the exit portion. This means that they are used for calculating travel distance, but they do not necessarily have to be fire rated (although they usually are).

Which design element could be used to make a ceiling appear lower? (A) a dark, highly textured ceiling (B) strong horizontal lines on the walls (C) fine-grained patterns on the ceiling and dark walls (D) a light ceiling and textured walls

(A) a dark, highly textured ceiling Dark values tend to make surfaces seem closer, as do heavy textures. The two in combination would make the ceiling appear lower.

An interior designer is looking for independent, third-party information specifically about a carpet's volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions. The BEST source would be the (A) Green Label Plus program (B) GreenSpec Directory (C) Greenguard Environmental Institute (D) U.S. Green Building Council

(A) Green Label Plus program The best source for independent, third-party information specifically about a carpet's VOC emissions is the Carpet and Rug Institute's Green Label Plus program. This program tests carpets (as well as cushions and adhesives) to identify products that have low VOC emissions.

In a plenum, how can a fire be prevented from spreading horizontally? (A) Install sprinkler systems. (B) Use fire-rated dividers. (C) Use fiberglass material. (D) Install fire dampers.

(A) Install sprinkler systems. (B) Use fire-rated dividers. (C) Use fiberglass material. (D) Install fire dampers. The answer is B. In the space between a suspended ceiling and the structural floor above, fire-rated dividers are required if partitions do not extend through the plenum. Fire dampers are used in partitions and other fire-rated separations to allow fire-rated openings for duct work.

How can a drapery treatment be BEST changed to minimize its hazard during a fire? (A) Shorten the length of the fabric. (B) Use an open-weave fabric. (C) Increase the amount of fabric. (D) Use a composite fabric.

(A) Shorten the length of the fabric.

Preliminary space planning shows that it is impossible to satisfy all the programmed adjacencies shown on the adjacency matrix, which has been approved by the client. What is the BEST course of action? (A) Verify that the adjacencies require a physical connection, and then review the problem with the client. (B) Satisfy as many adjacency connections as possible, and present this information to the client for review and approval. (C) Ask the client to downgrade the importance of the problematic adjacencies. (D) Develop several alternatives that come as close as possible to the requirements, and have the client select the one that best satisfies the program.

(A) Verify that the adjacencies require a physical connection, and then review the problem with the client. The answer is A. Option A lets the client clarify the programming adjacencies and, if necessary, modify them so the designer can proceed with good information. If the client wants to see sketches to prove that the required adjacencies cannot be made to work, these are already available from the initial work on the problem. Options B and D are possible but require that the designer make guesses and do a lot of work before the client reviews the problem. Option C is risky because the problematic adjacencies may turn out to be the most important ones for the client, while the ones easily achieved may be less important.

An interior designer has been retained for a building project that is currently being planned by an architect. On the second floor of the building, slate flooring over a concrete subfloor is being used. What type of installation should ideally be designed for? (A) a thick-set application using a cleavage membrane (B) a bonded thick-set installation (C) a 1/2 in (12 mm) layer of mortar with the stone dry-set on top (D) a standard thin-set installation

(A) a thick-set application using a cleavage membrane Because slate does not have a uniform thickness and a concrete subfloor above grade may deflect and cause cracking, the best installation is a thick-set method with a cleavage membrane. The thick-set method allows the tile setter to adjust the bed according to the exact thickness of each stone, and a cleavage membrane (with reinforcement) allows the finish floor to float above any slight deflection of the concrete floor.

Which of the following would be the MOST important consideration in the design of ergonomically correct chairs for air traffic controllers? (A) adjustability (B) firm cushions (C) lumbar support (D) tilt and swivel capability

(A) adjustability The answer is A. All the options are important considerations in designing ergonomically correct chairs. However, at most airports air traffic control is in operation around the clock, so the same chair will be used by different people at different times, and each person will be sitting in the chair for long stretches. Because of this, it is most important that the chair be easily adjustable to accommodate variations in body size.

Which type of plan is always needed to begin space planning in an existing building? (A) base plan (B) circulation plan (C) exiting plan (D) reflected ceiling plan

(A) base plan The answer is A. A base plan shows the layout of the existing building. It is always needed to begin the interior design space plan.

In starting a design project in a multi-use building, what information would an interior designer need to determine? (A) construction type, adjacent occupancies, and sprinkler condition (B) construction type, fire-zone classification, and accessibility requirements (C) adjacent occupancies, sprinkler condition, and fire-zone classification (D) adjacent occupancies, fire-zone classification, and accessibility requirements

(A) construction type, adjacent occupancies, and sprinkler condition

When developing adjacency requirements, the interior designer must consider (A) contacts between people, transfer of objects, and electronic information (B) outside contacts with service people and visitors, as well as internal contacts (C) shared equipment and transfer of objects between people (D) frequency of required contacts between people and transfer of objects

(A) contacts between people, transfer of objects, and electronic information there are three basic types of required adjacencies: those that require person-to-person contacts, those that require the transfer of objects, and those that require an electronic transfer of information. When person-to-person contact is required, two or more spaces must be physically located next to each other. When object transfer is required, the spaces need not be adjacent if the objects can be transported without one person physically handing something to another person. Electronic transfer can be done over any distance.

Exits are ALWAYS (A) protected by fire-resistance-rated construction (B) limited in length (C) constructed as either corridors or stairways (D) required to have a 2-hour rating

(A) protected by fire-resistance-rated construction Depending on the building height, construction type, and passageway length, exits must have either a 1 - or 2-hour rating.

During the preliminary planning phase, the diagram shown would be used to (A) help the designer present data for adjacencies and area (B) show the client which programmed spaces belong in this zone (C) determine maximum floor areas on a building floor (D) begin the process for developing a stacking diagram

(A) help the designer present data for adjacencies and area The diagram shown is an adjacency block diagram. It shows both the desired adjacencies (like a bubble diagram) and the relative sizes of spaces (like an area diagam) in simple block form. An adjacency block diagram helps the deigner visualize how the various spaces must be organized, without ancillary spaces such as corridors, mechanical rooms,a dn the like. The division of spaces in zones would already have been determined in the program.

According to the affinity matrix shown, to which rooms must the kitchen be adjacent? (Choose the three that apply.) (A) living room (B) study (C) media room (D) laundry (E) dining room (F) master bedroom

(A) living room (D) laundry (E) dining room

A designer wants to emphasize one particular item in a client's retail store. Which of the following design features would BEST achieve this goal? (A) locating the item on a main circulation axis and highlighting it (B) arranging a grouping of several of the items among single pieces of the other items (C) having an oversized model of the item made for display near the entrance (D) putting the item on a brightly colored pedestal in its usual place in the store

(A) locating the item on a main circulation axis and highlighting it This option uses location, position, and lighting to focus attention on the item.

An occupant load calculation has shown that an office suite requires a total of 71 in (1804 mm) of egress width and two exit access doors. In order to meet all International Building Code (IBC) and accessibility requirements, what are the minimum door widths that should be used? (A) one 36 in door and one 42 in door (914 mm and 1067 mm) (B) one 38 in door and one 34 in door (965 mm and 864 mm) (C) one 36 in door and one 44 in door (914 mm and 1118 mm) (D) two 36 in (914 mm) doors

(A) one 36 in door and one 42 in door (914 mm and 1067 mm) The combination of a 36" and a 42" door provides a total of 72" of clear width. These are the minimum door widths that will satisfy the 71" total egress width requirement.

Which of the following is the BEST choice for safety glazing in a hazardous location? A) tempered or laminated glass (B) tempered or wired glass (C) heat-strengthened glass or wired glass (D) laminated glass or wired glass

(A) tempered or laminated glass Only tempered and laminated glass are considered to be safety glazing because they meet the requirments of 16 CFR 1201.

A designer has determined that a client needs about 8000 ft2 (740 m2) of usable office space. The leasing agent for the building says that the rentable-usable ratio will be 1.25. Approximately how much area should the interior designer recommend that the client lease? (A) 7500 ft2 (700 m2) (B) 10,000 ft2 (930 m2) (C) 10,700 ft2 (1000 m2) (D) 13,300 ft2 (1200 m2)

(B) 10,000 ft2 (930 m2) The rentable area is calculated by multiplying the usable area by the rentable-usable ratio. The useable area includes the net assignable area plus allowances for circulation, so no increase is required.

A 216 pitch carpet has (A) a pile height that is almost 1/4 in (6 mm) high (B) 8 surface yarns per inch (25 mm) (C) an equivalent gauge of 1/6 (D) a commercial-grade stitch rate

(B) 8 surface yarns per inch (25 mm) Pitch is the number of ends of surface yarn in a 27 in (686 mm)width. To convert this measurement to gauge (the spacing between stitches), divide 27 in (686 mm) into 216 stitches. This gives 8 stitches/in, or 8 surface yarns/in. The equivalent gauge, therefore, is 1/8.

Which of the diagrams is best suited for making a record of required space relationships just before initial space planning?

(B) Bubble Diagram The bubble diagram is better for showing relationships just before space planning. The relative sizes an positions of the bubbles indicate spatial relationships and sizes of the various spaces needed.

A designer has calculated the occupant load of a large, sprinklered hotel ballroom, and has determined that three exits are required from the space. The diagonal distance of the room is 160 ft (14.9 m). According to the International Building Code (IBC), two of the exits must be separated by at least one-third of the diagonal distance of the room. Where does the code require the third exit to be located? (A) a reasonable distance from the others (B) a minimum of 80 ft (7.4 m) from the first two (C) as determined by the building official (D) at least one-half the diagonal distance from the first two

(B) a minimum of 80 ft (7.4 m) from the first two The IBC requires that when three or four exits are required, two of the exits must be placed at least one-half the diagonal distance of the space for non sprinklered spaces, and at least one-third the diagonal distance for sprinklered spaces. the third exists must be arranged a reasonable distance from the other two so that if one of the exists becomes blocked, the other two will remain available.

Consider the following diagram. The diagram shown is an example of (A) a decision tree (B) an evaluation matrix (C) a materials hierarchy (D) a matrix chart

(B) an evaluation matrix The answer is B. The diagram is an example of an evaluation matrix. An evaluation matrix is a good tool for analyzing alternatives to a design by looking at specific aspects of the design and giving them ratings. Ratings can be shown graphically, as in this example, or with numbers; the numbers can then be totaled to see which alternative has the best rating. The alternative with the highest ratings may be deemed to be the best choice, and a decision can be made. The evaluation matrix can be fairly simple (as this example shows) or larger and more complex for complicated design issues. While the diagram is a matrix chart, given its grid of vertical and horizontal lines, that name doesn't describe its function for analysis and research. It also does not represent a hierarchy of materials. It is not in the form of a tree with branching alternatives, as a decision tree would be.

A designer wants to give visual weight to a sofa. Which of the following color combinations would be the BEST choice for the sofa and the surrounding walls? (A) a hue with a dark value for the sofa and a slightly lighter value for the walls (B) any light-colored hue for the sofa and a color with a dark value for the walls (C) a color with a warm hue and a dark value for the sofa and a much lighter color for the walls (D) a light, cool color for the sofa and a color of similar value and hue for the walls

(B) any light-colored hue for the sofa and color with a dark value for the walls Warm colors tend to advance, and darker values tend to make objects look heavier. This makes a sofa with a warm hue and dark value the best choice, especially when the sofa can be contrasted with a much lighter background.

A restaurant in an old building is undergoing remodeling. Which of the following existing building elements would have the MOST influence over the space plan for the proposed dining area? (A) loadbearing columns and interior walls (B) building dimensions (C) plumbing fixtures (D) decorative millwork and ornate lighting fixtures

(B) building dimensions Although all of the options would influence the dining area's space plan, the actual building dimensions (which include the existing structual columns and walls) would determine whetehr the propsed dining area would even fit within the space available.

An interior designer is consulting with an architect for a new bariatric care facility. What does the interior designer need to be most concerned with? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) space for health care workers around the bed (B) chairs and other seating (C) integration of bariatric seating with standard seating (D) door sizes (E) equipment storage (F) bedside amenities such as refrigerators

(B) chairs and other seating (C) integration of bariatric seating with standard seating (E) equipment storage (F) bedside amenities such as refrigerators Chairs and other seating, integration of bariatric seating with standard seating, equipment storage for tings such as mobilit devices and lift devices, and bedside amenitites are will with the area of knowldge and resonibility of th einterior designer. Room size, which incudes providing space for health care workers around the bed, and door sizes are aspects of the design that the architect is responsible for, not the interior designer.

An interior designer is creating a color-coding system for use in a housing facility for the elderly. Which of the following color combinations would be the MOST vivid and easily perceived? (A) a bright color against a background of a noncomplementary color (B) complementary colors of high saturation (C) highly saturated warm or cool colors next to a neutral gray (D) the primary colors and white

(B) complementary colors of high saturation Highly saturated complementary colors reinforce each other, so the second combination would create the highest contrast and be easier to see for people of all ages.

An interior designer would MOST likely use anthropometric information to... (A) design countertops for a public restroom (B) determine the percentage of children who would be comfortable on custom-designed benches in a puppet theater (C) develop the best position for multiple VDT screens in a stock trader's workstation (D) evaluate a new chair design that has just come on the market

(B) determine the percentage of children who would be comfortable on custom-designed benches in a puppet theater The answer is B. Anthropometrics is primarily concerned with measuring the size of the human body and developing dimensional ranges within which certain percentages of a given population fall. Such raw data would be directly useful for choosing the height, depth, and other aspects of the benches so that the greatest percentage of children would be comfortably seated on them. The other options relate more to ergonomics or human interaction with the environment.

What is the best source an interior designer could use to research the flammability and VOC ratings of several sofas the designer was considering specifying for a client? (A) BIFMA standards (B) each manufacturer's local representative (C) the internet (D) local showrooms that sell the sofas

(B) each manufacturer's local representative

A residential design involves a bedroom, bath, and garage addition. At a minimum, the due diligence site investigation should include (A) neighborhood character and zoning setbacks (B) zoning setbacks and septic capacities (C) heating system capacity and neighborhood traffic (D) zoning height limitations and street characteristics

(B) zoning setbacks and septic capacities

A designer uses the principle of harmony in order to... (A) develop visual consistency and equilibrium among individual elements (B) elicit compositional unity from different elements (C) establish two elements as more important than the others in a composition (D) provide variation in the elements of a composition

(B) elicit compositional unity from different elements The answer is B. Harmony is used to creating a feeling of compositional unity from elements that are different from one another. Option A relates more to balance and repetition. Option C describes the principle of emphasis. Option D is incorrect because harmony is used to unify a composition rather than provide variation, even though variation is often part of a harmonious design.

An interior designer talking with a client could justify the use of bright colors in an elderly care facility by referring to (A) design theory (B) evidence from research (C) Gestalt psychology (D) historic precedent

(B) evidence from research To justify using bright colors in an elderly care facility, the interior designer could refer to evidence from research that suggests that bright colors have a positive effect on the health and well-being of the elderly.

Which of the following should the interior designer cite to support the inclusion of a large expanse of glass in a new office... (A) design theory (B) factual evidence (C) Gestalt psychology (D) programmatic concepts

(B) factual evidence The answer is B. The interior designer should cite factual evidence for this decision. The client is more likely to be persuaded by evidence of measurable benefits than by theories or philosophies. For example, studies conducted by the U.S. Department of Energy have found that natural light and visual access to the outside can increase the health, comfort, and productivity of building occupants. The term for the design approach that uses quantitative and qualitative research to support design decisions is evidence-based design. Design theory directs designs based on personal philosophies or beliefs. Gestalt psychology holds that humans perceive things as larger wholes, not as individual bits of stimulus. Programmatic concepts are statements about functional solutions to a client's performance requirements.

An accurate representation of materials can BEST be shown with a... (A) computer rendering (B) full-size mockup (C) presentation model (D) study model

(B) full-size mockup The answer is B. A full-size mockup of an actual material would be the best way to represent the materials accurately.

According to William Peña's book, Problem Seeking, all design problems can be stated in terms of form, and which three other factors? (A) analysis, synthesis, and function (B) function, economy, and time (C) goals, facts, and function (D) economy, time, and synthesis

(B) function, economy, and time The answer is B. Design problems can be stated in terms of form, function, economy, and time. Each of these statements can be further broken down into more specific terms. For example, the economy can be studied in terms of initial cost, operating cost, and life-cycle cost.

A designer has developed a new workstation layout for a large corporate client. The workstation is unlike anything the client has used previously. The designer could BEST communicate the design and functionality of the workstation by (A) developing large-scale plan views with details and large-scale elevations (B) having a full-scale mockup built that includes the actual workstation furniture being used (C) rendering a detailed perspective drawing with accompanying finish and material samples (D) commissioning a fully rendered, three-dimensional computer model that shows a "fly-through"

(B) having a full-scale mockup built that includes the actual workstation furniture being used

Which of the following pairs of building code requirements is MOST critical for the interior designer to know before starting the preliminary space planning? (A) occupancy group and total floor area (B) number of exits and maximum distance to exits (C) allowable length of dead-end corridors and glazing requirements (D) occupant load and corridor construction requirements

(B) number of exits and maximum distance to exits

Which of the following are the two main factors used to determine whether a space must have more than one exit? (A) travel distance and exit width (B) occupant load and occupancy (C) travel distance and occupant load (D) exit width and occupancy

(B) occupant load and occupancy The two main factors used to determine whether a space needs more than one exit are the occupancy and the occupant load. The occupancy is how the space is used (e.g., business, industrial, or residential). The occupant load is the maximum number of people that may occupy the space. If the occupant load exceeds the allowable value given in the International Building Code (IBC), then one or more additional exits will be needed. Though the occupant load and occupancy are the most important factors in determining how many exits a space must have, a third factor—the travel distance—is also considered. The travel distance is the measurable distance from a space's most remote occupiable point to the entrance of the nearest exit that serves it. If this distance exceeds the limits given in the IBC, a second exit will be required, even if the occupant load is within the allowable value given in the IBC.

Which of the following partition wall assemblies would be the least expensive to provide a 1-hour fire rating in a Type V-A building? (A) one layer of ⅝ in (16 mm) Type X gypsum board on each side of wood studs (B) one layer of ⅝ in (16 mm) Type X gypsum board on each side of metal studs (C) two layers of ½ in (13 mm) gypsum board on each side of metal studs (D) two layers of ⅝ in (16 mm) Type X gypsum board on each side of wood studs

(B) one layer of ⅝ in (16 mm) Type X gypsum board on each side of metal studs

Consider the drawings shown. These kinds of drawings are known as... (A) circulation components (B) parti diagrams (C) plan sketches (D) programmatic concepts

(B) parti diagrams The answer is B. A parti diagram is a rough drawing or diagram used early in the schematic design process to represent a design concept. The diagrams shown are concept alternatives for ways to design an entry to a bar area from a hotel lobby and are an example of a parti diagram. There is no such type of diagram as a circulation component. These diagrams also don't represent plan sketches, nor do they show programmatic concepts, which are typically text descriptions of a programmatic idea.

Which of the following design principles would MOST appropriately govern the design of a hotel lobby? (A) functionalism (B) proxemics (C) regionalism (D) symbolism

(B) proxemics The answer is B. Hotel lobbies provide a variety of functions for occupants who generally do not know one another. Therefore, proxemics—which deal with the spacing between people and the organization of those spaces—would be the most important design principle in the design of a hotel lobby. Using proxemics, the interior designer could determine the lobby's ideal front desk layout, waiting area configuration, furniture types and positions, and overall size. While the designer could also incorporate the principles of functionalism (e.g., simple, no extraneous decoration), regionalism (e.g., the design reflecting local geographic area), and symbolism (e.g., using representative symbols) into the lobby decor, its overall design would best be governed by proxemics.

A client has asked a designer to create an intimate seating area for a hospital waiting room. Which of the following will be MOST important in achieving the client's goal? (A) pattern (B) scale (C) texture (D) color

(B) scale Manipulating scale through the physical placement of walls, ceilings, and other architectural elements if the strongest way to create the feeling of intimacy.

During preliminary planning for a daycare center in a low-rise office building, the interior designer discovers that the zoning ordinance limits the area of such centers to about 20% less than the client's programmed needs. How could the interior designer best attempt to resolve the problem? (A) apply for a conditional use permit (B) suggest the client apply for a variance (C) reduce the area planned to that allowed (D) appeal to the local planning commission

(B) suggest the client apply for a variance The answer is B. A variance is a deviation from zoning regulations. The interior designer could assist the client in applying for a variance and present the case to the zoning board. In the case of a daycare center requesting a relatively small size increase, it is likely that the hardship would be recognized and a variance granted. A conditional use permit is typically used to allow nonconforming use in a zoning district and would not be the appropriate way to solve the problem. It is unlikely that the client would want to decrease the size of the planned center. The local planning commission would not be involved with this kind of issue.

A college dormitory room shared by two people contains two identical sets of furnishings, symmetrically positioned. Which of the following psychological needs is this arrangement attempting to satisfy? (A) personal space (B) territoriality (C) group interaction (D) personalization

(B) territoriality The human need to lay claim to the space on occupies. The two sets of identical furnishings, organized around an imaginary (but perceived) line, divides the dormitory room into two equal territories.

In developing a signage system for a health care clinic, the designer decides that the room identification signs should be mounted perpendicular to the wall near the door to each room. Which of the following are of greatest concern in the design work? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) the color of the lettering and its background (B) that the amount the Braille lettering is raised above the surface (C) whether or not the width of the accessible route is reduced (D) the mounting height to the center of the sign (E) the use of the standard ADA font (F) whether or not the lettering is uppercase

(B) that the amount the Braille lettering is raised above the surface (C) whether or not the width of the accessible route is reduced (D) the mounting height to the center of the sign (F) whether or not the lettering is uppercase Barrier-free design requires that objects not protrude into the accessible path in such a way as to present a hazard. In addition, tactile signs must have a minimum 1/32 in (0.79 mm) raised surface, and accessible routes must not be reduced in width. Room identification signs must be in uppercase. The color is not critical as long as there is contrast between the lettering and the background. Fonts must be san serif or simple serif, but there is no standard ADA font. Refer to the following illustration.

In a fully sprinklered office building, how many sprinklers would be required in a room measuring 20'x25'? (A) 2 sprinklers (B) 3 sprinklers (C) 4 sprinklers (D) 6 sprinklers

(C) 4 sprinklers The only way to locate sprinklers such that the maximum spacing between heads is 15 ft (4570 mm) and the maximum spacing from the walls is 7 1/2 ft (2285 mm) is to use four heads.

Refer to the illustration, which shows a reflected ceiling plan for an office space (do not use the ceiling grid as a scale). What is the maximum spacing of the sprinkler heads indicated by A and B, in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13 for light hazard occupancies? (A) A = 4 ft, B = 8 ft (1220 mm, 2440 mm) (B) A = 5½ ft, B = 10 ft (1676 mm, 3048 mm) (C) A = 7½ ft, B = 15 ft (2286 mm, 4572 mm) (D) A = 10 ft, B = 17½ ft (3048 mm, 5334 mm)

(C) A = 7½ ft, B = 15 ft (2286 mm, 4572 mm) For light hazard occupancies, NFPA 13 requires one sprinkler for each 225 ft2 (18.6 m2) of area. This means a maximum spacing of 15 ft (4572 mm) is permitted between sprinklers. In addition, no sprinkler can be farther than 7½ ft (2286 mm) from any wall.

It is essential that sample boards include (A) color photographs of the furniture (B) a floor plan showing where each item will be used (C) actual samples of the materials (D) manufacturers' product data sheets

(C) actual samples of the materials Only actual samples can accurately convey a material's finish, color, and texture.

When doing design work for remodeling toilet rooms to make them accessible, the designer finds that it is impossible to provide adequate clearance on one side of a door. What is the BEST course of action? (A) Propose to the client that walls be demolished and replanned to provide the necessary clearances. (B) Apply to the building department for a variance because of the remodeling problem. (C) Specify a power-assisted door opener that meets accessibility standards and incorporate this into the design. (D) Suggest that a unisex toilet be built nearby that complies with all accessibility requirements.

(C) Specify a power-assisted door opener that meets accessibility standards and incorporate this into the design.

A new office suite is planned for the fifth floor of the building. Which of the following existing characteristics would MOST affect egress planning? (A) location of stairs and the presence of a sprinkler system (B) size of the existing building and fire rating of the existing corridors (C) area and shape of the fifth floor and the location of the stairs (D) location of the elevators and area of the fifth floor

(C) area and shape of the fifth floor and the location of the stairs The answer is C. The location of the stairs is the primary factor in determining where and how the new space's exit access door or doors should be located. Exit access travel distance and the number and length of dead-end corridors should all be minimized, and the common path of egress travel should be considered. Furthermore, the area and shape of the existing floor plate could affect the exit access travel distance and, therefore, the layout of the new space. The presence of a sprinkler system could have an effect on egress planning, but a smaller one. The fire rating of the existing corridors and the location of the elevators will generally have little or no effect on where to locate the exit access doors

Which of the following corridor elements must be finalized with the floor plan during design development? (A) floor surface material, turnaround space, and recesses for drinking fountains (B) corridor width, handrail projection, and exit sign locations (C) door swings, recesses for drinking fountains, and corridor width (D) location of visual alarms, turnaround space, and door swings

(C) door swings, recesses for drinking fountains, and corridor width The answer is C. During design development, the corridor configuration must be finalized to meet accessibility and code requirements. For this to happen, elements that can influence the width and layout of corridors must be finalized. These elements include protruding objects, door swings into the corridor, and recesses for anything that could interfere with the accessible route. While decisions regarding elements such as floor surfacing, exit sign locations, and the location of visual alarms may be important to the final construction drawings, these elements can be finalized in the construction drawing phase and are not required during design development.

For most planning problems, the MOST efficient type of circulation system is a... (A) radial system (B) single-loaded corridor system (C) double-loaded corridor system (D) grid system

(C) double-loaded corridor system The answer is C. Because a double-loaded corridor system serves rooms on both sides of it in a straight line, this is the most efficient option for most interiors. Radial and grid systems generally have much higher proportions of corridor-to-space served than double-loaded systems do.

When visiting a job site, the interior designer notices that a handrail appears to be out of place. When measuring it, the designer finds the top of the handrail to be 39½ in (1003 mm) above the nosing. In what direction and how far should the designer tell the contractor to move the handrail? (A) up by ½ in (13 mm) (B) down by 1½ in (38 mm) (C) down by 3½ in (89 mm) (D) down by 6 in (152 mm)

(C) down by 3½ in (89 mm) IBC and accessibility requirements state that handrails must be 34" to 38" high, as measured from the nosing. Moving the handrail down 3.5" and locating its top at the 36" position places it within the required limits and allows the contractor some tolerance in repositioning it.

The primary advantage of an oblique drawing is that (A) it shows the most realistic view of an object (B) all three axes are drawn at the same scale (C) existing orthographic drawings can be used as a starting point (D) it shows foreshortened lines and planes accurately

(C) existing orthographic drawings can be used as a starting point An oblique drawing has one of its planes parallel to the picture plane, so an existing floor plan or elevation can be used as the starting point. The third dimension is then represented by project lines at any convenient angle.

The three parts of a means of egress include the (A) public way, exit, and exit access (B) public way, exit access, and corridor (C) exit access, exit, and exit discharge (D) exit, exit enclosure, and exit discharge

(C) exit access, exit, and exit discharge There are three parts to a building's means of egress, or exit path, which go from the least protected to the most protected. The exit access (e.g., room, aisle, hallway, or ramp) leads to the exit. Depending on occupancy and construction type, the exit access may or may not be protected. The exit (e.g., exterior exit door, exit enclosures for stairs, or exit passageway) provides a protected path of egress between the exit access and the exit discharge. It must always be protected by fire-resistance-rated construction. The exit discharge (e.g., exterior exit stairway, exit cour, or exterior exit balcony) is the portion of the egress system between the termination fo the exit and a public way. the discharge must be unobstructed, sprinkled, and clearly visible from the exit termination point.

During programming, what would the diagram shown be used for? (A) recording notes from a client design meeting (B) showing an analysis of one of the facts of the program (C) exploring and presenting alternatives for design concepts (D) presenting part of a summary of a programmatic concept

(C) exploring and presenting alternatives for design concepts This diagram is a sketch of a design concept as one possible alternative to satisfy a programmatic concept for the design of a retail store.

Adjacency requirements for the physical movement of goods in a manufacturing plant would BEST be illustrated with a(n) (A) adjacency matrix (B) bubble diagram (C) flowchart (D) stacking diagram

(C) flowchart The answer is C. In a manufacturing plant, goods travel from one station to another during the process of fabrication. A flowchart would show the adjacencies as well as the steps in the process of manufacturing. A bubble diagram would show the adjacencies but not necessarily the specific sequence of manufacture. Neither an adjacency matrix nor a stacking diagram would adequately illustrate the relationships between stations.

A residential design in a rural area involves the addition of two bedrooms and two bathrooms. Which of the following should be the two GREATEST concerns during the home's due diligence investigation? (A) neighborhood character and zoning setbacks (B) zoning setbacks and septic capacity (C) heating system capacity and septic capacity (D) zoning height limitations and heating system capacity

(C) heating system capacity and septic capacity The answer is C. Rural areas tend to use septic tank systems rather than sewer systems. Because the addition includes two bathrooms, the home's septic capacity should be a primary concern during the due diligence investigation. The addition of two bedrooms would also increase the home's heating requirements, so the heating system's capacity should also be a primary concern of the investigation. Although zoning setbacks, neighborhood character, and zoning heights should be reviewed in any due diligence investigation, they are less of a concern in rural areas than in cities because rural houses are typically much farther apart.

An interior designer is developing plans for the ceiling in a 25,000 ft2 (2323 m2) corporate office. The program calls for the office space to consist of 70% closed offices and rooms and 30% open office space. The program has also specified that the operation of the company changes frequently, requiring rearrangement of personnel teams and project organizations. Assuming a relocatable partition system is used, which type of ceiling system should the interior designer recommend to the client? (A) custom track system (B) 60 in (1524 mm) lay-in acoustical grid (C) integrated ceiling system (D) narrow bar exposed T-bar system

(C) integrated ceiling system Integrated ceiling systems are proprietary suspended systems designed to accommodate ceiling tile, lights, supply air devices, return air grilles, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted elements, as well as partition attachment. Such a system can easily provide for frequent changes in room configuration with accompanying changes in lighting and HVAC layout.

The BEST way to gather programming information from workers in a large office is through (A) observation (B) questionnaires (C) interviews (D) benchmarks

(C) interviews Interviews combine targeted questions-and-answer sessions with observation and extemporaneous exploration of issues.

A perspective drawing is the BEST type of drawing to use when presenting to a client because it (A) is the quickest method of rendering space (B) most accurately shows vertical dimensions relative to the viewer (C) is most like the way space and objects are actually perceived (D) offers the widest choice of viewpoints

(C) is most like the way space and objects are perceived A perspective drawing gives the most realistic view of three-dimensional space as two-dimensional media.

What existing condition in a building would MOST affect the cost of a new interior design? (A) location of exits (B) limited views and daylight (C) lack of a sprinkler system (D) remote location of an electrical closet

(C) lack of a sprinkler system A sprinkler system is governed by local building codes and affects many aspects of planning, existing, materials use, and finishes. The lack of a sprinkler system can affect egress layout, finishes, and requirements for fire-rated construction, all in ways that would increase design cost and make specific design features necessary.

Which test is MOST frequently used to evaluate carpet in the United States? (A) flooring radiant panel test (B) Steiner tunnel test (C) methenamine pill test (D) methods of fire tests of building construction and materials

(C) methenamine pill test All carpet manufactured or sold in the United States is required to pass the methenamine pill test. The flooring radiant panel test is used for corridor flooring and types of flooring in only a few occupancies. The Steiner tunnel test can be used, but it is not a realistic test on carpet because the material is tested on top of the tunnel.

A designer is developing a space plan for a full floor tenant in a high-rise building. The designer needs to know which of the following to determine the maximum travel distance allowed by the IBC? (A) construction type and height of the building (B) occupancy classification and whether the design involves an exit or exit access (C) occupancy classification and whether the building is sprinklered (D) construction type and whether the building is sprinklered

(C) occupancy classification and whether the building is sprinklered To determine the maximum travel distance (described in Sol. 54) allowed by the IBC, the designer must know the occupancy classification and whether or not the building is sprinklered. travel distance is part of the exit access (described in Sol. 52) and is usually not protected. Therefore, the IBC limits the distance occupants must cross to safely exist.

An interior designer is creating the design concept for a home. In addition to satisfying the program and meeting the specific needs of the client, the designer would typically be MOST responsive to the influence of (A) economic conditions (B) cultural attitudes (C) regionalism (D) symbolism

(C) regionalism The idea is that the design of a home should reflect the unique characteristics of its geographical region.

A library is being designed to occupy only one portion of a building, and a complete set of drawings is available for the building. What information would be the MOST important to obtain from the field survey? (A) locations of structural elements (B) existing natural light sources (C) sources of noise within the building (D) locations and capacities of electrical power

(C) sources of noise within the building

The overall departmental relationships within a large company planning to occupy a multistory building would MOST likely be shown in a(n)... (A) block diagram (B) adjacency matrix (C) stacking diagram (D) bubble diagram

(C) stacking diagram The answer is C. The company is large and will occupy a multistory building and therefore multiple floors. To show overall departmental relationships (rather than individual space relationships), a stacking diagram is used. Then, individual block diagrams or bubble diagrams are developed for each floor.

An interior designer has received a construction cost estimate for an acoustical ceiling system. The area of the ceiling is 15,000 ft2 (1394 m2). The estimate is $6000 over the budget. The owner requests that the currently specified 2 ft × 2 ft (610 mm × 610 mm) grid with tegular tiles be replaced with a less expensive system while maintaining acoustical qualities and a similar aesthetic. The contractor has provided pricing for alternative ceiling systems as shown in the matrix. Based on this pricing information and knowledge of the acoustical properties of each of these types of assemblies, which alternate system should the interior designer recommend to the client? (A) drywall with level 4 finish (B) standard tile in 2 ft × 2 ft (610 mm × 610 mm) narrow grid (C) standard tile in 2 ft × 2 ft (610 mm × 610 mm) standard T-bar (D) standard tile in 2 ft × 4 ft (610 mm × 1220 mm) narrow grid

(C) standard tile in 2 ft × 2 ft (610 mm × 610 mm) standard T-bar The standard tile in a 2 ft × 2 ft (610 mm × 610 mm) standard T-bar grid provides a similar aesthetic and reduces the cost enough to conform to the construction budget (15,000 ft2 × $0.60 savings/ft2 = $9000 savings). The cost for each system needs to be calculated to determine which alternative will reduce the price of the system by at least $6000. However, first the interior designer needs to identify which system(s) will meet the owner's requirement of maintaining the specified acoustical performance and will provide a similar aesthetic. The drywall alternate clearly differs from the grid aesthetic and would not provide the sound-absorbing qualities of an acoustical tile ceiling, so this is an inappropriate choice. The 2 ft × 4 ft (610 mm × 1220 mm) grid system would save the most money, but does not provide the same aesthetic as a 2 ft × 2 ft (610 mm × 610 mm) grid. The 2 ft × 2 ft (610 mm × 610 mm) narrow grid ceiling would comply with the acoustical performance requirements, but would only save $3000 (15,000 ft2 × $0.20 savings/ft2 = $3000 savings)

Information concerning limitations on the use of a product can BEST be obtained from the (A) building code official who inspects the product (B) specialty contractor who installs the product (C) manufacturer who makes the product (D) trade association representing the product type

(C) the manufacturer who makes the product Every manufacturer knows the limitations of its products and should be consulted when one of its products is going to be used in a specific, special situation that the interior designer knows about. Although the other three sources may be consulted for additional information, only the manufacturer knows the limitations of a product.

What is the purpose of construction element A in the following diagram of a wood floor? (A) to minimize squeaking (B) to prevent chemicals from the subfloor from contaminating the wood (C) to act as a vapor barrier (D) to provide added resiliency

(C) to act as a vapor barrier Although the sheet material indicated in the drawing may help minimize squeaking, the fact that a wood floor is shown over a concrete floor should indicate that the material shown is a vapor barrier.

What type of wall treatment would be appropriate for an office waiting room where durability and low cost are required? (A) fabric wallcovering (B) thin stone tiles (C) vinyl wallcovering (D) wood veneer paneling

(C) vinyl wallcovering Of the options listed, vinyl wallcovering offers the best balance of low cost and durability. Either a Type II or Type III wallcovering could be selected based on the project budget and the amount of durability required.

Which type of sink is BEST for barrier-free design? (A) vanity (B) pedestal (C) wall hung (D) free standing

(C) wall hung

One basic theory about how inherent human motivation acts as a psychological influence on socialization and design is (A) behavior setting theory (B) proxemics (C) McClelland's human motivation theory (D) Maslow's hierarchy of needs

(D) Maslow's hierarchy of needs

In which building type are fire-resistive construction requirements likely to be LEAST restrictive? (A) Type I (B) Type II (C) Type III (D) Type IV

(D) Type IV The most restrictive building type is Type I, while the least restrictive is Type IV.

A designer is hired by a large corporation for its new headquarters. The designer estimates that the corporation needs approximately 73,000 ft2 of net space for its new facility. The corporation has leased three floors of 30,000 ft2 each. The designer needs to program the facility, assign specific areas for each space, and assist in assigning spaces more or less equally to the various floors. The best tool for the designer to use for this task would be (A) a hierarchical list (B) an outline format (C) a process diagram (D) a spreadsheet

(D) a spreadsheet The answer is D. To show a large number of individual spaces with attached floor areas and to make a summation for floor totals, a spreadsheet would be ideal. The spreadsheet's functions could accurately sum the areas, and the designer could also perform "what if" scenarios to move various spaces to each of the three floors to balance out the distribution of areas. An outline format would be cumbersome and time-consuming, and would not easily show how spaces could be assigned to the three different floors. A process diagram is not used to show a summary of spaces. A hierarchical list could be used to show the assignment of individual rooms and spaces to larger departments, but would not have the flexibility of a spreadsheet.

A designer is programming a large office installation that will occupy four floors in a high-rise building. In trying to determine which departments should be located on each floor, which of the following planning diagrams should the designer use? (A) block plans (B) bubble diagrams (C) floor plan alternatives (D) a stacking diagram

(D) a stacking diagram The answer is D. The most useful planning diagram in this situation is a stacking diagram, which is a drawing that shows the locations of major spaces or departments when a project occupies more than one floor of a multistory building. A stacking diagram based on departments or major groupings of spaces is usually worked out before each floor area is planned in detail. Bubble diagrams show space relationships graphically as outlined by adjacency matrices, and floor plan alternatives just show possible ways programmed spaces can be laid out; neither of these relates directly to how spaces are organized floor by floor. Block plans are developed after a concept diagram and before a final schematic space plan, so the planning of which department goes on which floor should already be done by the time a block plan is developed.

Thermal comfort for a person sitting in a classroom depends on... (A) air temperature and humidity only (B) clothing type, air temperature, and air movement (C) air movement, convection, radiation, and conduction (D) air movement, air temperature, radiation, and humidity

(D) air movement, air temperature, radiation, and humidity The answer is D. These are the four basic components of human thermal comfort: air movement, air temperature, radiation, and humidity. Although air temperature and humidity are two of the most critical aspects of comfort, they alone are not sufficient to describe it. Clothing can moderate the effects of air temperature, but it is not one of the basic components of comfort. Conduction is a very minor part of how the human body gains and loses heat.

The illustration shown represents a(n) (A) function assignment (B) block diagram (C) departmental grouping (D) area diagram

(D) area diagram The illustration is an example of an area diagram showing the relative square footage required for the various rooms or spaces. Function assignments and departmental groupings are not names used in preliminary planning.

The flame-spread rating of wood panel wainscoting must be (A) a minimum of class A (B) class B if the wainscoting takes up more than 10% of the wall area (C) nothing, because it is not regulated (D) based on location and occupancy

(D) based on location and occupancy Wood wall finishes of paneling or wainscoting are regulated in the same way as other wall and ceiling finishes. The minimum flame-spread rating depends on the occupancy and the location in the building.

The given plan drawing diagrammatically illustrates a built-in seating arrangement within a larger room. Which Gestalt principle informs how the overall shape would be perceived? (A) simplicity (B) grouping (C) continuity (D) closure

(D) closure The answer is D. In Gestalt psychology, closure is the human tendency to perceive an incomplete form as complete. This tendency is especially strong when the form suggests a simple shape such as a circle or square. The seating arrangement shown in the drawing strongly suggests a circle.

A designer is developing a large, multilevel retail space with a variety of finishes, lighting, and fixture types. How can the designer BEST communicate the design to the client if cost is not a factor? (A) draw several quick sketches of the space from different points of view (B) make a large-scale model with representations of the finishes applied (C) color a detailed perspective rendering as accurately as possible (D) commission a fully rendered 3-D computer model that can show a "fly-through"

(D) commission a fully rendered 3-D computer model that can show a "fly-through" When cost is not a factor, the designer can best communicate the design of a complex space by commissioning a fully rendered 3-D computer model that can show a "fly through". With this capability, the model can show the variety of finishes, lighting, and fixture types on all levels of the large, multilevel retail space from different points of view.

What type of system would be MOST appropriate in a large commercial remodeling project where a decorative acoustical ceiling and plenum access are required? (A) integrated (B) linear metal strip (C) gypsum wallboard (D) concealed spline

(D) concealed spline Plenum access precludes the use of gypsum wallboard for the ceiling unless many access panels were used, which is costly and can become unsightly with use. Both integrated ceilings and linear metal strip ceilings provide for some access, but their cost in a large commercial project would not be warranted. An integrated ceiling may be a good choice, but the question does not give enough information about the parameters of the problem to make this a reasonable option.

Interior spaces often need to be multifunctional or flexible. What are the three components of flexibility as a programmatic design concept? (A) versatility, convertibility, and grouping (B) expandability, hierarchy, and flow (C) flow, hierarchy, and convertibility (D) convertibility, expandability, and versatility

(D) convertibility, expandability, and versatility The answer is D. The three components of flexibility are convertibility, expandability, and versatility. Convertibility refers to a space's usefulness for different functions through the conversion of the space. Expandability refers to a space's ability to accommodate growth through expansion. Versatility refers to a space's ability to accommodate a variety of activities.

In the five-step programming process outlined by the book Problem Seeking, the fifth step is to state the problem. What is the order of the first four steps? (A) determine needs, collect and analyze facts, uncover and test concepts, establish goals (B) collect and analyze facts, determine needs, establish goals, uncover and test concepts (C) uncover and test concepts, establish goals, determine needs, collect and analyze facts (D) establish goals, collect and analyze facts, uncover and test concepts, determine needs

(D) establish goals, collect and analyze facts, uncover and test concepts, determine needs The book Problem Seeking states that establishing goals is the critical first step in the five-step process because it sets the direction for the other four steps.

Understanding a client's sustainability goals when looking for office space will help the interior designer. (A) determine if the project can be LEED certified (B) review the energy conservation of the mechanical system (C) determine if the building can be located in a brownfield site (D) focus site analyses on features that support sustainable design

(D) focus site analyses on features that support sustainable design Understanding the client's sustainability goals is important so that the designer can assist the owner in finding and choosing a project site that supports these goals.

When coordinating the location of emergency warning systems consisting of audio and visual alarms as part of the reflected ceiling layout, the interior designer must coordinate with the (A) electrical contractor (B) electrical engineer (C) fire protection engineer (D) mechanical engineer

(D) mechanical engineer The mechanical engineer is responsible for locating and specifying the alarm devices required. The interior designer is responsible for coordinating the location of the warning systems on the reflected ceiling plan within the parameters of the life safety and building codes.

What type of drawing is shown in the illustration? (A) alternatives diagram (B) parameter study (C) needs matrix (D) morphological chart

(D) morphological chart The answer is D. A morphological chart is a graphical method used to explore various possible solutions to a design problem. As shown in the illustration, the various requirements of a design are listed across the top of the chart, with the number of possible solutions along the left column. These are combined in various ways to suggest a physical response to the issue at hand—in this case, how an entrance to a bar from a hotel lobby should be designed.

The two MOST important factors in determining the number of exits required for a particular room or space are the (A) occupancy and the distance from the room exit to the building exit (B) exit widths and the common path of egress travel (C) occupant load and the building size (D) occupancy and the occupant load

(D) occupancy and the occupant load The occupancy and occupant load are used to determine the number of exits.

When specifying a specialty flooring material, the interior designer can obtain unbiased information on the hazards of a cleaning agent required for maintenance from the (A) cleaning agent manufacturer (B) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) (C) flooring manufacturer (D) safety data sheet

(D) safety data sheet

An interior designer typically develops color and material boards during the... (A) design development phase only (B) schematic design phase only (C) programming and schematic design phases (D) schematic design and design development phases

(D) schematic design and design development phases The answer is D. In most cases, the selection of finishes and furniture begins during the schematic design phase. The selection is then refined and finalized during the design development phase, before drawings and specifications are finalized in the construction document phase.

Which of the following should an interior designer FIRST take into account when designing a church's interior? (A) cultural attitudes (B) proxemics (C) regionalism (D) symbolism

(D) symbolism Religious beliefs and ceremonies are strongly connected with the use of symbols; therefore, an interior designer should first take symbolism into account.

What is the drawing shown most likely used for? (A) as a starting point for design development (B) as a basis for construction documents (C) for the further development of a preliminary stacking diagram (D) to show the client a conceptual approach to a design

(D) to show the client a conceptual approach to a design The drawing shown is a schematic design developed to show the client a conceptual approach to design. It is not detailed enough to act as a starting point for design development because it lacks dimensions, material indications, and other design development information.

Proxemics would be MOST helpful to a designer who is deciding on the (A) size of a doctor's examination room (B) location of the office of the president within an office suite (C) size and shape of a conference table (D) type and spacing of seating in an audiovisual presentation room

(D) type and spacing of seating in an audiovisual presentation room Proximeics is the study of personal space needs and the application of htat knowledge to actual spae planning. Determining the design of seating where people will be very clsoe to each other is the situation where proxemics would be most helpful.

Thin-set terrazzo

- a 1/4" or 3/8" thick resinous topping directly applied over a sub floor

What are the six principles of design?

1. BALANCE 2. HARMONY & UNITY 3. RHYTHM 4. EMPHASIS & FOCUS 5. CONTRAST & VARIETY 6. PROPORTION

What are the elements of design

1. FORM 2. SCALE 3. COLOR 4. TEXTURE 5. PATTERN 6. LIGHT

There are three standard fullnesses:

100% (2 x the width of the finished drapery) 150% (2.5 x the width of the finished drapery) 200% (3 x the width of the finished drapery)

Audible alarms must produce a sound that exceeds the prevailing sound level in the room or space by at least ____ dB.

15dB

Retainage

A certain percentage of money owed to the contractor for work progress that is held back by the owner to encourage completion of the project.

What is a block diagram?

A drawing that shows the various functions of a system by a series of blocks. These blocks do not include any detail, but instead indicate what happens in each block.

Adjacency Matrix

A matrix which records the number of direct links between vertices

Emergency lighting requirements for means of egress requires a minimum lighting level of __________ at the floor level upon initial operation. A. 1 footcandle B. 3 footcandles C. 10 footcandles D. none of these

A. 1 foot-candle

On the illustration shown, place the hot spot marker in the location that would make it difficult to install the glazing assembly in a level position.

A shim space should be provided above the blocking. Shim spaces allow accurately built construction elements to fit within an opening that may not be perfectly square so it can be leveled. Shim spaces are also used to provide enough clearance to slide the element into the opening. The shaded area in the illustration indicates the margin of error for placing the hot spot marker. The interior window assembly, including the glazing and frame, would be assembled in the woodworking shop and brought to the job site as a unit. The blocking indicated below the window assembly would follow the line of the structural floor. If there are variations in the floor slab, or variations in the thickness of the blocking members, the top of this blocking will likely not be level. Placing the finished glazed portion directly on the blocking will skew the window assembly and put it out of level.

Proprietary Specification

A specification which calls for desired materials, products, systems, and equipment by their trade names and model numbers.

Descriptive Specification

A specification which describes all product components, arrangements, assembly methods, properties, and other details and requirements.

Resilient Flooring

A thin, durable floor covering, manufactured in tile or sheet form, such as vinyl, cork, linoleum, and so on.

On an electrical plan, what does the following symbol represent? A. dimmer switch B. duplex outlet C. 3-way switch D. double switch

A. dimmer switch Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Electrical and Lighting Symbols On an electrical plan an S with a line through it represents a switch. The one shown above with a D next to it tells you that this switch has a dimmer control also.

bubble diagram

A type of concept map that uses ovals and circles to represent rooms and their relationships within the diagram of a building footprint.

The drawing shown is a sketch detail of a partial-height partition, which, in plan view, is part of a U-shaped enclosure that will be used to support and enclose a built-in stand-up work surface. What problem in construction does this detail indicate?

A) The partition will be unstable due to its height. (B) The 2× blocking will not provide sufficient support for the work surface. (C) The 5/4 oak trim will be difficult to install level. (D) There is not enough blocking to attach the wood base. The answer is C. There is no shim space indicated below the 5/4 oak trim, so the metal stud top runner would have to be installed perfectly level, which is difficult with rough framing, so it would be difficult to install the oak trim level. Because of the U-shaped configuration and the additional bracing that the work surface will provide to the vertical elements, the partition will have sufficient stability. The 2× blocking will provide sufficient backing for the attachment of any work surface support, such as a wood cleat, on the outside of the partition. The blocking shown inside the metal stud runner would provide sufficient support for the wood base. It could even be omitted if metal stud finishing screws are used to attach the base to the partition.

Which of the following are critical planning concerns for commercial office space? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) adjacencies (B) daylighting (C) means of egress (D) plan type (E) efficiency factor (F) column locations

A) adjacencies (B) daylighting (C) means of egress (E) efficiency factor

Lighting levels and energy power budgets are set by International Building Codes and other standards, these Codes provide power-level criteria based upon the use of the building. For office buildings, the overall building is allowed to use how many watts per square foot to power the interior lighting for the entire building? A. .79 B. 1.06 C. 1.05 C. .81

A. .79 Source: 2018 International Energy Conservation Code, Chapter 4 Commercial Energy Efficiency, Interior Lighting Power Allowances: Building Area Method IECC and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 require lighting power density (LPD) calculations. This applies to: Lighting powered by a building's electrical service - can include interior, exterior and site lighting Nonresidential buildings greater than three stories, includes multi-family residential buildings Applies to new construction and major renovation, tenant fit-outs of existing buildings, additions to buildings, and retrofits of existing lighting systems The code prescribes limits for installed power (in watts/sq. ft.) and mandates functional requirements for lighting controls. Requirements vary by application (e.g., office, retail sales area, warehouse, classroom, patient room, etc.) Both include tables with lighting power density (LPD) values for a whole building — Building Area Method(BAM) or in specific spaces, Space-by-Space Method and set the LPD or maximum wattage per square foot(square meter) allowed. Although the energy codes and standards required for electrical systems will typically be incorporated into the design by an electrical engineer, the choice of light fixtures, appliances, and distribution of electrical outlets by the interior designer can affect the building's energy efficiency. To meet the code, the sum of all interior lighting power cannot exceed the determined wattage allowance. This affects the type and quantity of light fixtures included in the design. Because this question asks for the overall building "how many watts per square foot to power the interior lighting for the entire building?", use the "Interior Lighting Power Allowances, Building Area Method" value for Office of 0.79 watts per square foot.

What would be the BEST scale to use to show a detail of a reveal for a full height millwork cabinet, which is to be scribed to a gypsum board ceiling? A. 1 ½" - 3" scale B. 3/16" - ¼" scale C. 3"- 6" scale D. ¾"- 1" scale

A. 1 ½" - 3" scale Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Communication Methods, Scale 1 ½" - 3" scale is the best scale to use for ceiling details, millwork details, and furniture details. 3"-6" scale is too large ¾" - 1" scale is typically reserved for enlarged floor plans and full wall sections 3/16" - ¼" is too small for important details to be seen clearly at this size Never use 3/16" scale, as it is too close to ¼ "scale and anyone looking at this scale could mistaken them for ¼"

The common path of egress travel distance cannot exceed: Assume a sprinklered building, business occupancy, spaces with 1 exit or exit access doorway. A. 100' (30.5 m) B. 75' (23 m) C. 200' (61 m) D. 150' (46 m)

A. 100' (30.5 m) Source: 2018 International Building Code, CHAPTER 10 MEANS OF EGRESS IBC 2018, Table 1006.2.1 SPACES WITH ONE EXIT OR EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY Per the table, a B occupancy with a sprinkler system has a maximum common path of egress travel of 100′-0″.

Using the square foot calculation method, determine the quantity of wallpaper at 27″ (686 mm) wide [each single roll covers 36 sq ft (3.35 m2)] needed for a room that is 20 ft(6096 mm) x 25 ft(7620 mm) with 10 ft(3048 mm) high ceilings. The room has a 5 ft (1524 mm) x 6 ft (1829 mm) window, two 2 ft (610 mm) x 3 ft (915 mm) windows and one 3 ft (915 mm) x 7 ft (2134 mm) door. How many double rolls are required? A. 15 double rolls B. 12 double rolls C. 30 double rolls D. 24 double rolls

A. 15 double rolls Source: Qpractice, Wall Treatments Calculate the perimeter of the room 25 + 25 + 20 + 20 = 90. Multiply the perimeter by the height of the walls to be covered to get the total amount of area required in sqft 90 x 10 = 900. Add 20% for waste - 900 + 180 (20%) = 1080. Calculate the area of the doors and windows and other features that will not be covered, 30 sq ft + 12 sq ft + 21 sq ft = 63 sq ft window 5×6 = 30 sq ft (2) window 2'x3′ = 6′ x 2 windows = 12 sq ft+ 1 door 3′ x 7′ = 21 sq ft. Subtract the area in step 4 from the total in step 3 1080 sq ft - 63 sq ft = 1017 sq ft. Divide the area per roll of wallpaper into the area found in step 5 to determine the number of rolls needed 1017 divided by 36 sq ft = round up to 29 single rolls or 15 double rolls

In checking a floor plan for compliance with accessible regulations, what minimum dimension is required for "X" in the image below, to confirm that the door meets requirements? A. 18" Min B. 12" Max C. 12" Min D. 1/2 the width of the door opening

A. 18" Min Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, Figure 404.3.2 Maneuvering Clearances at Manual Swinging Doors Maneuvering clearances are required at standard swinging doors to allow easy operation of the latch and provide for clear swing.

Which of the following would be the most appropriate typical wall assembly for a high - end legal office. A. 3 5/8" Metal Stud with 5/8" gypsum board on either side B. 2 ½" Metal Stud with ½" gypsum board on either side C. 2" x 4" Wood Stud with 5/8" gypsum board on either side D. 2" x 6" Wood Stud with ½" gypsum board on either side

A. 3 5/8" Metal Stud with 5/8" gypsum board on either side Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Interior Construction, Partitions The thickness used depends on the particular application, frame spacing, and building code requirements. For most commercial work, 5/8 in thick (16 mm) wallboard is used. As this is a commercial application, metal studs should be used. Commercial construction typically uses 2 1/2 in or 3 5/8 in (64 mm or 92 mm) metal studs spaced 24 in (610 mm) on center.

Tactile characters on signs shall be located a minimum of how many inches (mm) above the finish floor. A. 48 inches (1220 mm) B. 36 inches (914 mm) C. 42 inches (1067 mm) D. 56 inches (1422 mm)

A. 48 inches (1220 mm) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 703.4.1 Height Above Finish Floor or Ground. 703.4.1 Height Above Finish Floor or Ground. Tactile characters on signs shall be located 48 inches (1220 mm) minimum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the lowest tactile character, and 60 inches (1525 mm) maximum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the highest tactile character.

The client requires several new open office workstations for a current renovation. Their team inhabits workstations while on sales calls throughout most of their day. They also collaborate by talking to adjacent team members. What combination of materials and height would be most appropriate for a panel-based system? A. 48" H Acoustical Fabric [1220 mm] B. 60" H Acoustical Fabric [1525 mm] C. 36" H Writeable Surface [915 mm] D. 42" H Painted Metal [1067 mm]

A. 48" H Acoustical Fabric [1220 mm] Source: Panero, J., & Zelnik, M. (2014). Human Dimension and Interior Space. Random House Digital Inc. The correct answer is 48" H Acoustical Fabric [1220 mm]. Because the team performs several functions, they have a combination of program needs. Sales calls throughout the day indicate a need for acoustic speech privacy in the open office. Collaboration throughout the day requires visual and acoustic accessibility to the adjacent team members. Workstation partition height should be designed to the eye height per the 95% percentile or above category for maximum privacy. To accommodate visual access to the adjacent workstations, we need to select the panel height in the 5% bracket. This is 56.3" (143 cm) for women and 60.8" (154.4 cm) for men. Typical eye and ear height in the 95% range is 33.9" (86.1 cm) for men, and 31.7" (80.5 cm) for women. A painted metal panel does not provide an acoustic speech buffer. 48" H panels would fall within the visual access bracket height accommodating anthropometric and ergonomic parameters while standing and sitting. The acoustic tack panel provides sound reflection, blocks sound transmission, and absorbs ambient sound.

Which of these types of systems furniture solutions would be best to address acoustical issues in an open office layout? A. 54"/1372 mm high fabric wrapped panels with a hollow core of fiberglass B. 42"/1066 mm tall desktop panels made of fabric-covered rigid fiberglass C. 65"/1651 mm high panels with a fabric-covered masonite inner septum D. 65"/1651 mm tall panels with a metal core bottom and glass framed top

A. 54"/1372 mm high fabric wrapped panels with a hollow core of fiberglass Source: Qpractice, Product Components The correct answer is a 54"/1372 mm high fabric wrapped panels with a hollow core of fiberglass. Panels can use an inner septum or a masonite or metal sheet barrier to reflect sound. Acoustical panels help to absorb ambient sound and block sound transmission between workstations. A hollow inner core between outer panel materials is covered with one to two inches of fiberglass as a sound absorber.

In the hallway of a commercial space, the bottom edge of a pendant light must be at least how high above the finished floor? A. 80" (2032 mm) AFF B. 94" (2485 mm) AFF C. 72" (1828 mm) AFF D. 90" (2300 mm) AFF

A. 80" (2032 mm) AFF Source: 2018 International Building Code, SECTION 1003 GENERAL MEANS OF EGRESS 1003.3.1 Headroom.Protruding objects are permitted to extend below the minimum ceiling height required by Section 1003.2 where a minimum headroom of 80 inches (2032 mm) is provided over any circulation paths, including walks, corridors, aisles, and passageways. Not more than 50 percent of the ceiling area of a means of egress shall be reduced in height by protruding objects.

Which test determines the colorfastness under light exposure of textile materials? A. AATCC 16 B. crocking resistance test C. light resistance test D. blue scale test

A. AATCC 16 Source: AATC, Textile testing The AATCC 16 (American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorist) test uses a Fade-Ometer to determine the color fastness under light exposure of textile materials using six different test options. The most common test option uses xenon arc lamp with continuous light. Although many tests evaluate aspects of colorfastness, panel and upholstery fabrics are most commonly tested for Colorfastness to Light (AATCC 16) and Colorfastness to Crocking or rubbing (AATCC 8). Read more: Ballast, D. K., FAIA, 9425, N. N. PDF - Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam, eTextbook. Selection of Materials, Finishes, and Furnishings, Standards, Wearability and Durability Standards

Determining "rentable" areas for most tenants in a leased office, retail, residential, or industrial building is extremely important. And while the method for measuring space and determining each tenant's prorated share of the common building areas is at the discretion of the building owner, what is the MOST COMMON standard used throughout North America? A. ANSI/BOMA Z65.1 B. ANSI/IFMA X5.3 C. ASTM E1836/E1836M D. ANSI Z97.1

A. ANSI/BOMA Z65.1 Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Measuring and Drafting, Determining Total Required Area, Determining the Rentable Area Once the client's required occupant area is determined (or at least carefully estimated), the required rentable area must be calculated. In a leased office, retail, residential, or industrial building, the building owner bases rent on the actual area each tenant uses (the occupant area) in addition to a prorated share of portions of the building used by all tenants. These common building areas include shared corridors, restrooms, elevator lobbies, and mechanical rooms, as well as amenity areas such as conference rooms, food service facilities, vending areas, and day care centers. The rentable area is the product of the tenant's occupant area and a load factor to account for the shared portions of the building. Rentable area = Occupant area x load factor The method for measuring space and determining each tenant's prorated share of the common building areas is at the discretion of the building owner. However, Building Owners and Managers Association (BOMA) International produces standards detailing common methods of measuring space for retail, industrial, multi-unit residential, and mixed use buildings. These standards are widely used in the United States, Canada, and many other countries. For office buildings, the most used standard is Office Buildings: Standard Methods of Measurement (ANSI/BOMA Z65.1). The International Facility Management Association (IFMA) also produces standards that give methods for measuring space, such as Standard Practice for Building Floor Area Measurements for Facility Management (ASTM E1836/E1836M). ANSI/BOMA Z65.1 and ASTM E1836/E1836M have been combined and compared in A Unified Approach for Measuring Office Space; For Use in Facility and Property Management, jointly published by BOMA International and IFMA. Building owners may also use a factor based on competitive market conditions, rather than BOMA International and IFMA standards. The interior designer must clarify with the building owner which method is being used to determine rentable area.

Critical Radiant Flux refers to: A. ASTM E-648/NFPA253 measures a horizontal floor covering's ability to resist supporting a flame, assigning a rating of Class I or II. B. A measurement of the contribution to flame spread of draperies or other window treatments. C. ASTM E-648/NFPA253 measures upholstered furniture's critical resistance to ignition by a smoldering cigarette. D. A wall covering's ability to maintain or increase radiant heat insulation in a space.

A. ASTM E-648/NFPA253 measures a horizontal floor covering's ability to resist supporting a flame, assigning a rating of Class I or II. Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Glossary, ASTM E648 (NFPA 253) Critical Radiant Flux can be defined as the minimum radiant energy a fire needs to sustain flame propagation. NFPA 253 is a standard presents a method for evaluating critical radiant flux of floor coverings in corridors or exits, thus providing a basis for estimating one aspect of the fire exposure behavior of floor covering systems. This fire test response standard describes a procedure for measuring the critical radiant flux of horizontally mounted floor covering systems exposed to a flaming ignition source in a graded, radiant heat energy environment within a test chamber.

Which test gives the most accurate evaluation of the safety of a partition system? A. ASTM E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials B. room corner test C. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials D. Steiner tunnel test

A. ASTM E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials Source: Harmon, K.E.K.S. K. (2018). The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., FIRE AND SMOKE RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES ASTM E119 tests the entire assembly, not just the finish materials like ASTM E84 (also known as the Steiner tunnel test). The ASTM E119 test is best at evaluating any barrier, like a partition, that is intended to prevent the spread of fire. Fire and smoke separation is required between two or more family dwellings, such as a duplex or a townhouse. Depending on whether they are side by side or above each other, they must be separated by either a fire resistance-rated wall or a horizontal assembly. The IRC references standards ASTM E119, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction, and UL 263, Standards for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials for the specific requirements.

A building can receive LEED credit if the carpet used meets the requirements of the A. CRI IAQ program B. Greenguard registry C. South Coast Air Quality Management District D. Green Seal product standards

A. CRI IAQ program Source: Carpet and Rug Institute, Green Label Plus: A Higher Standard for Indoor Air Quality The carpet may be on the Greenguard Registry or have a Green Seal label, but neither is sufficient for LEED credit. The SCAQMD sets standards for VOCs, but meeting their requirements is not sufficient for receiving LEED credit. A building can receive a LEED credit for using a carpet system that meets or exceeds the requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute's (CRI) IAQ Carpet Testing Program. In 1992, CRI launched its Green Label program to test carpet, cushions and adhesives to help specifiers identify products with very low emissions of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs). In the 2000s, CRI launched the Green Label Plus programs for carpet, adhesives, and cushion. These enhanced programs set higher standards for IAQ and ensure that customers are purchasing the very lowest emitting products available on the market.

All of the below items are necessary to be included on a copy of meeting minutes except? A. Company logo B. To do list C. Meeting attendees D. Agenda items

A. Company logo Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration All though often included, a company's logo is not necessary to be on a set of meeting minutes. It should be indicated with in the minutes who the facilitator of the meeting.

Which of the following construction drawing types provides primary dimensions for new construction elements? A. Construction Plans B. Detail Elevations C. Demolition Plans D. Reflected Ceiling Plans

A. Construction Plans Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Construction Drawings, Specifications, and Contracts Demolition Plans do not include new construction elements. Detail Elevations provide detail dimensions but the overall and primary dimensions are typically already provided in the construction plan. Specific layout dimensions will be supplied on the reflected ceiling plan, but again, the overall and primary dimensions that provide the framework for the ceilings and lighting layout are typically already provided in the construction plan.

While as a competent designer needs to understand issues across all phases of the design process, zoning requirements are usually thoroughly investigated, satisfied and resolved in which phase of the design? A. Design Development phase B. Schematic Design phase C. Construction Administration phase D. Programming phase

A. Design Development phase Source: Wakita, O. A., Bakhoum, N. R., Linde, R. M. The Professional Practice of Architectural Working Drawings., WORKING GUIDELINES FOR PREPARING CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Making the transition from approved schematic drawings to design development drawings to construction documents is important because it completes the process of making decisions about the physical characteristics of the building. Accomplishing this transition—the design development phase—requires that the following basic requirements be satisfied and thoroughly investigated: Building code Green code Other requirements, such as those set by the zoning department.

When monitoring the fee projection for a project, you notice that you have 212 hours budgeted for a week long time period during the Construction Document phase. How should you prepare your team for the work assigned for that week? A. Discuss and divide the work among a 5 person team establishing an effective division of labor based on experience and expertise with the hopes that little to no overtime will need to be taken. B. Divide that work among a 5 person team with the expectation that someone will take on some overtime to keep the project on task. C. Divide that work among a 6 person team so that no overtime is applied to the project. D. Divide that work among a 5 person team and ask for a volunteer to make sure the tasks are completed by the end of the week.

A. Discuss and divide the work among a 5 person team establishing an effective division of labor based on experience and expertise with the hopes that little to no overtime will need to be taken. Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Project Management: Project Management Responsibilities The project manager is responsible for monitoring the time, fee and quality of the project but they are also responsible for coordinating with the design staff for optimum efficiency as well as for the good/growth of the design team. In this instance, it would be best for the project manager to consult with their team and provide the opportunity for them to take the initiative, recognize their own strengths and weaknesses, and allow them to responsibility for certain tasks at their level. The expectations of the team as well as the individual is made clear and the team can push together for the same goal - staying on schedule and in budget.

________________ is best located with the help of drawings, as much of it is related to the communication, electrical, and other architectural features of the building. A. Equipment B. Furniture C. Finishes D. all of these

A. Equipment Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Furnishings and Equipment Plans Equipment information, guidelines, and location of electrical and plumbing interfaces are often supplied by the manufacturer or supplier, and coordinated by the interior designer. He or she works with the manufacturer, installer, and user when selecting this equipment. In residential work, equipment might include appliances, security systems, or built-in ironing boards. Office equipment in the nonresidential area might include computers, printers, copiers, and other work-related devices. In some situations, consultants, such as commercial kitchen specialists, do the actual equipment installation plan if it is complex.

All the dimension standards are correct in properly annotating the interior dimension of the accessible washroom floor plan except: A. III, IV B. I, III C. IV D. II

A. III, IV Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, FIG. 604.2 WATER CLOSET LOCATION Tag III should be drawn to the centerline of the water closet, and Tag IV should be drawn from inside finish face to inside finish face of the partition.

What would be the best way to ensure that the finish on new millwork matches the finish on existing millwork on a remodeling project? A. Indicate on the drawings and in the specifications that the new work should match the existing work. B. Ask the client to find out what was used on the old job, and include that information in the specifications. C. Research the manufacturer and color of the existing finish, and include that information in the specifications. D. Ask the painting contractor to investigate what finish was previously used, and include that information in the finish schedule.

A. Indicate on the drawings and in the specifications that the new work should match the existing work. "Indicate on the drawings and in the specifications that the new work should match the existing work" is the simplest and most reliable because it puts the entire burden of matching the existing finish on the contractor and painting subcontractor. The contractor/subcontractor is most likely to have the knowledge and experience to make the match. Also, putting the notes on both the drawings and specifications ensures that the general contractor would be responsible for correcting the finish if it did not match.

An interior designer is designing a feature wall in an office reception area that is to have a specialty high-gloss paint finish applied. The area will use directional lighting to accent the wall and company logo located on the feature wall. What level of drywall finishing should the designer specify? A. Level 5 B. Level 1 C. Level 4 D. Level 2

A. Level 5 Source: Interior Construction and Detailing, Partitions, Standard Types of Gypsum Wallboard Finish Level 5 is a high-quality gypsum board finish that is recommended for feature walls with strong lighting or specialty paint finishes including gloss and semi-gloss paint. It is the highest quality finish of drywall and the best choice to provide a uniform surface for specialty finishes

Loads in a building can be weights from occupants, furniture, and other movable equipment: A. Live B. Dynamic C. Dead D. Fixed

A. Live Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Structural Systems for Buildings Load-bearing walls are designed to support the loads (dead and live) from floors and roofs that ultimately rest on them. Dead loads are the permanent material weights of the building components, equipment, and other fixed elements. Live loadscan be weights from occupants, furniture, and other movable equipment, these are loads produced by the use and occupancy of the building or other structure that does not include construction or environmental loads, such as wind load, snow load.

If a designer wanted to emphasize one item in a retail client's store, which of the following design features would best achieve this goal? A. Locating the item on a main circulation axis and spotlighting it. B. Arranging a grouping of several of the items among single pieces of the other items. C. Putting the item on a brightly colored pedestal in its usual place in the store. D. Having an oversized model of the item made for display near the entrance.

A. Locating the item on a main circulation axis and spotlighting it. Source: Jones, Lynn M. Beginnings of Interior Environments, 11/e, Elements and Principles of Design Emphasis in a room refers to the focal point and supportive furnishings that create the center of attention. In every well-planned room, it is effective to have one feature repeatedly draw the eye. This emphasis or focal point can bring a feeling of order and unity into a room, with all other groupings subordinated to it. Although all four options could emphasize the object, the correct option uses location, position, and lighting to focus attention on the item. When there is a lack of emphasis in a room, the space is uninteresting. Too much emphasis (i.e., more than one or several centers of interest) can produce chaos and unrest. Emphasis is greatly affected by visual stimuli. Our eyes naturally scan a room and seek out the focal point to provide a sense of repose.

What would be the best type of light source for a jewelry display case? A. MR16 B. HID C. fluorescent D. incandescent

A. MR16 Source: Designing With Light: The Art, Science and Practice of Architectural Lighting Design, Designing with Light MR16 lamps are available in the smallest lamp size of the choices given and could easily fit within the area of a display case. Because they are relatively small, the MR16's point source reflection on a reflective surface is also small. This enhances sparkle in materials such as jewelry, glass, and metallic thread. MR16 lamps were traditionally a type of halogen (incandescent) bulb, but are now available in LED that use half the power of a traditional halogen version.

While conducting a site visit, the interior designer notices a safety concern in the electrician's workspace. What should they do first? A. Make the contractor and owner aware of the issue and follow up with a notice in writing B. Discuss the issue with the electrician prior to leaving the site and follow up with the contractor to make sure the issue was corrected C. Discuss the issue with the contractor and follow up with owner to make sure the issue was corrected D. Discuss the issue and solutions with the contractor and inform the electrician of the agreed upon solution.

A. Make the contractor and owner aware of the issue and follow up with a notice in writing Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration The contractor is solely responsible for safety on the job site. If the interior designer volunteers suggestions or directions concerning construction means and techniques in regard to safety issues, the interior designer may also assume legal responsibility and be held liable for accidents or other problems. If the interior designer observes an obvious safety violation, he or she should call it to the attention of both the contractor (but not suggest how it can be corrected) and owner and should follow up with a notice in writing. If the safety problem is not corrected, the interior designer should notify both the contractor and the owner in writing.

On what sheet of a construction drawing set would be the most logical location for the door schedule? A. On the partition plan B. On the title sheet with the general notes C. On the details sheet D. On its own page grouped with other schedules

A. On the partition plan Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings Schedules are generally located on the sheet where they most logically apply. Since new doors are noted on the partition plan, it makes the most sense to locate the door schedule on the same sheet for ease of reference.

With regards to wayfinding, what are Lynch's five mapping elements? A. Paths, Edges, Districts, Nodes, Landmarks B. Paths, Signs, Landmarks, Towns, Transitions C. Transitions, Nodes, Paths, Edges, Landmarks D. Districts, Aisles, Nodes, Monuments, Edges

A. Paths, Edges, Districts, Nodes, Landmarks Source: Binggeli, Corky. Interior Graphic Standards: Student Edition., Environmental and Behavioral Issues, Wayfinding Lynch's research resulted in the identification of five categories of elements that people use to map an environment: Paths: Channels of movement Edges: Boundaries that break, contain, or run parallel to forms Districts: Areas of recognizable identity Nodes: Places of intense activity Landmarks: Points of reference that are visually distinguishable

What accounts for the greatest percentage of a business's operating expense? A. People B. Furniture C. Energy D. Rent

A. People Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 3rd Edition ePDF for QPractice., The Business of Interior Design, Financial Resources The highest cost to the firm for providing design services is people — specifically, the designer's salary. People account for upwards of 70% of total business costs, including employee wages, benefits, payroll, and other related taxes.

CEU's or "continuing education units" serve what main purpose? A. Provide lifelong learning opportunities outside of a formal degree. B. Afford a platform for obtaining NCIDQ Certification. C. Show that a designer is current with codes and regulations. D. Cover those areas of learning not addressed by a formal degree.

A. Provide lifelong learning opportunities outside of a formal degree. Source: Kennon, K. E. (2018). Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Professional Advancement, Lifelong Learning "Educational programs that provide continuing education units (CEU) provide short-term coursework in a wide variety of topical-interest areas. This is the most common way for professionals to obtain lifelong learning opportunities. CEU classes provide a means for professional interior designers to remain current in the practice of interior design. Courses that provide CEU credits are those that have been approved by a reviewing body. Not all seminars and workshops provide approved CEU credits."

Base-Bid Specification/Equal Specification

Calls out a proprietary material or product but allows the substitution of other products that the contractor thinks are equal to the one stated; risky because the contractor may substitute a less expensive item that he thinks is equal but may not be

While in the Contract Administration phase of a project, the designer has received the shop drawings as shown below, directly from a consultant. What would be the BEST course of action for the Interior Designer to take next? A. Return the shop drawings without review; Shop drawings should come from the general contractor directly. B. Verify field measurements and materials against control samples before approving the shop drawings. C. Modify your construction document drawings to match the shop drawings. D. Review and approved the shop drawings.

A. Return the shop drawings without review; Shop drawings should come from the general contractor directly. Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration, Submittals When shop drawings and other submittals are prepared by the subcontractors and material suppliers, they are sent to the general contractor, who is responsible for reviewing and approving them. By reviewing them, the contractor represents that field measurements have been verified, materials have been checked, and other construction criteria have been coordinated. Only after this review should the contractor send the submittals to the interior designer. If they are not checked and signed by the contractor, the interior designer should immediately return them without review.

Which interior design service is specific to the contract administration phase of a project? A. Review shop drawings B. Review consultant contracts C. Provide installation details D. Develop budget

A. Review shop drawings Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Preparing Design Contracts, Submittals Sometimes, at the beginning of contract administration or perhaps during the course of this phase, a vendor may have to provide materials, drawings, or documents for approval. As a group, these are referred to as submittals. For example, the vendor may have to submit items such as finish samples of wood for furniture, literature from manufacturers, or test results or certificates related to life safety code requirements. Vendor submittals of shop drawings and finish samples for custom pieces or special installations may also be required.

Under the A151-2019, the vendor _______ and ______ FF&E in the project. A. Sells and installs B. Bids and sells C. Sells and delivers D. Places new and removes existing

A. Sells and installs Source: AIA Contract Documents, A151-2019 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Vendor for Furniture, Furnishings, and Equipment (FF&E) A151-2019, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Vendor for Furniture, Furnishings, and Equipment (FF&E) is an umbrella or stand-alone agreement intended for interiors projects where a vendor will provide and install most or all of the FF&E for a project. As FF&E vendors are typically paid in advance unlike contractors who are paid upon completion, this agreement for the sale of goods (not services) is governed by the project jurisdiction according to the Uniform Commercial Code as adopted. In A151, the vendor not only sells and delivers FF&E, it also is responsible for incidental onsite work such as placing, assembling, and installing the FF&E. It includes vendor insurance requirements and requires the vendor to coordinate its work with the work of others on the project. The owner is required to provide the vendor with access to the project, storage space, and areas to perform the work. In situations where the vendor will not install and only delivers FF&E, the parties should consider using A152-2019, Purchase Order.

What construction material does this hatch represent? A. Steel B. Plywood C. Concrete D. Concrete block

A. Steel This is steel, steel is represented by a series of 2 diagonal lines Concrete is incorrect, concrete is represented with a stipple pattern Plywood is incorrect, plywood is represented by a series of diagonal lines crossing over horizontal lines Concrete block is incorrect, concrete block is represented by a crosshatch pattern

After the designer has confirmed the correct sink specifications in the millwork detail shown below, who should the interior designer consult with to ensure the feasibility of construction before issuance of contract documents? A. Structural engineer B. Mechanical engineer C. Solid surface representative D. Plumbing subcontractor

A. Structural engineer Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Coordination with the Consultant's Drawings, Structural Drawings. Based on information from the structural engineer, the interior designer incorporates the exact sizes of structural members in the interior design details to coordinate construction details and make sure that sufficient space is provided for construction, clearances, tolerances, and finishes. Because this detail requires steel tubes for the support of the counter, the designer should consult with a structural engineer to be sure that this detail is feasible from a constructability standpoint, which is what the question is asking. The solid surface representative would be able to advise on the countertop material alone, not the full feasibility of the construction of this detail. The interior designer shouldn't be in communication with the subcontractor since they have the contract with the general contractor. The mechanical engineer would be able to advise on the plumbing requirements and pipe width, but not constructability.

Which of the following items would NOT typically be the responsibility of an Interior Designer to show on a Reflected Ceiling Plan? A. Switching and circuiting for lighting fixtures B. Exit signs and sprinkler locations C. Full height wall partitions extending through plenum to the concrete slab above D. Height of dados and ceiling finishes

A. Switching and circuiting for lighting fixtures Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings, Reflected Ceiling Plans Reflected Ceiling Plans show partitions that extend to the ceiling, and those that extend through the ceiling to the slab. They also show ceiling materials, building grid lines, notes calling out ceiling heights, changed in vents, access panels, location of all lights (including exiting), sprinklers, and anything that touches the ceiling. Although some items like air diffusers and sprinklers would be shown in the engineers drawings, they should also be shown on the interior designer's drawings so the consultants have a full understanding of what a ceiling will look like. Switching may or may not be on interior designer's Reflected Ceiling Plan, but is always shown on the electrical engineer's plans.

Which of the following symbols depicts a supply air diffuser? A. Symbols (a), (b) and (d) B. Symbols (a) and (b) C. Symbols (a) and (d) D. Symbols (a), (b) and (c)

A. Symbols (a), (b) and (d) Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting Symbols (a), (b) and (d) all depict a supply air diffuser. (a) is the most commonly used symbol for a square supply air diffuser. (b) is a square supply air diffuser that indicates the direction the air is blowing (shaded portion). (d) is a linear slot air diffuser. The only symbol that does not depict a supply air diffuser is (c) which depicts a return air diffuser.

If a material supplier says that adding his product to a wall assembly in a critical acoustic situation would increase the noise reduction (STC rating) between two rooms by slightly more than 3 dB, what should the designer's reaction be? A. Thank them for stopping by, but explain that the amount of noise reduction is nominal B. Determine what the additional cost would be and then decide whether or not to use the product C. Ask if some modification can be made to the product to increase its rating to 6 dB D. Specify it as long as it does not affect the construction cost by more than 5%

A. Thank them for stopping by, but explain that the amount of noise reduction is nominal Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 7th Edition, Acoustics, Subjective Change in Loudness Based on Decibel Level Change Because a change in the intensity level of 3 dB is considered just perceptible, it would probably be better not to use the material, regardless of how low the added cost is. Trying to modify the material to 6 dB would also probably not be worth the trouble. If an STC rating of 6 dB or higher is needed, it would be better to look at another construction assembly instead of trying to make do with a modified material.

Which of the following would be the best wall treatment to use in a hospital corridor? A. Type III vinyl wallcovering B. acoustic fabric panels C. Type I vinyl wallcovering D. non VOC high gloss paint

A. Type III vinyl wallcovering Source: Piotrowski, Christine M. Designing Commercial Interiors., Healthcare Facilities, Planning and Interior Design Elements, Materials, Finishes, and Color Vinyl wall covering provides a durable, abrasion-resistant finish that is easy to clean and can satisfy most code requirements for flammability. It is available in a wide range of colors and patterns. There are wallcoverings that are acceptable by the majority of codes for medical interiors. A textile wallcovering will be more restricted in a hospital or nursing facility because these facilities are considered institutional occupancies. However, always remember that codes must be verified before applying any type of textiles to walls. Textured, cleanable wallcoverings are often preferred, as they not only facilitate acoustical control but also diminish glare. In areas where wheelchairs and gurneys are used, a more textured, woven wallcovering may be specified below the handrail to help protect the wall. There are three grades of vinyl wall covering. Type III is used where extra heavy duty use is expected such as public corridors, food service areas and hospitals.

What is the best way to show finish placement for a project with spaces that have 2 finishes, such as paint and wallcovering? A. Use a combination of lines, symbols, and elevations on a finish plan B. Attach small finish samples to the plan C. Schedule a meeting to walk through the finishes with the general contractor D. Use a finish schedule and label the finishes N, S, E, W on the plan

A. Use a combination of lines, symbols, and elevations on a finish plan The best way to designate the finishes is to use a finish plan with lines/symbols designating the finish for each wall along with dimensioned elevations for all wall areas receiving more than one finish clearly showing the starting and ending point for each finish.

After construction is completed, the research team is preparing to collect the post-occupancy data. What should the team do PRIOR to collecting the data? A. Validate the research tools B. Define the performance metrics C. Create the research hypothesis D. Review the business case

A. Validate the research tools Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Programming, Owner-Designer Agreements Prior to collecting data, the research team should validate which research tools or methods would be most effective in collecting data that can be measured against some type of benchmark. This can be done by finding out what type of data may have been collected prior to or during the construction process in relation to the research area that is being focused on i.e. programming reports, interviews, questionnaires, field surveys or observation.

Which of these carpet fibers would be the BEST option for a specification on a project seeking LEED Certification and specifically concerned with Life-Cycle Cost (LCC)? A. Wool B. Polypropylene C. Recycled Polyester D. Silk

A. Wool Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Sustainable Design, Criteria for Evaluating Building Materials The key to this question is to look at both life cycle cost and life cycle assessment. Life Cycle Cost looks at the direct monetary costs involved with a product or service and not environmental impact. Life Cycle Assessment is a multi-step procedure for calculating the lifetime environmental impact of a product or service. Because the project is seeking LEED Certification, both LCC and LCA are a consideration. Silk would not be appropriate for commercial carpet. Green Label Plus is a volunteer program for certification of low-emitting carpet, but is not concerned with lifecycle cost. Cotton is not a good choice for carpet fiber for most uses. Depending upon the usage requirements, wool costs more upfront, but is a renewable resource and may have a lower cost over the entire lifetime of the product as compared to other products or synthetic fibers that need frequent replacement. Nylon has a low life cycle cost, but is not a renewable resource.

What performance tests should be specified for a custom-blended fabric to be used in a recreation center reception area? A. Wyzenbeek and fading B. flammability and fadeometer C. Taber and Wyzenbeek D. indentation load deflection test

A. Wyzenbeek and fading Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Selection of Materials, Finishes, and Furnishings; Selection of Furniture Fabrics One of the most important tests for this application would be for the fabric durability or wearability. The Wyzenbeek abrasion resistance test for wearability measures the number of double rubs applied to a test sample before failure. Light-duty upholstery fabrics are a minimum of 3000 double rubs. Medium-duty fabrics should withstand at least 9000 double rubs, and fabrics for contract use should exceed 15,000 rubs. Typically a minimum of 30,000 is required for commercial use. The taber abraser test is most often used for testing carpet not fabric. A fadeometer exposes a portion of a fabric to a light source for a specific number of hours. The exposed section is compared to the unexposed section and then rated on a scale of 1 to 5 (no change) for fading. Typical for upholstery or wallcovering is a minimum standard of 40 hours with little or no change. Flammability is rarely an issue because most contract or institutional fabrics are Class A, the most stringent code classification. However designers must always check this specification. The flammability and smoke generation characteristics of fabrics, as well as the composition of the filling in upholstered furniture, and the burn characteristics of the complete furniture assembly should be considered, especially for hospitality, healthcare, or institutional use. California Technical Bulletin 117-2013 Section 1 is a test method that uses small cushions, which are miniatures of the seat and back, to measure the smolder resistance of the materials used in upholstered furniture. Cushioning also affects the comfort and wearability of furniture. An indentation load deflection test is for cushioning, but the question asks about fabric only. Malkin, J. Medical and Dental Space Planning: A Comprehensive Guide to Design, Equipment, and Clinical Procedures. Binggeli, C. Interior Graphic Standards: Student Edition.

What testing method and standard is used for interior wall and ceiling textile finishes? A. NFPA 265 (Room Corner Test) B. NFPA 701 (Vertical Ignition Test) C. ASTM E-84 (Steiner Tunnel Test) D. ASTM D2859 (Methanamine Pill Test)

C. ASTM E-84 (Steiner Tunnel Test) NFPA 701 is for window coverings ASTM 2859 is for floor coverings NFPA 265 is for textile wall finishes, not including ceilings

What is NOT considered part of a Code of Ethics? A. a code of ethics is considered standards of law B. a code of ethics are accepted rules of conduct C. ethical standards govern moral behavior D. ethical standards is a consensus of right and wrong

A. a code of ethics is considered standards of law Source: Piotrowski, C. M. (2013-08-19). Professional Practice for Interior Designers., Ethics and Professional Conduct, Ethics in the Business Environment, Ethics Definitions "Ethical standards are not the standards of the law. In fact, they are a higher standard. Sometimes referred to as normative standards in philosophy, ethical standards are the generally accepted rules of conduct that govern society" "Ethics consists of those unwritten rules we have developed for our interactions with each other." "Ethics in a business context; a consensus of what constitutes right or wrong behavior in the world of business and the application of moral principles to situations that arise in a business setting."

Which of the following is NOT an effective tool for controlling moisture when detailing the area around a spa pool? A. adhesives B. sealants C. drainage D. flashing

A. adhesives Although the correct selection of adhesive is important, the other three elements must be used correctly to prevent penetration of water to the substrates.

In which order would you create the following process drawing? A. adjacency matrices, bubble diagram, bloc diagram B. bubble diaram, block diagram, prototype sketches C. block plan, parti diagrams, test fit diagram D. adjacency matrices, bloc diagram, prototype sketches E. adjacency matrices

A. adjacency matrices, bubble diagram, bloc diagram Adjacency matrices for functional data analysis would be completed before conceptual bubble diagram. after adjacencies have been analyzed and bubble diagrams have been produced, design drawings my progress from rough block digrams to design development drawings to final construction drawings. Parti diagrams, prototype sketches and test fit diagrams may also be used but would come before block diagrams. The key to differentiating these is to clarify the diagram's purpose in the question scenario given, it is for planning an organization of information collected during research.

While on a site visit during construction, the designer notices unsecured objects that are likely to fall and injure a worker or visitor. What should the designer do? A. alert the contractor to the situation and write a letter to the owner stating what was observed B. nothing, this is the contractor's responsibility C. have the contractor stop work until the problem has been corrected D. tell the construction crew to stop working and add the necessary barricades

A. alert the contractor to the situation and write a letter to the owner stating what was observed Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration The contractor is solely responsible for job site safety, and if the interior designer told the contractor to correct an unsafe condition, the designer could be opening himself or herself to liability. The designer's duty would be to advise the owner in writing of what was observed. In addition, it would be appropriate and prudent to call the situation to the contractor's attention.

In addition to evaluating the project itself, what else should be evaluated by the design team during the POE, post occupancy evaluation? A. all of these should be evaluated during a POE B. fee allotment C. specifications and detailing methods D. construction documentation procedures

A. all of these should be evaluated during a POE Source: Piotrowski, C. M. Professional Practice for Interior Designers., Contract Administration: Delivery and Project Closeout In addition to evaluating the project itself, the design firm should review how the project delivery process worked or did not work so improvements can be made for future jobs. An in-house evaluation of the project, called by many a post-project evaluation, should be done soon after the project is completed. This evaluation should cover such things as a time analysis, to see if the project was completed within the time estimate; identification of any problems; and an analysis of performance by suppliers during the delivery process. It could even include a discussion of any issues with the client. The design director may also do a profitability analysis to evaluate whether the project itself was profitable, and whether the firm should seek similar projects in the future. The design office should review design processes, programming information, project management techniques and scheduling, fee allotment, specification and detailing methods, and construction documentation procedures.

What type of system would be best for an open office plan so the heating and cooling for each workstation could be individually controlled? A. all-air B. air-water C. all-water D. radiant panel

A. all-air An all-air system can be subdivided into as many individually controlled areas as needed. Radiant panels could be used, but it would be awkward to locate them in the ceiling and the cost would be much higher than that of an all-air system.

The occupant load of any portion of a building is: A. allowed to be increased as long as all other requirements are met and it does not exceed 7 square feet (0.65 m2) of occupiable floor space. B. allowed only when the increased occupant load is approved by a building official and is supported by a posted exit egress diagram. C. not allowed to be increased unless it has an automatic sprinkler system and the occupant load is less than 7 square feet (0.65 m2) of total floor space. D. not allowed unless it has an approved fully automatic sprinkler system and all other requirements of the codes are met based on the increased number.

A. allowed to be increased as long as all other requirements are met and it does not exceed 7 square feet (0.65 m2) of occupiable floor space. Source: 2018 International Building Code, 1004.5.1 Increase occupant load The correct answer is "allowed to be increased as long as all other requirements are met and it does not exceed 7 square feet (0.65 m2) of occupiable floor space." "The occupant load permitted in any building, or portion thereof, is permitted to be increased from that number established for the occupancies in Table 1004.5, provided that all other requirements of the code are met based on such modified number and the occupant load does not exceed one occupant per 7 square feet (0.65 m2) of occupiable floor space. Where required by the building official, an approved aisle, seating or fixed equipment diagram substantiating any increase in occupant load shall be submitted. Where required by the building official, such a diagram shall be posted."

The interior designer's best source concerning the limitations on the use of a product can be obtained from the A. specialty contractor who installs the product B. trade association representing the product type C. building code official who inspects the product D. manufacturer who makes the product

All manufacturers know the limitations of their products and should be consulted when one of their products is going to be used in a specific special situation that the interior designer knows about. Although the other sources may be consulted for additional information, only the manufacturer knows the limitations of a product.

What mark is placed on a floor plan to indicate that an elevation of a wall or walls is drawn somewhere in the drawing set? A. an elevation reference B. a section reference C. a detail reference D. reference bubble

A. an elevation reference Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Reference Systems An elevation reference mark, often called an elevation bubble, is placed on a floor plan to indicate that an elevation of the wall or walls is drawn somewhere in the set. The number on top of the line indicates the unique sequential number of the elevation drawing, and the number below the line indicates the sheet on which the drawing is placed.

Which of the following is NOT true about architectural woodwork? A. architectural woodwork can be finished on the job site B. is sometimes referred to as millwork C. makes it possible to produce superior wood items D. allows for the incorporation of materials other than wood such as ornamental metal, glass, leather, stone, etc...

A. architectural woodwork can be finished on the job site Architectural woodwork makes it possible to produce superior wood items because most of the work is done under carefully controlled factory conditions with machinery and finishing techniques that cannot be duplicated on a job site. In contrast to architectural woodwork, finish carpentry is woodwork completed on the job site.

Which of the following plan arrangements would be most appropriate for the entry, nave, altar, and choir of a church moving into an existing rectangular space? A. axial B. linear C. open D. clustered

A. axial Source: Ching, F.D. K. (09/2014). Architecture: Form, Space, and Order, 4th Edition., Form For a formal, ceremonial space, the axial organization would focus attention on the altar in relationship to the nave, or seating area. Aligning the entry would also emphasize entry and procession, two elements that are important to most religions. Think of the axes in this example like the shape of the cross. The axis is perhaps the most elementary means of organizing forms and spaces in architecture. It is a line established by two points in space, about which forms and spaces can be arranged in a regular or irregular manner. An axis can be a powerful, dominating, regulating device. Although it implies symmetry, it demands balance.

Which diagram is part of the schematic design phase and used to move from verbal and simplified graphic notation toward true scale and the eventual realization of architectural form? A. block plan B. prototype sketches C. floor plan D. bubble diagram

A. block plan Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, INFORMATION ANALYSIS AND SYNTHESIS, FORMAT OF PRELIMINARY DESIGN DRAWINGS Block diagrams represent the progression of the schematic design phase from simple graphics towards architectural form. During the schematic design and design development process, drawings can take many forms, depending on the amount of design thinking that has been done and the client's specific requirements. After adjacencies and bubble diagrams have been produced during programming, design drawings may progress from rough block diagrams to design development drawings to final construction drawings.

What combination of combustible and non-combustible trim and decoration is permissible in occupancies A, E, I, R-1, and R-2? A. combustible 10%, noncombustible unlimited B. noncombustible 10% combustible 5% C. combustible 20% and noncombustible 20% D. noncombustible 30%, and combustible 30%

A. combustible 10%, noncombustible unlimited Source: International Building Code, 2018, Section 806 Decorative Materials and Trim From [F] 806.7. Interior Trim:Combustible trim shall not exceed 10% of the wall or ceiling area to which applied.

To avoid conflicting requirements, duplication, omissions and errors what must the specifications be checked against? A. construction documents B. purchase orders C. contract D. bid requirements

A. construction documents Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, Construction Specifications, Coordination with the construction drawings The technical specifications and the drawings are complementary. They must be written and checked to avoid conflicting requirements, duplication, omissions and errors. Although the specifications and drawings are complementary, the specifier must give careful attention to the written word. When there is a conflict between the drawings and specifications, the courts have held that the specifications are more binding and take precedence.

Midway into a project, the interior designer realizes they have forgotten to order the fabric needed for the guest room draperies. Since time is critical what is the best way to expedite the order? A. contact the vendor to let them know of your challenges and immediately issue a purchase order B. contact the vendor and place the order via the phone C. contact the vendor, place the order via the phone and ask for an acknowledgment D. change the draperies to a pre-fabricated product that can be delivered in time to complete the project

A. contact the vendor to let them know of your challenges and immediately issue a purchase order Source: Piotrowski, Christine M. Professional Practice for Interior Designers., Contract Administration: Construction and Order Processing; Purchase Orders; Expediting The best solution would be to contact the vendor to check stock, make them aware of the situation, and immediately issue a Purchase Order. In no case should telephone orders be made because of the potential for mistakes, misunderstandings, and misinterpretations. Most vendors do not even accept telephone orders unless followed by written purchase orders.

Who would be responsible for scheduling the asbestos field test for the renovation of a building built in 1972? A. contractor B. building inspector C. building appraiser D. owner

A. contractor Whenever tests and inspections are required by the contract documents or bylaws, regulations, or building departments, the General Contractor is responsible for making the arrangements with testing agencies acceptable to the owner or with the appropriate public authorities.

If all of the following are present, what must be modified to achieve acoustic separation in a perimeter office? A. convector B. gypsum wallboard C. batt insulation D. acoustical tiles

A. convector Although all of the listed options could be modified to improve acoustic separation, a convector is the most troublesome and must be modified or it will allow sound to travel through the vents in one office, through the opening around the convector pipe, and out the vents in the adjacent office.

The determination of exact requirements for grab bars in toilet rooms is most appropriately made during A. design development B. programming C. construction drawings D. schematic design

A. design development Only broad planning issues related to barrier-free design need to be made during the early design phases of programming and schematic design. While decisions about more detailed items, like the exact locations of grab bars, can be made during the construction documents phase, it is better if accessibility research has been completed prior to beginning the construction drawings.

Conducting a site analysis is? A. due diligence B. the architect's responsibility C. not necessary for smaller projects D. done during the design development phase

A. due diligence Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Site Analysis, Due Diligence Site Investigation One of the most basic tasks the interior designer must perform as part of due diligence is acquiring a thorough understanding and documentation of the space in which the project will be located. If the building being designed is not yet under construction, the interior designer must obtain a copy of the architect's drawings and review them, if the building already exists, whether it is newly constructed or an older building, the designer must review any available drawings and visit the site to completely understand the site context.

A designer uses the principle of harmony in order to A. establish an agreement of individual elements to each other and to the entire composition B. provide interest by developing one or two elements as more important than the other parts of a composition C. develop a visual consistency and equilibrium to the individual elements D. achieve a variation of the component parts without causing an imbalance in the entire design

A. establish an agreement of individual elements to each other and to the entire composition Source: Jones, Lynn M. Beginnings of Interior Environments, 11/e., Design Fundamentals, Harmony Harmony is the unique blend of unity and variety. A unifying theme or common denominator should run through all component parts and blend them together. Harmony in an arrangement is the agreement of each part to each other and as a whole.

What is the difference between first-party and third-party claims of sustainability? A. first-party claims use the manufacturer's own research for certification, while third-party uses independent testing organizations to substantiate that materials or products meet defined national or international standards. B. first-party claims use an industry-based standard to which the product strives and allow manufacturers to supply their research to testing organizations to verify that products meet defined standards. C. first-party claims use independent testing organizations to verify sustainability claims, while third-party uses the manufacturer's own research to confirm that materials or products meet defined national or international standards. D. first-party claims allow the manufacturer to supply the information to an independent testing organization that verifies that the material or product meets or exceeds the defined national or international standard.

A. first-party claims use the manufacturer's own research for certification, while third-party uses independent testing organizations to substantiate that materials or products meet defined national or international standards. Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 3rd Edition ePDF for QPractice., Green Materials, Product Certification The correct answer is that first-party claims use the manufacturer's research for certification. In contrast, third-party claims use independent testing organizations to substantiate that materials or products meet defined national or international standards. First-party material eco-friendly labels are "self-declared" labels. A company establishes its standards and states the product's environmental performance. The manufacturer supplies information for certification. First-party material eco-friendly labels require no external testing or verification. The designer must carefully evaluate these labels for veracity. Often they are corporate marketing strategies. Third-party certification is considered the leadership standard for product certification. Independent third-party certification substantiates that materials or products meet defined national or international (ISO, ANSI, ASTM) standard criteria or other manufacturers' claims such as energy consumption, air and water emissions, content, processing, and other attributes that impact the environment. The specifics of the standards vary by the certification program, and not all certifications are equal. It is vital to look for established, well-respected and recognized third-party certifications. Third-party certification can be specific to a product or industry relative to a particular concern, a single attribute certification, or based on life-cycle factors for multi-attribute certification. Understanding the standards and claims the certification supports and how it applies to the specific application is necessary.

Which type of drawing is a horizontal cross section that shows everything approximately 4′ -5′ (1200 mm-1500 mm) AFF? A. floor plan B. electrical plan C. reflected ceiling plan D. none of these

A. floor plan Construction plans, also called floor plans or partition plans, are the most common type of floor plan and are required for every project regardless of size or complexity. Construction plans are views seen as though a building was cut horizontally above the floor with the top section removed. The floor plan is the most common type of plan. It is as if a horizontal cut were made through a building or a portion of a build about 4 or 5ft (1500 mm) above the floor, and the top portion were removed.

When assigning responsibility to a design team member, the most important thing a project manager or designer needs to do is? A. give the team member the authority to make decisions and carry out actions B. acknowledge the team member for a job well done C. be sensitive to the manager-subordinate relationship D. provide the appropriate support staff for the team member to carry out assigned tasks

A. give the team member the authority to make decisions and carry out actions Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, Project Management, Design Office Staff Coordination Never give responsibility without the appropriate amount of authority to make decisions and carry out actions.

Many different tools can be used to document and explain programming information in a visual format. The following is an example of what type of illustrative tool? A. graph B. chart C. table D. matrix

A. graph Source: Hershberger, R. (2015). Architectural Programming and Predesign Manager., Information Gathering, Systemic Observation Systematic observation should be organized to allow for easy analysis when information gathering is complete. If the expected cost of error is not great, this may involve the simple counting of events and other descriptive statistics to show the frequency, magnitude, and distribution of various events. The results of such counting and averaging can be shown in histograms, pie charts, graphs, and tables. The development of such statistics is discussed in detail in a number of books written by social and behavioral scientists.

"Precept" drawings are what type of design document? A. ideas sketches developed during programming about how the final design solution might respond to the identified design problems B. Diagrams developed to make programming issues more undqerstable to the designer than if they were expressed only in words C. Traditional relationship diagrams generated for the entire project, based o certain organizational programming assumptions D. sketch emamples of similar previous design solutions collected during programming that characterize the type of program

A. ideas sketches developed during programming about how the final design solution might respond to the identified design problems

What are the four basic causes of poor IAQ? A. improper ventilation, interior chemical contaminants, exterior chemical contaminants and biological contaminants. B. improper ventilation, indoor chemical contaminants, exterior moisture and biological contaminants. C. exterior moisture, interior humidity, indoor chemical contaminants and biological contaminants. D. interior humidity, biological contaminants, outdoor chemical contaminants and moisture.

A. improper ventilation, interior chemical contaminants, exterior chemical contaminants and biological contaminants. Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Sustainable Design, Indoor Air Quality, Causes of Poor Indoor Air Quality There are four basic causes of poor IAQ. These include: - chemical contaminants from indoor sources - chemical contaminants from outdoor sources - biological contaminants - poor ventilation These factors may be present alone or combined with one or more of the others to produce the various symptoms of poor IAQ.

What two aspects of sustainable interior design have a direct affect on human health? A. indoor air quality and sustainable materials. B. energy conservation and building re-use. C. sustainable materials and energy conservation. D. indoor air quality and energy conservation.

A. indoor air quality and sustainable materials. Source: Kennon, K. E. (2018). Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Designing for Human Health and Safety, Introduction The work of interior designers is directly concerned with the health, safety, and welfare of building occupants. Aspects of sustainable design such as indoor air quality and sustainable materials have direct impacts on human health.

What would be the easiest way to increase the IIC value of a conference room floor? A. installing carpeting on the floor B. installing a resiliently suspended ceiling below C. providing a thick flooring at least 1/8" thick D. providing sound-batting in the air space between the floor and the finished ceiling below

A. installing carpeting on the floor Source: Qpractice Answer Vault, Acoustic Ratings: IIC, NRC, STC The IIC (impact insulation class) value of a floor can most easily be increased by adding carpet. Although providing a resiliently suspended ceiling below, floating a finished floor on resilient pads over the structural floor, or providing sound-absorbing material (insulation) in the air space between the floor and the finished ceiling below can also improve the IIC, installing carpeting is the easiest and most often used.

Per the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, who is responsible for documentation? A. interior designer B. contractor C. owner D. all of the above

A. interior designer Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration During the entire construction administration phase (as well as all phases of the interior designer's service), the interior designer should keep complete documentation of the progress of the job. This includes not only the standard forms used, such as: -change orders -certificates of payment -all correspondence -meeting notes -emails -telephone logs similar written material that records the who, what, why, when, and how of the project This kind of documentation is critical if disputes arise or the client objects to fee payments for extra services of the interior designer.

Which of the following would be the least useful to a designer in procuring furniture and furnishing BUT are typically excellent sources of information? A. internet retailer B. specialty shops C. manufacturer's website D. factory or manufacturer's reps

A. internet retailer Internet retailers may provide useful information, but are not typically used as professional procurement sources. The designer can go directly to the manufacturer, manufacturer's showroom, or manufacturer's representative — whichever distribution channel that particular manufacturer has set up for working with the trade.

Acoustic glass is also known as: A. laminated glass B. tempered glass C. wired glass D. plate glass

A. laminated glass Laminated glass should be used in areas where acoustic properties are desired. Laminated glass is actually 2 layers of glass with an inner layer of PVB, and provides superior acoustic privacy.

What is meant by a methodology that provides a way to evaluate the environmental impact of a material used in a project? A. life-cycle assessment B. cradle to cradle review C. green label-plus assessment D. life cycle cost analysis

A. life-cycle assessment Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Sustainable Design, Materials, Life-Cycle Assessment A life-cycle assessment (LCA) provides the methodology to evaluate the environmental impact of using a particular material or product in a building. (Note that this is not the same as a life-cycle cost analysis)

What legality must an independent interior designer who plans to sell merchandise from their home office be most concerned with? A. make sure that local zoning laws permit retail sales to be made from the home location B. should not conduct retail sales from their home as it does not project a professional appearance C. ensure that the rate of sales tax is charged based on the sales tax in the location where the merchandise will be installed D. ensure that the local zoning office permits tractor trailer trucks to deliver merchandise to the home office

A. make sure that local zoning laws permit retail sales to be made from the home location Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Business Legal Filings and Licenses The first consideration for a designer who plans on selling merchandise from their home office is to make sure the local zoning ordinances allows for retail sales.

Which scenario is best suited to hand measuring? A. measuring spaces of moderate size and complexity B. measuring large, but simple spaces C. measuring small, complex spaces D. measuring residential design projects

A. measuring spaces of moderate size and complexity Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting Traditionally, collecting information on the size and configuration of existing buildings and spaces has required the interior designer to visit the site and make sketches and measurements using tape measure or traditional surveying equipment. This method is labor intensive and prone to human errors as well as errors generated by the measurements. However it can still be a useful, low-cost method to use when measuring spaces of moderate size and complexity, and does not require access to special tools or software.

Which is true about permanent tactile signage? A. must be mounted on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, so that there is a minimum clear floor space of 18" x 18" (455 mm x 455 mm) centered on the tactile characters beyond the arc of the door swing B. there must be a minimum clear floor space of 24" x 18" (605 mm x 455 mm) centered on the tactile characters and beyond the arc of the door swing C. when there is no wall space to the latch side of the door, including double-leaf doors, the sign must be placed to the left of the right hand door D. the mounting height of the base-line of the lowest tactile character must be 48" (810mm) maximum and 60" minimum to the baseline of the highest tactile character

A. must be mounted on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, so that there is a minimum clear floor space of 18" x 18" (455 mm x 455 mm) centered on the tactile characters beyond the arc of the door swing Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 703 Signs Refer to A117.1 703.3.11 Location, and 2009 ICC A117.1 - FIG. 703.3.11 LOCATION OF SIGNS AT DOORS similar to: ADA 703.4.2 Location. Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with one active leaf, the sign shall be located on the inactive leaf. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door. Where there is no wall space at the latch side of a single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the nearest adjacent wall. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a clear floor space of 18 inches (455 mm) minimum by 18 inches (455 mm) minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. EXCEPTION: Signs with tactile characters shall be permitted on the push side of doors with closers and without hold-open devices.

Which is true about permanent tactile signage? A. must be mounted on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, so that there is a minimum clear floor space of 18" x 18" (455 mm x 455 mm) centered on the tactile characters beyond the arc of the door swing B. when there is no wall space to the latch side of the door, including double-leaf doors, the sign must be placed to the left of the right hand door C. there must be a minimum clear floor space of 24" x 18" (605 mm x 455 mm) centered on the tactile characters and beyond the arc of the door swing D. the mounting height of the base-line of the lowest tactile character must be 48" (810mm) maximum and 60" minimum to the baseline of the highest tactile character Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 703 Signs Refer to A117.1 703.3.11 Location, and 2009 ICC A117.1 - FIG. 703.3.11 LOCATION OF SIGNS AT DOORS similar to: ADA 703.4.2 Location. Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with one active leaf, the sign shall be located on the inactive leaf. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door. Where there is no wall space at the latch side of a single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the nearest adjacent wall. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a clear floor space of 18 inches (455 mm) minimum by 18 inches (455 mm) minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. EXCEPTION: Signs with tactile characters shall be permitted on the push side of doors with closers and without hold-open devices.

A. must be mounted on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, so that there is a minimum clear floor space of 18" x 18" (455 mm x 455 mm) centered on the tactile characters beyond the arc of the door swing Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 703 Signs Refer to A117.1 703.3.11 Location, and 2009 ICC A117.1 - FIG. 703.3.11 LOCATION OF SIGNS AT DOORS similar to: ADA 703.4.2 Location. Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with one active leaf, the sign shall be located on the inactive leaf. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door. Where there is no wall space at the latch side of a single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the nearest adjacent wall. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a clear floor space of 18 inches (455 mm) minimum by 18 inches (455 mm) minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. EXCEPTION: Signs with tactile characters shall be permitted on the push side of doors with closers and without hold-open devices.

Which of the following is not true about an accessible doorway? A. must have a minimum clear opening width of 36 in (915 mm) when opened at 90 degrees B. depth of a doorway 32 in (815 mm) is 24 in (610 mm) C. must have a minimum of 18 in (457.5 mm) clear space on the pull side of door D. the opening force required to push or pull open an interior hinged door cannot be more than 5 pounds (22.2 N)

A. must have a minimum clear opening width of 36 in (915 mm) when opened at 90 degrees Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 404.2 Manual Doors A door must have a minimum clear opening width of 32 in (815 mm) when opened at 90 degrees. Note that the clear opening is not the same as the width of the door. Door thickness, door stop, and also hardware project into the clear opening width, reducing a 36″ door to a 32″ clear width at the opening. Refer to 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, Section 404.2.2 Clear Width

The minimum number of toilet fixtures required for an interior design remodeling is determined by occupant load and: A. occupancy group B. accessibility requirements C. building type D. square footage

A. occupancy group Source: 2018 International Plumbing Code, SECTION 403 MINIMUM PLUMBING FACILITIES The International Plumbing Code and similar model codes base toilet fixture requirements on the basic use or occupancy of the building. 403.1 Minimum number of fixturesPlumbing fixtures shall be provided in the minimum number as shown in Table 403.1, based upon the actual use of the building or space...

Bid openings are typically attended by the contractors and the A. owner and interior designer B. owner C. interior designer D. subcontractors, owner, and interior designer

A. owner and interior designer Although most bid openings are open to anyone who wants to attend, the generalcontractors, owner, and interior designer are the parties commonly in attendance. On particularly large projects, the major subcontractors, such as mechanical and electrical, may also attend.

What type of plan would an interior designer show power on? A. power and communications plan B. floor plan C. elevation D. All of the above

A. power and communications plan Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings For large or complex projects, the interior designer sometimes draws a separate interior design power, data, and communications plan. This shows the locations of electrical outlets, telephone outlets, other data systems, such the locations of computers and intercom systems. These items are typically located in coordination with furniture. A separate plan is usually required for large projects because there is not enough room on the construction plan to show the outlets and include dimension lines to precisely locate each one. The interior designer's plan only shows the outlet locations. The electrical circuiting, conduit size, and other technical information are included on the plans prepared by the electrical engineer. If the interior designer does not produce a power plan, then the power plan drawn by the electrical engineer shows electrical outlets, telephone outlets, security systems, and fire alarm devices.

What interior design service is normally performed during the contract document phase of a project? A. prepare furniture drawings B. review shop drawings C. coordinate the consultant contracts D. perform code review

A. prepare furniture drawings Consultant contract coordination should be start early in the project, prior to beginning the project or during schematic design. Code review should be performed during schematic design and design development. Furniture drawings are produced during the contract documents phase. Shop drawing review is done during the contract administration phase.

Which is NOT one of the purposes for a plumbing vent? A. prevent backflow B. equalize pressure C. eliminate toxic gases D. prevent siphoning

A. prevent backflow Vents are pipes connected to the drainage system at various locations, open to outside air, and designed to serve 2 purposes: allow built-up sewage gases to escape instead of bubble through the water in the traps. allow pressure in the system to equalize so discharging waste does not create a siphon that would drain the water out of the traps.

The first and most preliminary budgets are typically estimated based on? A. project size B. scope of work C. available resources D. history - cost of similar type projects

A. project size Budgets based on size are usually the first and most preliminary type of estimate done before much design work has started.

What is an expressed warranty? A. promises, claims, descriptions, or affirmations made about a product's performance, quality or condition that form the "basis of the bargain" B. protects the buyer from loss if he or she unknowingly buys goods with a lien attached C. holds the seller liable for any and all defective or hazardous products which unduly threaten a consumer's personal safety D. implies that when a merchant sells goods, the seller understands the characteristics of the goods he or she is selling and can thus specify them for proper use

A. promises, claims, descriptions, or affirmations made about a product's performance, quality or condition that form the "basis of the bargain" Promises, claims, descriptions, or affirmations made about a product's performance, quality or condition that form the "basis of the bargain". In effect, the basis of the bargain means that the information provided is what primarily influences the decision of the buyer.

Which of the following would be a programmatic concept? A. provide a level of safety and security to prevent children from entering the pool area without proper supervision B. all of these are programmatic concepts C. enclose the outdoor pool with a gate that is lockable from the inside D. install an alarm on the door leading out to the pool to alert parents when the door has been opened

A. provide a level of safety and security to prevent children from entering the pool area without proper supervision Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, The Programming Process A programmatic concept is a performance requirement related to methods of solving a problem or satisfying a functional need. It does not specify the physical or design solution to the problem.

A budget is always based and influenced by what three items? A. quantity, quality, money B. time, quantity, money C. time, fee, quality D. progress, quality, money

A. quantity, quality, money There is always a relationship among quantity, quality and money. Changing one affects the others. For example, if the client has a fixed budget and must build and furnish a specific amount of space, then the quality of materials or extend of work must reflect the budget and the space. If the client wants a particular level of quality and a given amount of space, then the budget should reflect these two requirements.

What type of flooring would be the best choice for a commercial kitchen? A. quarry tile B. heavy-duty cork flooring C. poured urethane D. sheet rubber

A. quarry tile Source: McGowan, M., Kruse, K. Specifying Interiors: A Guide to Construction and FF&E for Residential and Commercial Interiors Projects., Construction Materials, Floor Finishes, Tile Types Quarry tiles are extruded and made from either natural clay or shale. They are similar to bricks in material, performance, range of colors, and methods of installation. They are not typically affected by moisture, oil, acids, or other chemicals. Quarry tiles are appropriate for use in interior and exterior applications where highly durable flooring is required. While commercial quality sheet vinyl, or poured urethane minimizes the number of joints and is resistant to grease, oils, and water, only quarry tile is also resistant to heat, a particular issue in commercial kitchens, where hot items may melt the floor surface.

One of the environmental and ecological influences affecting interior design is: A. regionalism B. territoriality C. symbolism D. personalization

A. regionalism Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Developing Design Concepts, Social and Cultural Influences The correct answer is "regionalism." Regionalism is a design that reflects the local geographic area. Most designers, architects, and interior designers believe that each geographic area is unique, and design should reflect that fact. A common belief might be that Florida's buildings and interior design should be different from those in the Pacific Northwest.

When an office lease space only occupies a portion of the floor, which area measurement includes a proportionate share of the elevator lobby, public corridor, rest rooms, and mechanical rooms? A. rentable area B. gross area C. tenant area D. useable area

A. rentable area Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, DETERMINING TOTAL REQUIRED AREA, Determining the Rentable Area Once the client's required occupant area is determined (or at least carefully estimated), the required rentable area must be calculated. In a leased office, retail, residential, or industrial building, the building owner bases rent on the actual area each tenant uses (the occupant area) in addition to a prorated share of portions of the building used by all tenants. These common building areas include: shared corridors, restrooms, elevator lobbies, and mechanical rooms, as well as amenity areas such as conference rooms, food service facilities, vending areas, and day care centers. The rentable area is the product of the tenant's occupancy area and a load factor to account for the shared portions of the building.

The owner is protected from incomplete work by the contractor by the use of A. retainage B. liquidated damages C. indemnification D. standard contract forms

A. retainage Retainage is a percentage of each payment that is withheld by the owner and not paid until the contractor has completed the work.

On a Mechanical Plan, what is represented by the following symbol? A. return air grille B. AHU access panel C. supply air register D. supply air diffuser

A. return air grille Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Mechanical and Plumbing Plans The symbol represents a return air grille, and can be angled in either direction. On the NCIDQ Exam, refer to your drawing legend for all symbols.

Changing a ceiling from gypsum wallboard to acoustic tile would most affect the room's A. reverberation B. sound transmission C. decibel loss D. impact insulation class

A. reverberation Changing from wallboard to acoustic tile affects the total absorption of a room and thereby changes the reverberation time.

Which principle of design would a designer use if their goal was for the user to visually move around or through an entire space? A. rhythm B. balance C. line D. harmony

A. rhythm Source: ASID, Lynn M. J., IIDA, IDEC. Beginnings of Interior Environments, 11th Edition., Design Fundamentals, Elements and Principles of Design, Rhythm One of the most powerful design principles is rhythm, which assists the eye in moving easily about a design or room from one area to another, creating a flowing quality, continuity, and visual interest. Rhythm can be achieved through use of repetition, transition, and gradation or progression. Because rhythm sets up a sequence of multiple elements through space, it also includes a time component as the eye or body moves past the individual pieces. In most situations, elements are related either by physical connection or by an imaginary line that the eye and mind use to tie elements together.

For construction drawings, what is the most effective way to communicate large amounts of complex information in a small space? A. schedules B. project binders C. detail drawing D. key plan

A. schedules Schedules are a very efficient way to communicate a large amount of complex information in a relatively small space.

In addition to meeting the requirements of the ADA, what other accessibility requirements should the interior designer be most concerned with when doing design development for a commercial project? A. scoping provisions of the local building code B. ADAAG C. ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities D. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards

A. scoping provisions of the local building code Source: 2018 International Building Code, SECTION 1103 SCOPING REQUIREMENTS Scoping provisions tell the designer how much of something is required. Although there are scoping provisions in the ADA, local codes may be more stringent, in which case the interior designer must conform to the most restrictive requirements. ANSI A117.1 may or may not be applicable in a given jurisdiction. If it has been adopted by the local building code, it is important to review to see if the requirements are more restrictive than those of the ADA. The latest edition of A117.1 leaves scoping up to local jurisdiction. ADAAG is the ADA Accessibility Guidelines and is part of the ADA, so this option is irrelevant. The Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards are applicable to federal buildings and projects that receive federal funding and would not be used for a commercial project.

Beyond overall safety considerations, what would be important when you are designing the surface materials/finishes of a ramp in a facility for the visually impaired to help them with changes in direction? A. tactile considerations B. degree of slope C. acoustic issues D. wheelchair clearances

A. tactile considerations Source: Karlen, M., Fleming, R. Space Planning Basics., Stair Design Basics While there are a great variety of materials that are slip resistant to make a ramp safer, some materials may make travel by wheelchair difficult due to their texture. Although the primary criteria in selecting a surface material for ramps must be on human safety, the issues of sustainability and users' tactile sense should not be overlooked. Designers should consider all aspects of touch.

Which of the following is not a color scheme? A. tertiary B. triad C. analogous D. tetrad

A. tertiary Source: Understanding Color: An Introduction for Designers, 5th Edition., THE VOCABULARY OF COLOR, Tertiary Colors: Chromatic Neutrals Tertiary refers to colors made of a mixture of the three primaries; brown or chromatic neutrals. Tertiary colors are chromatic neutrals. They cannot be identified as hues, but neither are they a mix of black and white. Tertiary colors are created by mixing equal amounts of a primary and secondary color and are typically identified by hyphenated name of the colors used to create them, for example blue-green.

Which statement is most true about an acoustical ceiling system: A. the ceiling will not prevent any meaningful transmission of sound B. the ceiling will prevent sound transmission from one room to adjacent rooms C. the ceiling will reflect the sound back into the room, improving its acoustic qualities D. the ceiling will absorb sound and prevent transmission to rooms on the next floor above

A. the ceiling will not prevent any meaningful transmission of sound The acoustic tile ceiling will not prevent much sound transmission but the absorption will reduce the noise within a room, and improve speech privacy. An acoustic tile system can help with absorption of impact noise from the flooring above. Absorption of noise will improve speech privacy while reflection can create undesirable echoes. A slab to slab partition will provide the best control for sound transmission between rooms. For further reading, refer to the Qpractice lesson on Acoustical Systems

If a designer is remodeling a building classified as TYPE V construction, what is the biggest consideration? A. the final proposed square footage and height of the building B. none of these, a TYPE V building can be as high and large as needed as it is the most fire resistive C. the proposed building materials to be used for the new construction D. the final proposed square footage of the building

A. the final proposed square footage and height of the building Source: 2018 International Building Code, CHAPTER5 GENERAL BUILDING HEIGHTS AND AREAS A Type V building (combustible, such as all wood structure) is limited to only a few thousand square feet in area and one or two stories in height depending on occupancy. SECTION 504 BUILDING HEIGHT AND NUMBER OF STORIES504.1 General.The height, in feet, and the number of stories of a building shall be determined based on the type of construction, occupancy classification and whether there is an automatic sprinkler system installed throughout the building. See code for table and exceptions.a.

When coordinating with a security consultant, the interior designer's drawings should show A. the positioning of required lighting B. the wiring of the security devices C. a schedule of all security devices D. the emergency backup power supply

A. the positioning of required lighting Lighting locations are shown on the interior designer's reflected ceiling plans. All of the other options listed would be on the electrical engineer's drawings or the security consultant's drawings.

Which is a typical purpose for specifying non-load bearing concrete block partitions? A. to provide a durable, fire-resistant partition B. to provide a strong, attractive partition which can be used on any type of floor structure C. to provide a durable partition which is less costly to construct than a gypsum board wall D. to provide a light-weight, fire-resistant partition

A. to provide a durable, fire-resistant partition Source: FAIA, D.K. B. (2013). Interior Construction and Detailing for Designers and Architects, Partitions, Masonry Partitions Nonbearing concrete block can be used when a fire resistant partition is required, such as between sleeping areas, but is more expensive and heavier than gypsum board. The loadbearing capacity of existing floors for new masonry must be verified by a structural engineer, so it is not suitable for all floor structures. Also, electrical and plumbing requirements may increase the difficulty and cost of using masonry for interior partitions.

When reviewing a detail of a gypsum wallboard niche to receive a built-in millwork cabinet, the interior designer should be most concerned with: A. tolerance B. clearance C. paint finish D. blocking

A. tolerance The tolerance of the gypsum wallboard used to build the niche would be of greatest concern because the cabinet would be built to very exact dimensions while the wallboard would be built to less exact standards. For a built-in cabinet, the fit would need to be tight and the interior designer would have to know the tolerance of wallboard construction in order to dimension the opening size and develop a method of fitting the millwork.

Which programming concept is a designer addressing for the programming of a health club if they opt to provide additional room in an indoor pool area beyond the space needed for the pool and circulation? A. tolerance B. convertibility C. flexibility D. functional efficiency

A. tolerance allows for extra space for a dynamic activity (one likely to change) instead of fitting the space precisely to a static activity

The concept of "resiliency" used in design is the ability of an organization or a place to weather a catastrophic event and to come back better than it was before. What is seen as an important factor in choosing a "resilient" site for a new project? A. transportation availability for building occupants B. ample access to alternative food supply sources C. the ability to provide remote work options D. multiple sources of public energy services to the building

A. transportation availability for building occupants Source: Ching, F.D. K., Binggeli, C. Interior Design Illustrated., Interior Design, Interior Elements Resiliency is the ability of an organization, a place, or a family to weather a catastrophic event and come back better than it was before. A resilient system is one designed to evolve and adapt to changing conditions over time. The Perkins + Will report, Weathering the Storm: Mental Health and Resilient Design, identified the following design strategies to address major crisis events: Green roofs as outdoor refuge spaces and food production On-site renewable energy Building elements above a floodplain Transportation for building occupants, including public transportation, bicycles, and inflatable rafts On-site storage of emergency supplies Emergency communications Shelter in place Training for personnel Communications with occupants

Radial balance/symmetry A. uses images radiating from a center, such as wheel spokes or ripples around a pebble thrown into water. B. can be divided down its length into similar right and left halves aling only one plane C. established when both sides of the composition are exactly equal. Formal balance D. occurs when you have different visual images on either side of a design, and yet the image still seems balanced.

A. uses images radiating from a center, such as wheel spokes or ripples around a pebble thrown into water.

Which does not happen during project close-out? A. verify correction of punch list items B. verify that all operating instructions, guarantees, maintenance procedures are forwarded to client C. respond to owner's questions and problems during "shakedown" period immediately after move-in D. assist with move-in as outlined in agreement

A. verify correction of punch list items Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Appendix A-3 During the contract administration phase the interior designer is responsible for verifying the correction of punch list items. The project close out phase happens after the contract administration phase. According to the Interior Design Reference Manual, these two activities happen in contract administration: Conduct punch list with contractor and client. Verify correction of punch list items. One source of confusion is that occasionally a client will move in before all punch list items are completed, in such a circumstance, activities of contract administration are happening simultaneously with other tasks during the closeout phase.

All of the following steps are part of the project close out except? A. verify issuance of certificate of occupancy B. respond to owner's questions and problems during period immediately after move in process C. verify owner has received all lien waivers D. final application and certificate for payment

A. verify issuance of certificate of occupancy Besides completing the work, the contractor must also submit to the owner certain other items including the Certificate of Occupancy (CO) as issued by the building department (part of the permit process originally paid for by the contractor). During project close out the designer is responsible for all of these items except the issuing of the Certificate of Occupancy.

A schedule for construction drawings would be used to indicate all of the following except? A. window treatment hardware B. types of doors C. wall finishes D. ceiling finishes

A. window treatment hardware Schedules show information in tabular format with rows and columns of data. They are used because they are a very efficient way to communicate a large amount of complex information in a small space. Common schedules for interior design construction drawings include room finish, door, kitchen equipment, millwork and hardware. Window treatment hardware is NOT part of construction, while millwork hardware is.

What fabric would have the best appearance for the longest time when used in seating for a movie theater? A. wool/nylon blend B. acrylic/acetate blend C. cotton/rayon blend D. vinyl

A. wool/nylon blend Source: Designing Commercial Interiors, Food and Beverage Facilities Theater seating requires a fabric that is resilient, durable, and flame retardant. The only combination that meets these requirements is the wool/nylon blend. The blends have a wool look and feel with enhanced abrasion resistance and toughness from the nylon. Carpet in nylon-wool blends are also good for maintenance, and hide traffic patterns. Acrylic/acetate or cotton/rayon are not durable enough, nor are they flame retardant. Vinyl is plastic. It's not naturally flame resistant, but must be treated and the treatment is not inherent in the fiber (it's not a fiber) and will wear off over time.

Changing a ceiling from gypsum wallboard to acoustic tile would most affect the room's A. decibel loss B. sound transmission C. reverberation D. impact insulation class

C. reverberation Changing from wallboard to acoustic tile affects the total absorption of a room and thereby changes the reverberation time.

What is ANSI/BIFMA/SOHO S6.5

American National Standard for Small Office/Home Office Furniture-Test

AATCC 147

Antibacterial Activity Assessment of Textile Materials: Parallel Streak Method

The following depicts a typical residential drainage and vent system for plumbing fixtures. What are the components of the system noted as 'A', 'B', and 'C'? A. A - stack vent, B - soil stack, C - vent B. A - vent, B - soil stack, C - stack vent C. A - stack vent, B - waste stack, C - vent D. A - stack vent, B - drain, C - fixture vent

As shown:A - stack vent B - soil stack C - vent If a vent connects to a soil or waste stack above the highest fixture in the system, the portion of the stack above this point is know as a STACK VENT. If the stack carries human waste from toilets, it is called a SOIL STACK.

Which test is used to test flame spread of floor coverings? A. Steiner Tunnel Test B. Critical Radiant Flux C. Smoke Density Chamber Test D. Methenamine Pill Test

B. Critical Radiant Flux Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Glossary ASTM E648 (the same test as NFPA 253) is ASTM's Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. This test measures the flame spread of flooring systems, like carpet, in corridors and exits. The Methenamine pill test is used to measure general flame resistance.

In the image below, which of the symbols would you use to represent a light switch that can be controlled from two different locations? A B C D

B Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Lighting, Circuiting The terms "three-way switch" and "four-way switch" are often confusing because the numbers do not refer to the number of locations from which control is possible. Rather, the numbers refer to the number of conductors required to make the switching possible. For example, a three-way switch required three conductors (not including the ground) to make it possible to control a light from two different switches.

Based on previous project data, it costs about $45/ft to construct a full-height partition. There are about 350 ft of this type of partition on the project now being budgeted. If the contractor's overhead and profit are estimated to be 14%, how much should the interior designer budget for this line item? A. $15,750 B. $17,950 C. $18,900 D. $15,120

B. $17,950 The base price of the partition is $45.00 times 350 feet or $15,750. To that you must add an additional 14%. ($15,750) x (0.14) = $2205 $15,750 + $2205 = $17,955 For preliminary budgeting, amounts are often rounded off to the nearest ten or one hundred dollars. $17,950 is the closest to the figure so this is the correct option.

The designer is using cost data from the prototype of a chain restaurant along with construction cost indices to estimate costs for a similar project in other cities. If the expected construction cost is $1,250,000 based on prices for St. Louis, what is the expected cost in Raleigh-Durham? Calculate the adjustment factor to 4 decimal places. Raleigh-Durham 80 Phoenix 90 City Average 100 San Jose 118 St. Louis 105 Boston 120 A. $1,640,625 B. $952,375 C. $1,562,500 D. $937,500

B. $952,375 Source: Engineering News Record, Using ENR Indexes To estimate construction costs, the practice of using historical projects to get an idea of the cost of future projects is quite common. Equally important is adjusting for location. City indices provide a means of extrapolating the project costs from one location to another. With the national average cost at 100, St. Louis at 105 means that construction costs are approximately 5% higher. The costs in Raleigh-Durham at 80 are approximately 20% less than the national average. To compare pricing from city to city, divide the "to" city by the "from" city. So — To: Raleigh-Durham 80From: St. Louis 105 or 80/105 =0.7619 (at 4 decimal places) or approximately 76%. The cost of building in Raleigh-Durham will be about 76% of what it would cost to build in St. Louis. Multiply by the expected costs of $1,250,000. Step 1 80/105=0.7619 Step 2 0.7619 x $1,250,000 =$952,375

A vertical change in floor finish cannot exceed what height without a sloped transition piece? A. 1/8" (3.2 mm) B. 1/4" (6.4 mm) C. 3/8" (9.5 mm) D. 1/2" (13 mm)

B. 1/4" (6.4 mm) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 303 Changes in Level Only a vertical change in floor finish height less than 1/4″ does not require a sloped transition piece. 303.2 Vertical. Changes in level of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) maximum in height shall be permitted to be vertical.

A designer has determined that a client needs about 8000 ft2 of usable office space. The leasing agent for the building says that the rentable-usable ratio will be 1.25. Approximately how much area should the interior designer recommend that the client lease? A. 7500 sqft B. 10,000 sqft C. 10,700 sqft D. 13,300 sqft

B. 10,000 sqft Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Determining the Rentable Area The rentable area is calculated by multiplying the usable area by the rentable-usable ratio (sometimes expressed as a load factor). The usable area includes the net assignable area plus allowance for circulation, so no increase for this is required. Rentable = Usable (rentable-usable ratio) = (8000 sqft) x (1.25) = 10,000 sqft

The centerline of accessible (barrier free) toilets must be how far from the side wall or partition of a toilet compartment? A. 17" (430mm) - 19" (485) B. 16" (405 mm) - 18" (455 mm) C. 18" (455 mm) D. 15" (380 mm) - 19" (485 mm)

B. 16" (405 mm) - 18" (455 mm) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, FIG 604.2 WATER CLOSET LOCATION First determine is the toilet is in a water closet, toilet compartment, or ambulatory accessible stall. If the toilet room has more than one plumbing fixture, you will use Section A117 603. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design604.2 Location. The water closet shall be positioned with a wall or partition to the rear and to one side. The centerline of the water closet shall be 16 inches (405 mm) minimum to 18 inches (455 mm) maximum from the side wall or partition, except that the water closet shall be 17 inches (430 mm) minimum and 19 inches (485 mm) maximum from the side wall or partition in the ambulatory accessible toilet compartment specified in 604.8.2. Water closets shall be arranged for a left-hand or right-hand

How much fabric width is required to create drapery with a fullness of 150%? A. 1.5 times the finished fabric width B. 3 times the finished fabric width C. 2 times the finished fabric width D. 2.5 times the finished fabric width

B. 3 times the finished fabric width Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition. [VitalSource Bookshelf]., Wall and Window Finishes, Draperies and Curtains The fullness of drapery is a measure of how much of the fabric is taken up in pleating. For example a 48″ wide width of fabric will pleat down to a finished width of 16-24″ depending upon how much fullness is desired. There are 3 standard fullnesses used for drapery:2:1, 2 to 1 or 100%2.5:1, 2 1/2 to 1 or 150%3:1, 3 to 1 or 200% 2:1 is used for bulky thick fabrics or less expensive treatments where cost savings are important, such as an apartment, hotel, office or commercial space. A fabric width of 48″ will pleat down to 24″ using a 2:1 fullness. 2.5:1 Most custom draperies, lined and unlined, are finished at 2 1/2 to 1 or 150%. 3:1 Sheer lightweight fabrics are usually pleated at 200% or 3:1.

What is the minimum distance between a double door vestibule - one swings in and one swings out of the vestibule? A. 2 times the width of the door B. 48" (1220 mm) C. 48" (1220 mm) plus the width of the door at 90 degrees D. 3 times the width of the door

B. 48" (1220 mm) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 404 Doors and Doorways Per A117, 404.2.5 Two Doors in Series, the distance shall be 48 inches plus the width of any door swinging into the space... PLUS, the space between the doors shall provide a turning space (60 min/1525). Refer to Fig 404.2.5 TWO DOORS IN A SERIES. Using a 36″ door, this distance would be 84″ or 7 feet.

According to the lighting plan, what is the height of wall sconce A. A. 60" AFF B. 72" AFF C. 84" AFF D. 80" AFF

B. 72" AFF Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings The wall sconce marked A on the ceiling plan is noted at 72" above finish floor. Typically a wall sconce that is greater than 4" must be mounted at a minimum 80" AFF to comply with ADA standards. However since this sconce will be located over a bench in the coffee area it is able to be mounted at any height determined by the designer.

Which is the most correct statement about acoustic quality? A. A good acoustic material absorbs all frequencies equally. B. A 7 dB reduction of the noise within a room would be clearly noticeable. C. A desirable goal of acoustic design is to eliminate all background noise. D. Sound of 50 dB is twice as loud as a sound of 25dB.

B. A 7 dB reduction of the noise within a room would be clearly noticeable. Any change above 5 db is clearly noticeable.

What is an example of a behavior setting commonly used in the workplace landscape? A. Impromptu break out meetings in the open area near the workstations B. All-staff conference meeting held in the boardroom at 10am at the first of every month including catered breakfast C. Quick conference call in the phone room D. Client meeting in the executive office

B. All-staff conference meeting held in the boardroom at 10am at the first of every month including catered breakfast Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Developing Design Concepts, PSYCHOLOGICAL AND SOCIAL INFLUENCES, Behavior Settings A behavior setting is a particular place with definable boundaries and objects in which a standing pattern of behavior occurs at a particular time. It is a useful concept for studying the effects of the environment on human activity. For example, a weekly board of directors meeting in a conference room can be considered a behavior setting. The meeting activity follows certain procedures, occurs in the same place (the conference room), and the room is arranged to assist the activity (chairs are arranged around a table, audiovisual facilities are present, lighting is adequate, and so forth). The behavior setting is useful for the interior designer because it connects the strictly behavioral aspects of human activity with the effects of the physical environment on people. Although a behavior setting is a complex system of activities, human goals, physical objects, and cultural needs, it provides the interior designer with a definable unit of design. By knowing the people involved and the activities taking place, the designer can develop programmatic concepts that support the setting.

Which will be shown on 5/A2? A. An elevation B. An enlarged plan C. A detail D. A building section

B. An enlarged plan Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, As Built Drawings and Demolition Plans The detail reference mark indicates an enlarged plan will be shown on 5/A2. A detail reference mark is used to show that a detail of the portion circled is drawn. The detail differs from the portion that references it only in that it is drawn at a larger scale. If the circle around the detail is replaced with a larger rectangle with rounded corners, the meaning of the symbol does not change; it indicates an enlarged floor plan.

In which type of construction specification is the term "approved equal" most likely to be used? A. Proprietary specifications B. Base-bid specifications C. Descriptive specifications D. Performance specifications

B. Base-bid specifications Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Specifications, Types of Specifications A base-bid specification calls out a proprietary material or product but allows substitutions. An interior designer can use the term or "approved equal". In a base-bid specification to ensure that any substitutions submitted are of equal quality and gives the chance for the interior designer to review and approve any substitutions prior to being incorporated into the bid.

Which of the following would be the best fabric selection to use for upholstery in a retirement facility? A. Nylon B. Crypton C. Polyester D. Acrylic

B. Crypton Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Selection of Materials, Finishes, and Furnishings; Selection of Furniture Fabrics Crypton is a specially engineered fabric treatment process that is stain, water, flame and bacteria resistant, making it a good choice for retirement facilities and healthcare where durability and fire resistance are important factors. Rolls of fabric are impregnated with a complex chemical in a heat setting process that renders the final fabric nonporous. Crypton fabrics prohibit the growth of molds like Aspergillus niger and bacteria such as Staphylococcus aureus. Resistant to moisture and stains, Crypton fabrics are easily cleanable and strong, all while maintaining a high quality. It is suitable for: High use seating applications in Healthcare, Hotel, Restaurants, Public Spaces Any area with a high demand for stain repellency, ease of cleaning, and preventing stains and liquids from penetrating cushions, and resistance to odor and mildew The Crypton process may be used on other textiles such as carpet and leather. Crypton Green fabrics are also available; this process avoids the use of environmentally harmful element

Why is it important to determine the correct jurisdiction of your project, the enforceable codes and standards for that jurisdiction, and if there are any additions that have been made? A. If overlapping code jurisdictions apply (state, county, city, etc.) you need to follow the codes that are most current. B. Because both a state and local code may apply to your project location, you need to determine which code jurisdictions apply. C. When you have a project located in a rural jurisdiction, you do not have to adhere to the overall state mandated codes. D. As you only need to follow the most stringent code covering the jurisdiction, it's important to determine which it is.

B. Because both a state and local code may apply to your project location, you need to determine which code jurisdictions apply. Source: Harmon, K.E.K.S. K. (2018). The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., Code Officials and the Code Process, Code Jurisdiction The code jurisdiction of a project is determined by the location of the building. A jurisdiction is defined as a geographical or governmental area that uses the same codes, standards, and regulations. At the broadest level, a state typically mandates codes that must be followed by each jurisdiction within the state. In addition, a county or city municipality will establish a set of codes to be used in their local jurisdiction. The relationship of the state code and the local code varies among states. Sometimes the state code has to be followed in conjunction with other locally adopted codes, or it might only apply to buildings in more rural areas that do not have a local code. Typically, the state will at least enforce regulations on state‐owned buildings.

A residential kitchen remodeling project has reached the stage of relocating appliances. The client decides to enlarge the kitchen by extending it six feet into the back yard. Which document(s) MUST be obtained prior to construction? A. Certificate of Occupancy B. Building permit C. Building code review D. Demolition report

B. Building permit Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Means of Egress, PERMITTING AND CONTRACTING PROCESSES The designer's plans and specifications (construction documents) must be submitted to the local building department and reviewed for issuance of a permit. The contractor is responsible for submitting the documents to the local building department, or as it is often called, the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Building codes require that certain information appear on the set of construction documents submitted for plan review. Construction documents must indicate the location, nature, and extent of the proposed work and how it will conform to the code. This includes the floor plan drawings, elevations, sections, and details for architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, and other specialty construction, as well as related schedules and written specifications. Structural calculations (if necessary) may have to be submitted with the documents, but inspections, including structural, are performed during the construction of the project. A building permit is required whether or not the kitchen is extended into the yard, or any structural work is necessary, and must be issued prior to demolition. The certificate of occupancy CO (letter of occupancy, or Use and Occupancy letter) is issued after construction, once the final inspection has been completed.

For a more complex project, the codes on a furniture installation plan may consist of a combination of letters and numbers. What would the code be for the fourteenth type of chair, located in room 409 of a new tenant space? A. CHP14-409 B. C14/409 C. P409/C14 D. R409/CT14

B. C14/409 Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Furnishings and Equipment Plans Most furniture plans in commercial projects include an accompanying key or schedule that is referenced to the plan view. Code numbers identify each piece of furniture. Information on pricing and ordering, as well as the final placement of the furniture, will generally be included in the spec or job book.

The main differences between California Technical Bulletins "CAL 117" and "CAL 133" are: A. CAL 117 measures the amount of toxicity a material emits when it is burned, and CAL 133 deals with a completed chair flame test. B. CAL 117 addresses the Flame Retardance of Resilient Filling Materials, and CAL 133 deals with a completed chair flame test. C. CAL 117 addresses the Flame Retardance of Resilient Filling Materials, and CAL 133 measures the amount of toxicity a material emits when it is burned. D. CAL 117 deals with a completed chair flame test and CAL 133 measures the amount of toxicity a material emits when it is burned.

B. CAL 117 addresses the Flame Retardance of Resilient Filling Materials, and CAL 133 deals with a completed chair flame test. Source: Harmon, K.E.K.S. K. (2018). The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., Finish and Furniture Selections, Standards and Testing CAL 117: "CAL 117, Requirements, Test Procedures and Apparatus for Testing the Flame Retardance of Resilient Filling Materials Used in Upholstered Furniture" CAL 133: "The full‐scale test is a pass/fail test of a whole piece of furniture rather than of an individual finish or material. It was first developed by the state of California and titled California Technical Bulletin 133, also referred to as either CAL 133 or TB 133."

The overall code compliance process for the project begins when? A. The designer need only review barrier-free code compliance at the end of the CD phase; all other codes can be reviewed during design development. B. Code compliance reviews should begin near the end of the initial floor plan development stages to prevent costly rework later. C. The designer does not need to review code compliance clearances related to systems furniture until the final punch/deficiency list review process. D. Codes are best reviewed all together at one time once the full documents have been completed as it saves the project time and money.

B. Code compliance reviews should begin near the end of the initial floor plan development stages to prevent costly rework later. Source: Fleming, M.K. R. (2016). Space Planning Basics (4th Edition)., Developing a Rough Floor Plan, Review A preliminary code review is most valuable at the point when an entire floor plan can first be seen, near the end of the initial floor plan development stages to prevent costly rework later. Does the plan meet code requirements, including safe egress and barrier-free design? Now is the time to catch such things as unacceptable lengths of travel, unnecessarily long or dead-end corridors, or unsuitable corridor and stair widths rather than after significant plan refinement has been accomplished. It is difficult, if not impossible, to adjust a refined floor plan that has not accommodated barrier-free needs to one that meets those needs well. Now is the time to make the plan conform to these requirements. The plan must also meet appropriate clearances between furniture and required equipment, windows for habitable space, appropriate dimensions between plumbing fixtures, etc. Although these details may be corrected later in the process, the more that can be fixed early, the greater the savings in time and effort later.

What does this symbol represent? A. Data B. Data and telephone C. Telephone D. Power and data

B. Data and telephone Power and telephone jacks are represented by a single triangle that is half solid, half open. A telephone jack is represented by a solid, filled in triangle. Power and data would be shown as two separate symbols - an open triangle and a circle with 2 parallel lines crossing through. Data jacks are represented by open triangles.

In the master specification format, what division would you classify decorative exterior handrails under? A. Division 32 B. Division 05 C. Division 09 D. Division 10

B. Division 05 Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Specifications Decorative exterior handrails would be classified under division 05- metals.

What can designers reduce to address climate change through product specifications? A. Eliminate LCAs B. Eliminate GHGs C. Eliminate IAQs D. Eliminate ESGs

B. Eliminate GHGs Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 3rd Edition ePDF for QPractice., Environmental Conditions and the Site Eliminate GHGs. GHGs are greenhouse gases. Product specifications that strive to not contribute to greenhouse gases and support the conservation of energy and use of sustainable energy sources provide a direct positive effect on climate change. Continued emission of greenhouse gases will cause further warming and long-lasting changes in all components of the climate system, increasing the likelihood of severe, pervasive, and irreversible impacts on people and ecosystems. Limiting climate change requires substantial and sustained reductions in greenhouse gas emissions which, together with adaptation, can limit climate change risks.

What is the focus of CAL 133 (TB 133) in the specifications of furniture? A. Cushions B. Entire assembly C. Fabric D. Finish

B. Entire Assembly

What building rating system was originally developed by the CDC and GSA? A. LEVEL B. Fitwel C. LEED D. GBCI

B. Fitwel Source: FItwel, What is Fitwel? Fitwel was created by the U.S. Centers for Disease Control (CDC) and Prevention and U.S. General Services Administration (GSA). The CDC remains the research and evaluation partner for Fitwel. The Center for Active Design was selected as the licensed operator of Fitwel, charged with expanding Fitwel to the global market. WELL is a performance-based system for measuring, certifying, and monitoring features of the built environment that impact the health and wellbeing of the people who live, work, and learn in them, developed by the International WELL Building Institute (IWBI) founded by Delos according to a Clinton Global Initiative commitment. GBCI is the Green Building Council Inc, founded with the support of the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) to provide independent oversight of professional credentialing and project certification under the Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) green building rating system. LEVEL is a furniture sustainability rating system developed by BIFMA, ​​the not-for-profit trade association for business and institutional furniture manufacturers. LEED is a sustainable building rating system conceived in 1993 by two private individuals in concert with over 50 design firms and several non-profits administered under the USGBC (U.S. Green Building Council).

Of the following, what is the interior designer not responsible for in the close-out phase of contract administration? A. Issuing a certificate of substantial completion B. Forwarding warranties and other maintenance manuals received from the contractor to the owner C. Issuing a final certificate for payment D. Issuing a punch list (deficiency list)

B. Forwarding warranties and other maintenance manuals received from the contractor to the owner Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration Forwarding all warranties, manuals, certificates of inspection and bonds is the sole responsibility of the contractor during the project close-out phase, not the responsibility of the interior designer.

Of the options listed below, what tool is the most commonly used in cost estimating for FF&E? A. AutoCAD B. Furniture schedule C. BIM software D. Finish legend

B. Furniture schedule Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Cost Estimating and Budgeting A furniture schedule would be best suited for cost estimating. The schedule will list quantities for all of the different furniture pieces in the project, which can then be multiplied by the estimated prices. This information is key when estimating costs for FF&E.

What combination of exceptions to code allows you to reduce the width of an exit corridor? A. Lighting fixtures mounted at 80 inches [2,030 mm] above finished floor, doors projecting no more than 12 inches [300 mm] when fully open, hand rails that meet accessibility requirements B. Handrails that meet accessibility requirements, doors that do not project more than 7 inches [180 mm] when fully open, wall trim that is less than 1/2 inch [13 mm] thick C. Handrails that meet accessibility requirements, lighting fixtures that do not project more than 8 inches [200 mm], decorative chair rails and panel moldings projecting no more than 4 inches [100 mm] D. Lighting fixtures projecting no more than 4 inches [100mm], wainscot or other millwork below 42 inches [1,060 mm] above finished floor projecting no more than 4 1/2 inches [115 mm], wall mounted fire extinguisher

B. Handrails that meet accessibility requirements, doors that do not project more than 7 inches [180 mm] when fully open, wall trim that is less than 1/2 inch [13 mm] thick Source: 2018 International Building Code, 1005.7 Encroachment All of the incorrect choices include some element alone that would not be code compliant. Per IBC, the following exceptions will allow you to reduce the width: 1005.7 Encroachment.Encroachments into the required means of egress width shall be in accordance with the provisions of this section. 1005.7.1 Doors.Doors, when fully opened, shall not reduce the required width by more than 7 inches (178 mm). Doors in any position shall not reduce the required width by more than one-half. Exceptions:1.Surface-mounted latch release hardware shall be exempt from inclusion in the 7-inch maximum (178 mm) encroachment where both of the following conditions exist:1.1.The hardware is mounted to the side of the door facing away from the adjacent wall where the door is in the open position.1.2.The hardware is mounted not less than 34 inches (865 mm) nor more than 48 inches (1219 mm) above the finished floor.2.The restrictions on door swing shall not apply to doors within individual dwelling units and sleeping units of Group R-2 occupancies and dwelling units of Group R-3 occupancies. 1005.7.2 Other projections.Handrail projections shall be in accordance with the provisions of Section 1014.8. Other nonstructural projections such as trim and similar decorative features shall be permitted to project into the required width not more than 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) on each side. Be sure to review this section and other requirements for protruding objects.

When the term "social responsibility" is used in relation to the Interior Design profession it usually means: A. It means a responsibility to the business entity's profitability. B. It is the use of the interior designer's expertise to enhance public places. C. It is meant as the term related to professional association volunteering. D. It is tied with the concept of green design to mean "sustainability."

B. It is the use of the interior designer's expertise to enhance public places. Source: Piotrowski, C. M. (2013). Professional Practice for Interior Designers., Glossary "Social responsibility. Use of the designer's expertise and time, usually on a volunteer or pro bono basis, to enhance and enrich the interiors of nonprofits and public places or otherwise perform community service."

Furniture plans are sometimes combined with the power and data plan. What is the best reason to do this? A. One less plan to create for the construction document set. B. Locations of outlets are usually related to furniture layouts, combining makes it easier to locate outlets. C. No one looks at the furniture plan, this makes consultants look at it. D. Interior Design is only allowed a certain number of sheets in a Construction Document set.

B. Locations of outlets are usually related to furniture layouts, combining makes it easier to locate outlets. Source: Qpractice Summary, Furniture Plans Outlets and switches that relate to furniture and room usage can be shown in context with furniture and other objects on the furniture plan. For example, in an office design, outlets may be placed in relationship to a desk or workstation.

What type of drawing is shown in this image? A. Plumbing plan B. Millwork section C. Demolition plan D. Elevation

B. Millwork section Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings, Sections This is a millwork section of an ADA compliant sink. The false drawer fronts open to reveal a sink that can be rolled under.

Which standard addresses vertical hangings and window treatments? A. NFPA 286/ASTM E2257 B. NFPA 701/ASTM D6413 C. NFPA 253/ASTM E648 D. NFPA 269/ASTM E1678

B. NFPA 701/ASTM D6413 Source: Harmon, K.E.K.S. K. (2018). The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., Finish and Furniture Selections, Standards and Testing The Vertical Flame Tests include the following: NFPA 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and FilmsASTM D6413, Standard Test Method for Flame Resistance of Textiles (Vertical Test)

After defining the exact scope of work and selecting individual floor finish types for each area of your project, you must provide your client with an updated working budget number. Which method of estimating would be used at this time? A. Matrix Costing B. Parameter Method C. Local Cost Indices D. Square Footage Method

B. Parameter Method Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Cost Estimating and Budgeting, Methods of Estimating, Parameter At this time in a project, floor finishes can be broken down into individual types (carpeting, vinyl tile, wood-strip flooring) and multiplied by an estimated cost per square foot; however, since specific products have not been selected, the parameter method estimate typically uses base unit pricing per material type. The square footage method is based on project size and is used before much design work has started. If the project has progressed to specific manufacturers and products, the designer can use the detailed quantity takeoff method for a fairly exact budget. Matrix costing deals with pricing alternatives. Additionally, conditions that must be accounted for in developing any project budget are geographical location and inflation, which can be adjusted by using the local cost indices published in various sources, including the major architectural and construction trade magazines.

Which of the following puts more responsibility on the designer, can be used to explore unique design solutions and the use of new technology, are used to set criteria rather than requirements, and must be coordinated with the AHJ for final approval? A. Prescriptive Codes B. Performance Codes C. Prescriptive Specifications D. Performance Specifications

B. Performance Codes Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 3rd Edition, Code Officials and the Code Process The correct answer is Performance Codes. Prescriptive specifications tell exactly what product or material the contractor must use by brand name.Performance specifications tell what results the final construction assembly must achieve, but they give the contractor some choice in how they will be achieved. Most interior design specifications fall somewhere between these two extremes. Traditionally, specifications have been primarily prescriptive in nature. Prescriptive codes set out a precise requirement, explaining exactly what must be done to meet the code. It shows the designer how to meet these objectives, document the results, and work with the code official to obtain final approval. Performance codes, in contrast, provide the objective but not specific instructions on how to achieve it. The focus is on the desired outcome, not a single solution, and compliance is based on meeting the criteria established by the performance code. "If a design requires the use of a performance code instead of certain prescriptive requirements, then a preliminary review with the code official is required rather than optional. In fact, a concept report may have to be submitted before beginning the design, because the code official must agree to the use of the performance criteria (and the extent of use) in the particular building or space. When using performance codes, the code official must also agree that the design satisfies the code intent before the completion of the construction documents. If this process is not done correctly and the code official rejects the design, a lot of time, money, and energy will be wasted."

What type of structural system cannot be penetrated after construction placement? A. Post and Beam B. Post tensioned concrete C. Open web steel joist system D. Precast concrete

B. Post tension concrete Post tensioned concrete consists of steel cables that at tightened as the concrete hardens to reinforce strength. Once tightened the cables cannot be cut or manipulated without affecting the material strength and damaging the wall.

What type of floor plan, often created by the Interior Designer, is shown in the partial plan below? A. Dimension Plan B. Power Plan C. Furniture Plan D. Reflected Ceiling Plan

B. Power Plan Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings and Specifications, Contents of Construction Drawings - Floor Plans For large or complex projects, the interior designer sometimes draws a separate power plan or communication plan showing the locations of electrical outlets, telephone outlets, and other signal systems, like the locations of computers and intercommunication systems. This plan is not showing an overall Site nor a Reflected Ceiling view. Even though some furniture is represented for reference, this plan is not a "Furniture Plan" since that is not the main intent of the drawing. The furniture is not the most important part. "Dimension Plan" is also not the correct answer because, even though there are dimensions on this plan, the dimensions are to indicate the locations of the power and data items. It is not a plan solely intended to show dimensions.

Furniture plans can typically be doubled with which two plans since the exact locations of outlets can be directly related to the location and orientation of furniture? A. RCP and Power B. Power and Communications C. Finish schedule and Site D. RCP and Finish Plan

B. Power and Communications Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings The furniture plan is sometimes doubled up with a power and telephone/communications plan because the exact locations of outlets can be directly related to the locations and orientations of furniture. For example, telephone and electrical outlets are best placed directly to the side of a desk.

An interior designer is evaluating various alternatives for a particular building product as they relate to sustainability. The interior designer would most likely use A. an environmental impact study B. a life-cycle assessment C. an impact assessment D. a matrix comparison chart

B. a life-cycle assessment A life-cycle assessment evaluates the environmental impact of using a particular material over its entire useful life, including disposal. It could be used to compare the impacts of two or more materials so the architect could select the most sustainable one.

On a large restaurant project you have selected a unique handcrafted tile for use throughout the entire restaurant. You are nervous the contractor will try and replace this product due to cost and long lead times. In order to ensure you receive the exact product what type of specification should you write? A. Descriptive B. Proprietary C. Base-bid D. Performance

B. Proprietary Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Contract Documents and Specifications Proprietary specifications are the most restrictive specifications in that they call out a specific manufacturer's product. These give the interior designer complete control over what is installed. They are easier to write than other types and are generally shorter. However, they do not allow for competitive bidding and may force the contractor to use materials, or products that are difficult or expensive to procure, or that require a long delivery time.

While reviewing shop drawings, the designer notices that the extents of wallcovering are not shown correctly per the contract documents. After returning the shop drawing showing the corrections, the designer receives a call from the contractor saying that the markups will add cost to the project. What should the designer do next? A. Provide the client with more cost effective wallcovering options to offset the increased cost the contractor provided you. B. Remind the contractor that since the shop drawings didn't conform to what was in the contract documents, the markups shouldn't add cost if estimates were done correctly C. Inform the client that they need to get in touch with the contractor to come to a solution since they have the contract with the contractor D. Contact the client and inform them of the cost increase for their project to get written approval

B. Remind the contractor that since the shop drawings didn't conform to what was in the contract documents, the markups shouldn't add cost if estimates were done correctly Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration, Submittals Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data prepared to show how a subcontractor or supplier proposes to supply and install work to conform to the requirements of the contract documents. They are provided first to the general contractor, who reviews for accuracy and then submits to the designer. The interior designer is not responsible for determining the accuracy of measurements or completeness of details, verifying quantities, or checking fabrication or installation procedures. That is the responsibility of the general contractor.

The designer is specifying a veneer cut of oak for use at the architectural woodwork located behind the main reception feature wall at a high end boutique hotel. The desired look has a minimal grain pattern. Which method of cutting should be specified? A. Rift Sawn B. Rift Sliced C. Plain Sawn D. Rotary Sliced

B. Rift Sliced Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Architectural Woodwork, Lumber and Veneers for Architectural Woodwork Rift slicing is accomplished by quartering a log and cutting it at 15 degree angle to the growth rings. Like quarter slicing, it results in a straight-grained pattern and is commonly used with oak to eliminate the appearance of markings perpendicular to the direction of the grain. Rift Sawn and Plain Sawn are types of solid stock lumber cutting, not a veneer as indicated in the question. Rotary Slicing produces a very pronounced grain pattern that is often undesirable for fine-quality wood finishes, although it does produce the most veneer with the least waste. Watch the Answer Vault video Wood Veneer

What installation method for terrazzo is the best method to avoid cracking? A. Monolithic B. Sand cushion C. Bonded D. Thin-set

B. Sand cushion Source: Binggeli, Corky. Interior Graphic Standards: Student Edition, Interior Construction, Interior Finishes Terrazzo is a very low maintenance, seamless floor finish with the luxurious look of stone mosaic and durability comparable to that of concrete. Often selected for its decorative possibilities, terrazzo artists can produce striking medallions or intricate inlaid patterns. Terrazzo is a mixture of a binder and crushed aggregate, typically marble. Divider strips of brass, white alloy of zinc, or plastic are used functionally as control joints, and aesthetically as design elements to separate fields of color. The use of metal dividers and the size of panels may affect the installation system that is used. In the sand cushion method, the finish system is separated from the structural slab with a membrane. The terrazzo system can move independently from the structure since the underbed is reinforced. Other methods should only be used if floor movement or deflection is not expected as they are more prone to producing cracks. Advantages of the portland cement on sand cushion method include: Breathability - not affected by moisture vapor transmission Can accommodate substrate defects Can be sloped for drains Can be used with radiant flooring systems Disadvantages include: Requires at least 2″ depth for installation More limited color without glass chips allowed Longer curing times Size limitations of panels between dividers

Which wall finish would be most appropriate for a high traffic public corridor in an office building? A. FRP wall panels B. Type III vinyl wallcovering C. Drop matched fabric wallcovering D. Paint in an eggshell finish

B. Type III vinyl wallcovering Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Building Systems and Construction, Wall finishes Type III heavy duty vinyl wallcovering is the most durable and cleanable of the vinyl wallcovering types. It is recommended for heavy traffic areas like public corridors. Eggshell finish paint is best for light traffic areas that would not need to be frequently scrubbed or washed. FRP would not be aesthetically appropriate for front of house areas. FRP is typically used in back of house areas. Fabric wallcovering is not as durable or cleanable as vinyl wallcovering. Type I vinyl wallcovering is best for low traffic areas. Semi-gloss paint is not as durable or cleanable as vinyl wallcovering. Semi-gloss paint may also show more wall imperfections when used in a long expanse like a corridor compared to a vinyl wallcovering.

The Room Corner Test or NFPA 265/UL 1715 typical addresses what fabric situation? A. Determining both the flame spread and smoke development ratings in the classification of interior finishes applied to walls, ceilings, and other structural elements. B. Specifically when napped, tufted, or looped textiles are used as "wallcoverings" on walls and ceilings. C. Vertical treatments such as curtains, draperies, window shades, large wall hangings or tapestries, and plastic films used for decorative purposes. D. To see how a product will smolder before either flaming or extinguishing an actual smoldering cigarette as the ignition source.

B. Specifically when napped, tufted, or looped textiles are used as "wallcoverings" on walls and ceilings. Source: Harmon, K.E.K.S. K. (2018). The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., Finish and Furniture Selections, Standards and Testing, Room Corner Tests, Textile Wallcoverings The most current Room Corner Test standards for textile wallcoverings include: NFPA 265, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls UL 1715, Fire Test of Interior Finish Material The Vertical Flame Test- NFPA 701/ASTM6413 tests vertical treatments such as curtains, draperies, window shades, large wall hangings or tapestries, and plastic films used for decorative purposes. The Smolder Resistance Test or Cigarette Ignition Test - NFPA 260/ASTM E1353/CAL 117 tests how a product will smolder before either flaming or extinguishing an actual smoldering cigarette as the ignition source. The Steiner Tunnel Test - ASTM E84/UL 723 tests both the flame spread and smoke development ratings in the classification of interior finishes applied to walls, ceilings, and other structural elements.

Reducing energy consumption below the recommended ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 levels could include what aspects of the project design under the control of the Interior Designer? A. Coordinate with electrical engineer for a programmable emergency lighting system. B. Specification of task/ambient lighting systems and daylight strategies throughout space. C. Specify low-reflectance finishes to improve brightness provided by daylighting. D. Using ductless overhead in-ceiling plenum ventilation for all open office area spaces.

B. Specification of task/ambient lighting systems and daylight strategies throughout space. Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Sustainable Design, Energy Efficiency, Electricity Use Specification of task/ambient lighting systems and daylight strategies throughout space. Although much of the energy efficiency of a building is decided by the original architecture and mechanical system design, there are many strategies that the interior designer can use to reduce energy consumption. These can be grouped into four broad categories: building commissioning mechanical systems electricity use plumbing Electricity UseActions the interior designer can take to reduce electricity use include:Reduce the power required for lighting by designing task/ambient systems or by other means, such as utilizing daylighting. A project can also receive LEED credit if the lighting power density is reduced a certain amount below the ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 level.

What can an interior designer do to improve indoor air quality? A. Specify operable windows to let in fresh air B. Specify low-emitting interior finishes C. Bring in outdoor air via the HVAC system D. Specify non-toxic cleaning chemicals

B. Specify low-emitting interior finishes An interior designer has the most control over interior finishes that are specified. An interior designer does not typically specify windows or HVAC systems. The cleaning chemicals used in the space may be determined by the maintenance staff in that building, not the interior designer.

While laying out the studs for an office space during construction, the subcontractor notifies the contractor that the space provided adjacent to the door opening will not be wide enough to meet ADA push/pull requirements. The contractor instructs the sub to continue with the work per the construction drawings. Upon inspection, the work is cited as not meeting ADA and the owner is required to correct the buildout to meet necessary standards. Who will be responsible for the cost of this change? A. The interior designer B. The contractor C. The subcontractor D. The owner

B. The contractor Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction and FF&E Contracts It is not the contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the contract documents conform to building codes, ordinances, and other regulations. However, if the contractor notices some variance, he or she must notify the interior designer in writing. If the contractor does not give this notice and proceeds to perform work knowingly in variance with some regulation, the contractor assumes full responsibility for such work and must bear all costs to correct the situation.

In the code study plan shown, what is the rating of the new fire separation between the existing suites and the extents of the project area? A. The new project area only has an existing 2 hour fire separation at the egress stairs. B. The project area has a new 2 hour fire separation. C. The new project area does not need a new fire separation because the existing suites are all less than 5,000 sf each. D. The project area has an new 2 hour smoke barrier.

B. The project area has a new 2 hour fire separation. The new project area is represented in a shaded green hatch, as indicated on the plan. By referring to the KEY provided, the rating of the NEW fire separation line, represented by the orange dashed line, is a 2 hour fire separation. Learning to refer to a drawing key when given, is an essential part of interpreting construction drawings.

There are a number of considerations that are important in designing a safe and accessible residential bathroom. Which is the most important? A. The minimum clearance from the center of the toilet to any obstruction is 18". B. There should be at least 30x48 inches of clear space in front of an accessible tub or shower. C. Ground fault circuit interrupters must be specified on all receptacles. D. A mechanical ventilation system must be provided.

B. There should be at least 30x48 inches of clear space in front of an accessible tub or shower. Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities There should be at least 30 (760) min clear space in front of an accessible tub or shower. The other answers are correct but do not apply specifically to accessibility. Refer to 604.2 Location. Please note that the size of the clear space at a shower depends upon the type of transfer, refer to 607.2 Clearance. The clear floor space varies by type of shower but must be 30 (760) min wide, refer to 608.2 Size, clearance, and seat.

How can composite wood veneers can be used? A. to increase the yield of veneer from a log B. as a "green" alternative to standard wood veneers C. as a substitute for HPDL D. to improve the appearance of book matching

B. as a "green" alternative to standard wood veneers Composite wood veneer is an artificial product that uses readily available and fast growing renewable trees to make veneers that are stained and reformed into an artificial log that is then sliced to produce a new veneer. It is considered a sustainable or "green" product.

Preliminary space planning shows that it is impossible to satisfy all the programmed adjacencies shown on the adjacency matrix that has been approved by the client. What is the best course of action? A. Develop several alternatives that come as close as possible to the requirements, and have the client select the one that best satisfies the program. B. Verify that the adjacencies require physical connection, and then review the problem with the client. C. Satisfy as many adjacency connections as possible, and present this information to the client for review and approval. D. Ask the client to downgrade the importance of the problematic adjacency.

B. Verify that the adjacencies require physical connection, and then review the problem with the client. Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Concept Development and the Design Process, Matrices and Adjacency Studies The initial design can help the client clarify the priority of programming adjacencies and, if necessary, modify them so the designer can proceed with good information. If the client wants to see sketches to prove that the required adjacencies cannot be made to work, these are already available from the initial work on the problem, typically these would be bubble (relationship) diagrams.

What is the best drawing to use when communicating the depth and dimensions of various moldings and reveals on a decorative wall in a conference room? A. Millwork Detail B. Vertical Section C. Horizontal Section D. Elevation

B. Vertical Section A properly placed vertical section will show the various depths of the facade which can be dimensioned as needed.

Which of the following fabrics would be considered the most environmentally friendly option in its attributes by removing items from the waste stream?EXHIBIT A. WF-1 Wool Check B. WF-8 Abacus C. WF-7 Memory D. WF-2 Blumen

B. WF-8 Abacus Source: Oeko-Tex, Overview WF-8 Abacus with 54% Post-Industrial Recycled Polyester, 46% Post-Consumer Recycled Polyester is the most friendly to the environment as it is all recycled content. Of the other choices: WF-1 Wool Check with 100% wool and Greenguard Certified but doesn't remove items from the waste stream WF-2 Blumen has no waste stream attributes, but it is Oeko-Tex Certified WF-7 Memory is made from Trevira CS polyester, which is a petroleum product and does not remove products from the waste stream. The more recycled content a material has the less raw materials and energy is required to process the raw materials into a final product. Each of the three types of recycled content should be considered: post-consumer materials post-industrial materials recovered materials If a product is labeled as Oeko-Tex Certified it is free from harmful chemicals and safe for human use. To attain Oeko-Tex Standard 100 certification, the fabric has been tested and certified to be free from harmful levels of more than 100 substances known to be harmful to human health.

If a consumer was interested in locating water efficient products what label would they look for on products? A. WaterStar B. WaterSense C. Green Label D. EnergyStar

B. WaterSense WaterSense is a program created by the EPA that helps consumers identify water efficient programs and products by the WaterSense Label. Products are certified by independent, third-party licensed certifying bodies based on the EPA's criteria for water efficiency and performance. These bodies evaluate products according to testing and certification protocols specific to each product category.

Which carpet type allows a complex, custom-patterned carpet with varying pile heights? A. Tufted B. Wilton C. Plush D. Axminster

B. Wilton Source: McGowan, M., Kruse, K. Specifying Interiors: A Guide to Construction and FF&E for Residential and Commercial Interiors Projects., CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, Carpet, Woven Carpet Both the Axminster and Wilton are a type of woven carpet produced on a loom, and different in construction from tufted carpet. Most woven carpet is heavy, dimensionally stable, and strong as a result of the weaving process and does not require a secondary backing, as tufted carpet does. Weaving accounts for less than 2% of the carpet market in the United States. Its primary use is in the hospitality industry, where long-term durability and intricate pattern detail are primary considerations. Installation costs for woven carpet are also typically higher due to pattern matching, power stretching and hand-sewn seams. There are three basic types of weaving processes: Velvet Wilton Axminster While both the Axminster and Wilton processes allow for complex patterns, but only the Wilton allows for varying pile heights. Velvet is the least complex weaving method. It is used primarily to produce solid color carpets, but variations in color and pattern are possible. The Wilton weaving method is usually used to produce carpet of more than one color, with as many as five colors possible. A Wilton carpet is thick and heavy because yarn of every color used is carried beneath the pile surface. This unusual construction makes it the most heavy, durable carpet type, making it a popular choice for heavy-traffic areas. Axminster patterns and colors are virtually limitless, because the colored yarns are inserted individually as they are required by the design, emulating the hand-weaving process. The distinguishing characteristics of this weave type are intricate, multicolored patterns and a backing so heavily ribbed that the carpet can be rolled only lengthwise. Because of their strong construction and vast design capabilities, Axminster carpets are a popular choice for hotel lobbies and ballrooms, cruise ships, restaurants, and casinos. Axminster carpets are usually produced in an 80% wool, 20% nylon blend or in 100% wool yarns. Most Axminster carpets are made seven pitch per inch (25.4 mm); however, eight pitch per inch (25.4 mm) carpet is also available. Weave density ranges from 6 to 12 rows per inch. This carpet type tends to stretch quite a bit in length and very little in width. Axminster carpets are cut pile face construction and are typically available in either 12 ft (3.6 m) or 13-ft, 2-in (4 m) widths.

The designer is responsible for the project design and management of an assisted living facility. Which document MUST they prepare to explain all the tasks required to complete the project? A. Project Outline. B. Work Plan. C. Bar Chart. D. Design Program.

B. Work Plan. Source: Kennon, Katherine E. Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, The Project Management Process, Programming Phase During preprogramming and planning, the scope of services is prepared for the design contract, resulting in a document called a work plan. The project work plan defines all of the tasks or scope of work and includes clarification of deliverables, schedule, resources, and budget needed through the completion of the project.

If you wanted to determine the durability of a woven textile for contract use which test would be most appropriate? A. Martindale abrasion test B. Wyzenbeek abrasion resistance test C. Taber abrasion test D. Crocking resistance test

B. Wyzenbeek abrasion resistance test Source: Beginnings of Interior Environments, Materials, Furnishings, and Fabrics, Fabric Testing and Safety Codes The Wyzenbeek and Martindale tests are the two methods commonly used to predict wearability. Actual performance is determined by many factors such as fiber content, weaves, finishes, furniture design, maintenance, cleaning, and usage. Durability of an upholstery fabric is a complex interaction (combination) of performance tests that, in addition to abrasion, include seam slippage, pilling, tensile strength, and usage. The Wyzenbeek abrasion resistance test is considered the industry standard abrasion resistance test for durability of woven textile fabrics for heavy duty commercial use. Typical installations that require heavy duty textiles include corporate office, hotel rooms/suites; conference rooms; and dining areas. For the Wyzenbeek test, individual test samples are cut from the warp and weft direction are then rubbed back and forth using an approved fabric as the abradant, for example ACT approved #10 Cotton Duck. The number of double rub cycles achieved before two yarn breaks occur or noticeable wear is observed is recorded as the abrasion rating. The Martindale test uses an oscillating motion. Fabric samples are mounted flat and rubbed in a figure eight like motion using a piece of worsted wool cloth as the abradant. The number of cycles that the fabric can endure before fabric shows objectionable change in appearance (yarn breaks, piling, and holes) is counted. Number of cycles determines abrasion rating. For heavy duty use, look for fabrics tested for 30,000 double rubs and higher using the Wyzenbeek method or 40,000 cycles using the Martindale method. For more information about the tests, including videos, see the Association for Contract Textiles

An interior designer is evaluating various alternatives for a particular building product as they relate to sustainability. The interior designer would most likely use A. an impact assessment B. a life-cycle assessment C. an environmental impact study D. a matrix comparison chart

B. a life-cycle assessment A life-cycle assessment evaluates the environmental impact of using a particular material over its entire useful life, including disposal. It could be used to compare the impacts of two or more materials so the architect could select the most sustainable one.

A client has approached the interior designer to modify her home to accommodate her husband, who, after a car accident, is wheelchair-bound. Which of the following is incorrect regarding the code requirements for an accessible ramp? A. a 1:10 slope if the existing maximum rise does not exceed 3" (75 mm) B. a minimum clear width of 42" (1060 mm) C. a landing length that is a minimum of 60" (1525 mm) D. an overall rise of the ramp run of 30" (760 mm) maximum.

B. a minimum clear width of 42" (1060 mm) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, Section 405 Ramps It is essential to understand both minimums and maximums regarding code-required dimensions. Because the code minimum for clear width is 36" (915 mm), then "a minimum clear width of 42" (1060 mm)" is incorrect because it exceeds the code. All other statements are correct. A ramp must meet BOTH minimum clear width requirements and landings at least as wide as the widest ramp leading to them. 405 Ramps§405.2 Slope, "Ramp runs shall have a running slope greater than 1:20 and not steeper than 1:12." Table 405.2 §405.5 Clear Width, "The clear width of a ramp run shall be 36" (915 mm) minimum. Handrails and handrail supports that are provided on the ramp run shall not project into the required clear width of the ramp run." §405.6 Rise, "The rise for any ramp run shall be 30" (760 mm) maximum." §405.7 Landings, "Ramps shall have landings at the bottom and top of each ramp run. Landings shall comply with Section

In regards to barrier free/universal design all of the following are true about ramps EXCEPT? A. a 1:10 slope is permitted if the maximum rise does not exceed 6" (150 mm) B. a ramp must have a minimum clear width of 42" (1060 mm) C. ramps with rises greater than 6 in (150 mm) or lengths greater than 72 in (1830 mm) must have handrails mounted on both sides with the top of the handrail mounted at 34 in to 38 in (865 mm to 965 mm) above the ramp surface D. landing lengths must be a minimum of 60" (1525 mm)

B. a ramp must have a minimum clear width of 42" (1060 mm) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 405 Ramps A ramp must have a minimum clear width of 36″ (915 mm) and landings at least as wide as the widest ramp leading to them. Refer to 405.5 Clear Width and 405.7.2 Width See also the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design 405.5 Clear Width. The clear width of a ramp run and, where handrails are provided, the clear width between handrails shall be 36 inches (915 mm) minimum. 405.7.2 Width. The landing clear width shall be at least as wide as the widest ramp run leading to the landing.

Which best describes a bubble diagram? A. a trial and error freeform diagram without circulation pathways included B. a way to address issues including lighting and acoustics in the planning phase C. a quick 3-dimensional floor plan developed during the programming phase D. a computer-generated block diagram created in the planning phase

B. a way to address issues including lighting and acoustics in the planning phase Source: Karlen, M., Fleming, R. Space Planning Basics., Planning Methodology, Relationship Diagrams Sustainability considerations should be part of the bubble diagramming process. Goals to consider include maximizing high-quality, diffused daylight, which will allow for spaces to be lit naturally. Acoustic considerations, such as the segregation of quiet and noisy functions, may also be a significant planning factor. Although the purpose and results of bubble diagrams are primarily two-dimensional, some basic three-dimensional issues can, and usually are, dealt with later in the process of arriving at a floor plan solution. While a bubble diagram is a trial-and-error method to quickly explore all the planning options of a given space planning problem, leaving space for circulation (corridors, stairs, aisles, etc.) is a must in the development of workable bubble diagrams. If these travel paths are not incorporated within the diagrams, the results will be of little value when it is time to translate the diagrams into floor plans. While bubble diagrams can be drawn on computer, they are not generated by the computer, and are not blocking diagrams which conform to spatial constraints and which are developed later in the schematic designphase.

Which of the following would NOT be a feature appropriate for aging in place? A. single-lever kitchen and bathroom faucets B. area rugs C. lever handles D. electrical outlets and telephone jack 18 inches from the floor

B. area rugs Source: Null, R. (2013). Universal Design, 1st Edition., What is Universal Design, How to Design for Aging in Place Area rugs create tripping hazards and would not be an appropriate feature to use for an aging person living in their own home. Area rugs should be taped to the floor or, better, eliminated. The point at which flooring materials change should be flush. Criteria for selecting flooring should include slip resistance and some forgiveness for dropped items, or to prevent serious harm in the case of a fall. Pattern or contrast should be gentle and can be used to help guide the eye. There are three main barriers to aging in place: difficulty getting in and out of the home, difficulty getting around the home, and an accessible bathroom. Top universal design features for aging in place: 1. A no-step entry to the home2. Wider doorways and hallways3. A bedroom and bathroom on the same floor4. Walk-in no-threshold showers5. Reachable, rocker-style light switches6. Lever-style door handles and faucets7. Kitchen appliances with automatic shutoff features8. Nonslip flooring, especially in the kitchen and bathroom9. Abundant and even lighting10. Grab bars in bathing areas11. Comfortable furniture and furnishings12. Telephones and doorbells with a low-frequency tone

What is the measure of how well ceilings absorb sound coming over a partition? A. impact insulation class B. articulation class C. sound transmission class D. ceiling attenuation class

B. articulation class Source: Iano, Edward Allen; J. Fundamentals of Building Construction. 2019, Finish ceilings and floors, Finish ceilings, Ceiling Acoustics Articulation class is the measure of how well ceilings absorb sound coming over a partition. Ratings are based on a 9ft ceiling with 5ft partitions. Articulation class is one of 2 methods used to measure speech privacy in open office environments. Higher AC values represent greater acoustical clarity and privacy, with the minimum recommended values falling in the range of 170 to 200.

Which type of veneer match would give your client the desired starburst effect for their reception area? A. book match B. diamond match C. reverse diamond match D. random match

C. reverse diamond match Source: Qpractice Answer Vault, Reverse diamond match A diamond pattern would create a diamond effect. When reversed, it would create a sunburst or starburst like pattern.

An accessible ramp must have landing with a minimum area of 5'x5': A. every 12 lineal feet B. at the top and bottom of the ramp and wherever ramp changes direction C. at the top and bottom of the ramp D. wherever ramp changes direction

B. at the top and bottom of the ramp and wherever ramp changes direction Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, CHAPTER 4: ACCESSIBLE ROUTES, SECTION 405 Ramps Refer to 405.7 Landings and 405.7.4 Change in Direction See also the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design: 405.7 Landings. Ramps shall have landings at the top and the bottom of each ramp run. Landings shall comply with 405.7. 405.7.4 Change in Direction. Ramps that change direction between runs at landings shall have a clear landing 60 inches (1525 mm) minimum by 60 inches (1525 mm) minimum.

In which structural system do large members span between columns with smaller members framed into them? A. one-way pan joist system B. beam-and-girder system C. open-web joist system D. waffle slab system

B. beam-and-girder system In a beam-and-girder system, large members, called girders, span between columns and small beams are framed into them. The girders span shortened distances because they carry the weight of the beams. The beams span the longer distances and are framed into the girders.

Which is the most common method of veneer matching? A. slip matching B. book matching C. warehouse match D. random matching

B. book matching Matching adjacent veneer leaves may be done in three ways. The most common method is book matching in which the veneers are sliced off the log and every other piece is turned over so that adjacent leaves form a symmetrical grain pattern.

bilaterial symmetry A. uses images radiating from a center, such as wheel spokes or ripples around a pebble thrown into water. B. can be divided down its length into similar right and left halves aling only one plane C. established when both sides of the composition are exactly equal. Formal balance D. occurs when you have different visual images on either side of a design, and yet the image still seems balanced.

B. can be divided down its length into similar right and left halves aling only one plane

The absorption of material is defined by the ratio of the sound intensity absorbed by the material to the total intensity reaching the material. This is called the: A. noise criteria B. coefficient of absorption C. sound absorption average D. sound transmission

B. coefficient of absorption Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Acoustics, Sound Absorption, Fundamentals Sound absorption is used to control unwanted sound reflections (noise), improve speech privacy, and decrease or increase reverberation. Materials with a coefficient of absorption below 0.2 are reflective. Materials with a coefficient of absorption above 0.2 are sound absorbing.

How can the project manager monitor the original project fee to ensure that the project is staying on budget? A. require timely invoicing by consultants and subcontractors B. compare weekly time sheets with the original estimate C. use a Gantt chart D. use the critical path method to ensure the project is on budget

B. compare weekly time sheets with the original estimate By monitoring time sheets weekly, the project manager can compare the actual hours (or fees) expended against the budgeted time (or fees) and take corrective action if actual time exceeds budgeted time.

Midway into a project, the interior designer realizes they have forgotten to order the fabric needed for the guest room draperies. Since time is critical what is the best way to expedite the order? A. contact the vendor and place the order via the phone B. contact the vendor to let them know of your challenges and immediately issue a purchase order C. contact the vendor, place the order via the phone and ask for an acknowledgment D. change the draperies to a pre-fabricated product that can be delivered in time to complete the project

B. contact the vendor to let them know of your challenges and immediately issue a purchase order Source: Piotrowski, Christine M. Professional Practice for Interior Designers., Contract Administration: Construction and Order Processing; Purchase Orders; Expediting The best solution would be to contact the vendor to check stock, make them aware of the situation, and immediately issue a Purchase Order. In no case should telephone orders be made because of the potential for mistakes, misunderstandings, and misinterpretations. Most vendors do not even accept telephone orders unless followed by written purchase orders.

All of the following are components of the programming report EXCEPT? A. code requirements B. design concept C. goals and objectives D. executive summary

B. design concept Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Communication Methods, Communicating the Program All but a design concept are part of a programming report, which focuses on the functional solutions to the design problem and includes: - title page - introduction - executive summary - goals and objectives of report - summary of space needs - space adjacencies - code requirements - analysis of existing space - budget and schedule requirements - programming concepts - appendices Design concepts are created after all of this information has been gathered and analyzed. A design concept represents the physical solution to functional requirements.

Which of the following is the most accurate means for estimating project costs? A. contingency B. detailed quantity takeoff C. cost per square foot D. parameter

B. detailed quantity takeoff Detailed quantity takeoffs are the most precise method for determining budget. It is developed by counting actual quantities of materials and furnishings and multiplying these quantities by firm, quoted costs. Such detailed estimates cannot be done until late in the design and construction document phase of a project.

While working on the design for a high-end conference room, which drawing type in the construction documents would be used to indicated the vertical extents of millwork as well as the configuration of fabric panels located above the millwork? A. detail drawing B. elevation C. enlarged floor plan D. section

B. elevation Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings, Elevations Elevations are drawn for interior design projects to indicate the configuration and finish of wall surfaces—something that is difficult, if not impossible, to do with a plan drawing. Elevations are also used to show the vertical dimensions and design of millwork and other freestanding construction.

One of the primary purposes of prototype sketch is? A. to quickly communicate to the client the layout of each space B. to see how much square footage each function or space will potentially take up in the finished design C. a visual aid to be used in an informal design presentation D. to determine the final furniture layout for each space or room

B. to see how much square footage each function or space will potentially take up in the finished design

Convergent photogrammetry A. entails superimposing one photograph of a building over another, creating an image that can easily be converted into a 3-D depiction. This process requires special software and equipment. B. entails using photographs from different angles to create a three-dimensional model. This process takes a long time but is relatively inexpensive. C. is a technique for aggregating digital photographs into a single, three-dimensional image, using sophisticated computer programs. D. is a technique for producing scalable images of building façades.

B. entails using photographs from different angles to create a three-dimensional model. This process takes a long time but is relatively inexpensive.

Using a manufacturer's wallcovering estimating chart is advisable when... A. when you do not know the width or pattern repeat of the material. B. estimating quantities of material needed for simple box shaped spaces. C. estimating complex, irregularly shaped room material quantities. D. proposing the use of materials with large complex pattern repeats.

B. estimating quantities of material needed for simple box shaped spaces. Source: Kennon, K. E. (07/2018). Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Wall and Window Finishes, Wallcoverings, Estimating Wallcoverings Estimating the amount of wallcovering required for a project can be complex. Manufacturer's charts in wallpaper books can be used to estimate the amount of wallpaper required for average, box-shaped rooms. Most manufacturers base estimates on 30 square feet (2.8 square meters) coverage per single roll; as a standard roll is 36 square feet (3.3 square meters), this allows extra for normal cutting and matching. Square footage estimates work for most wall surfaces. The amount needed is determined by the width of the wallpaper and the pattern repeat. It is advisable to have a professional paperhanger do the estimate for complex rooms. Commercial wallcoverings are usually estimated by the strip method, or by the square foot method. The strip method involves calculating how many actual strips of wallpaper will be used, a difficult and time-consuming process. Professional wallpaper hangers use the strip method in rooms with broken up wall space or cathedral ceilings, and in large commercial spaces. The placement of patterns and seams for large, complicated pattern repeats requires careful planning. Extra material should be ordered to allow for matching.

Which of the following devices would be used to prevent the spread of smoke during a fire? A. smoke damper B. fire damper C. fire suppression detector D. ionization detector

B. fire damper - are used to restrict and PREVENT the spread of fire and smoke

What is the difference between first-party and third-party claims of sustainability? A. first-party claims use an industry-based standard to which the product strives and allow manufacturers to supply their research to testing organizations to verify that products meet defined standards. B. first-party claims use the manufacturer's own research for certification, while third-party uses independent testing organizations to substantiate that materials or products meet defined national or international standards. C. first-party claims use independent testing organizations to verify sustainability claims, while third-party uses the manufacturer's own research to confirm that materials or products meet defined national or international standards. D. first-party claims allow the manufacturer to supply the information to an independent testing organization that verifies that the material or product meets or exceeds the defined national or international standard.

B. first-party claims use the manufacturer's own research for certification, while third-party uses independent testing organizations to substantiate that materials or products meet defined national or international standards. Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 3rd Edition ePDF for QPractice., Green Materials, Product Certification The correct answer is that first-party claims use the manufacturer's research for certification. In contrast, third-party claims use independent testing organizations to substantiate that materials or products meet defined national or international standards. First-party material eco-friendly labels are "self-declared" labels. A company establishes its standards and states the product's environmental performance. The manufacturer supplies information for certification. First-party material eco-friendly labels require no external testing or verification. The designer must carefully evaluate these labels for veracity. Often they are corporate marketing strategies. Third-party certification is considered the leadership standard for product certification. Independent third-party certification substantiates that materials or products meet defined national or international (ISO, ANSI, ASTM) standard criteria or other manufacturers' claims such as energy consumption, air and water emissions, content, processing, and other attributes that impact the environment. The specifics of the standards vary by the certification program, and not all certifications are equal. It is vital to look for established, well-respected and recognized third-party certifications. Third-party certification can be specific to a product or industry relative to a particular concern, a single attribute certification, or based on life-cycle factors for multi-attribute certification. Understanding the standards and claims the certification supports and how it applies to the specific application is necessary.

Which of the following is the most important consideration when selecting drapery for public residential application? A. durability B. flammability C. resistance to fading D. heat gain and heat loss

B. flammability Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition., Finish and Furniture Selection When selecting drapery for commercial, institutional and public residential application, one of the most important considerations is flammability. This takes precedence over other criteria such as durability, fading resistance and style. Vertical Flame Testsare generally required for vertical treatments such as curtains, draperies, window shades, large wall hangings or tapestries, and plastic films used for decorative purposes. The Vertical Flame Tests include the following: NFPA 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films ASTM D6413, Standard Test Method for Flame Resistance of Textiles (Vertical Test)

Which cabinet door and drawer construction type is most problematic in a space where there is a constant variation in humidity? A. lipped overlay B. flush construction C. reveal overlay D. none of these, humidity will affect all styles the same

B. flush construction In flush construction the face of the drawer or door is installed flush with the face frame. Extra care and expense are required to fit and align the doors and drawers within the frame. In many cases, the doors and drawers may sag, resulting in non-uniform spacing between fronts and causing some doors and drawers to "stick" in the frame. This problem is worsened by humidity causing the continual swelling and shrinking of the wood.

The units used for the measurement and description of the brightness of a direct glare source are A. foot candles B. foot lamberts C. candela per square meter D. lumens

B. foot lamberts Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Glossary, Foot lamberts Foot lamberts describe brightness either reflected or transmitted from a source or surface (luminance), and account for the projected area (i.e., only the area that you see when looking at the source). It is measured in candela per square meter.

What determines the maximum travel distance? A. number of exits B. furthest point of the tenant space to an exit C. number of sprinklers D. entry to the exit

B. furthest point of the tenant space to an exit Source: 2018 International Building Code, CHAPTER 10 MEANS OF EGRESS 2018 IBC, Subsection 1017.3 Measurement. Exit access travel distance shall be measured from the most remote point of each room, area, or space along the natural and unobstructed path of horizontal and vertical egress travel to the entrance to an exit.

BIFMA

Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association

Which type of specifications used by most design firms, are pre written specifications that cover nearly all types of products, methods of installation, and other variables that relate to a specific product or construction activity? A. industry specifications and reference specifications B. guide specifications and Master specifications C. base-bid specifications D. guide specifications and reference specifications

B. guide specifications and Master specifications Because it is difficult to write a complete, accurate, up-to-date specification of any type and most projects require many specifications, the majority of offices use Master specifications. Master specifications or guide specifications are pre-written specifications that cover nearly all types of products, method of installation, and other variables that relate to a specific product or construction activity.

When determining a client's furniture and equipment needs a designer will do all of the following EXCEPT? A. discuss the project budget B. have the client create a list of all the furniture and equipment that they would like to re-use in the new project C. inventory existing furniture and equipment D. conduct a thorough interview to determine client's specific needs

B. have the client create a list of all the furniture and equipment that they would like to re-use in the new project Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, The Project Management Process, Phases of an Interior Design Project It is the interior designer's job - not the client's - to make a list of what furniture and equipment will be used in the new project. However this may also be considered an ancillary or additional service for which additional fees are due, according to most standard contracts, see design project phases.

A designer is working on a south Florida restaurant that includes an outdoor eating area. The client would like to create an ambient mood with lighting that can be dimmed. Which type of lighting system would best accomplish the client's goals and stay within the .93 watts per square foot lighting budget? A. compact fluorescent fixtures on a dimmer B. high-output LED fixtures on dimmer C. incandescent fixtures on a dimmer D. adjustable recessed halogen lighting with dimmer

B. high-output LED fixtures on dimmer Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Lighting Systems, Selecting Light Sources A high-output LED system would be the best choice because it is the most energy efficient of the options listed, does not output much heat and is dimmable.

During space planning, the designer must locate a 36-inch (915 mm) door along the main parallel corridor that leads into another room. Limited space is available, and the door will have a latch only, with no closer. To provide for accessibility and minimize the width of the corridor, which of the following door orientations and approach directions would best meet the criteria? A. front approach; door swings into room B. hinge side approach; door swings into room C. latch side approach; door swings into corridor D. front approach; door swings into corridor

B. hinge side approach; door swings into room Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, Table and Figure 404.2.3.2 Maneuvering Clearances at Manual Swinging Doors and Gates

All of the following are true about detail drawings except? A. show complex information B. if the project is negotiated, the details must be very complete and fully describe the extent of the work so the client will get a valid cost quote C. can include construction elements such as wall types, doors, glazing, ceilings, millwork, stairways, flooring and any other special construction D. typically drawn at a large scale of 1"= 1'-0" (1:10) or larger

B. if the project is negotiated, the details must be very complete and fully describe the extent of the work so the client will get a valid cost quote Detail drawings may include construction elements such as wall types, doors, glazing, ceilings, millwork, stairways, flooring and any other special construction. The number of details depend on the size and complexity of the project and whether the job is being bid or negotiated. If the project is competitively bid, the details must be very complete and fully describe the extent of the work so the client will get a valid cost quote. On smaller, negotiated contract jobs where the majority of details are somewhat standard; there may be fewer details because some of the final decisions may be made during construction.

In order to reduce fees to be competitive in a local market, an interior designer should first consider reducing A. capital expenses B. indirect labor cost C. profit D. salary rates

B. indirect labor cost Indirect labor (not directly associated with the production of goods and services) accounts for the largest percentage of overhead in a design firm. Efforts should be made to reduce the amount and cost of time spent that is not billable to the client. Capital expenses typically do not account for a large percentage of overhead costs and they can be deferred to a latter time if necessary. Although reducing the percentage of profit is an often-used method to reduce fees from the client's point of view, profit should remain the same in order to maintain a viable business. Salaries are already set and cutting an employee's pay is generally not an option in a professional business.

Which of the following is not part of interior design delivery service? A. removal of all cartoning and packaging materials B. installation C. checking in the merchandise at the local warehouse from the freight company truck and inspecting items for damage D. simple assembly of goods

B. installation Although the two terms may seem like the same thing, in reality they are not. Delivery means taking the tangible goods to the job site and placing them in their correct location. Installation means that some additional services are involved in the delivery process, such as assembly or construction of the products. An area rug is delivered to the site and placed where the interior designer has specified. Wall to wall carpet must be installed to complete the job.

What building material can be used along the bottom of a door to prevent the passage of fire, heat and smoke? A. astragal B. intumescent C. flitch D. closer

B. intumescent Another type of extinguishing agent is actually a building material and acts passively in reaction to a fire. Intumescent materials respond to fire by expanding rapidly, insulating the surfaces they protect by filling the gaps to prevent the passage of fire, heat and smoke. For example, a strip of intumescent material placed along the edge of one of a pair of fire doors will expand and seal the crack, substituting for an astragal (molding) that would otherwise be required

All of the following are true about a low voltage lamp EXCEPT? A. are another class of incandescent lamps B. is a semiconductor device that uses solid-state electronics to create light C. provide better beam control than a standard incandescent lamp D. typically operate at 12V

B. is a semiconductor device that uses solid-state electronics to create light Source: Designing With Light: The Art, Science and Practice of Architectural Lighting Design, Lamps Not all low voltage lamps are LEDs. Some incandescent and halogen lamps are designed to operate at a reduced voltage and are also called low voltage lamps. These lamps operate at a lower voltage than 120V, usually 12V. Because the filaments are thicker, they are also more compact, resulting in smaller lamps and better beam control lamps. A transformer is required to step down the line voltage. This results in a bulkier luminaire and higher initial cost. One type of low voltage lamp, a light-emitting diode (LED), is a semiconductor device that uses solid-state lighting that includes organic light-emitting diodes and light-emitting polymers.

When using wood flooring, what could be done during installation to provide a more resilient floor that is more comfortable underfoot and allows for extra moisture to escape? A. float floor instead of nailing or gluing to subfloor B. lay the floor on wood sleepers C. use a plywood or particleboard subfloor D. use a underlayer of polyethylene film

B. lay the floor on wood sleepers Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Floor Finishes, Wood and Bamboo Flooring, Installation Solid wood floors react to the dryness of heated buildings by contracting, leaving gaps between the planks. When the humidity returns with warm weather, the planks expand and the gaps disappear. Expansion gaps are left where the wood floor meets the wall to accommodate these dimensional changes. Due to concerns about moisture, solid wood strip and plank floors are usually installed only on wooden subfloors at or above grade level. Both subfloors and the finished layer of wood should be checked for moisture content before installation. Solid wood flooring is installed over a plywood subfloor or on wooden sleepers. This method of installation not only gives a more resilient floor that is more comfortable underfoot, but it also provides an air space so any excess moisture can escape. Tongue-and-groove wood floor strips or planks are blind nailed or stapled; butt-jointed flooring is face nailed. An underlayment, typically exterior-grade plywood, may be required for installation on a concrete slab.

What information is missing from this drawing that the designer needs in order to be sure that the signage will meet building codes? A. the height of the lettering - uppercase or lowercase lettering can be used, height of lettering must range between 5/8" - 3" (16 mm - 75 mm) B. lettering height - this should be determined by the viewing distance and can range from 5/8" (16 mm) and 2" (51 mm) C. the font is not suitable - a mix of uppercase and lowercase lettering in a sans-serif typeface should be used D. the drawing is fine - only uppercase lettering may be used

B. lettering height - this should be determined by the viewing distance and can range from 5/8" (16 mm) and 2" (51 mm) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 703 Signs This sign has raised characters. Refer to A117.1 703.3 Raised Characters, and 2009 ICC A117.1 - FIG. 703.3.5 CHARACTER HEIGHT, 703.3.1 General, and 703.3.5 Character Height, similar to ADA703.2 Raised Characters:Raised characters shall comply with 703.2 and shall be duplicated in braille complying with 703.3. 703.2.5 Character Height. Character height measured vertically from the baseline of the character shall be 5/8 inch (16 mm) minimum and 2 inches (51 mm) maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter "I". EXCEPTION: Where visual characters comply with 703.2 and are accompanied by braille complying with 703.3, they shall not be required to comply with 703.5.2 through 703.5.9.

Control of IAQ is dependent upon what? A. providing adequate untreated outside air to the HVAC systems. B. limiting pollution sources and on proper ventilation. C. rapid replacement of inside air due to building odors. D. controlling moisture and humidity inside the building.

B. limiting pollution sources and on proper ventilation. Source: Corky, B. (2015). Building Systems for Interior Designers., Indoor Air Quality, Ventilation and Moisture Control Control of indoor air quality (IAQ) depends on limiting pollution sources and on proper ventilation.

An office tenant space design currently meets the maximum occupancy load allowed on the floor due to the egress counts provided by the exit widths and stairs of the existing building. The client would like to adjust the design to add a training room in the space. What must be done to ensure the occupant load does not grow to exceed the maximum allowed? A. keep the area of the training room below 10% of the total area so it can be classified as an incidental use area. B. make sure the total area of the training room does not exceed an occupant load of 49. C. keep the area of the training room below 10% of the total area so it can be classified as an accessory occupancy. D. provide a sprinkler system within the training room and separate the space with a smoke barrier.

B. make sure the total area of the training room does not exceed an occupant load of 49. Source: 2018 International Building Code, Table 1004.5 Maximum Floor Area Allowances Per Occupant The IBC And NFPA codes use occupancy of 50 people or more as the cutoff point for assembly occupancies. In many cases, the codes will allow any assembly-type use with an occupant load less than 50 to be considered as the same occupancy type that it serves. So a training room with a load of less than 50 in a business occupancy, is also classified as a business. If the training room served 50 or more occupants it would have to be reclassified as an Assembly Occupancy. This would change its load factor from 150 gross to 15 net which would increase the occupant load of the space.

What would a designer request from the contractor to learn about product safety information to include the health effects of a material, first aid, safe storage, disposal guidelines, protective equipment required for handling, and procedures for handling leaks and spills? A. OSHA report B. materials safety data sheet C. manufacturers' safety data sheet D. manufacturers' safety report

B. materials safety data sheet The interior designer should request that the contractor submit material safety data sheets for all products that may contain hazardous materials. A material safety data sheet (MSDS) is a listing of product safety information prepared by the manufacturer and marketers of products containing toxic chemicals. An MSDS is required to list the contents of and all health effects of the material, first aid, safe storage and disposal guidelines, protective equipment required of handling, and procedures for handling leaks and spills. It is intended for use by employers and emergency responders, rather than by consumers.

Which symbol represents a quadruplex outlet? A B C D

C. Source: Kilmer, Rosemary. Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 3rd Edition, Lighting: Reflected Ceiling and Electrical Plans, Common Electrical Symbols A quadruplex receptacle is represented by 2 perpendicular lines crossing through a standard duplex symbol.

Challenges with acoustic separation are most often caused by? A. smooth ceiling finishes B. mechanical and electrical services C. hard surface flooring D. lack of sound batting

B. mechanical and electrical services Mechanical and electrical services often pose problems with maintaining acoustic separation, especially in offices spaces where ducts, convectors and piping run continuously along an exterior wall while partitions intersect the exterior wall at regular intervals. Special detailing or construction may be required to create a continuous sound seal around the floor, around the ceiling, above the ceiling and along the perimeter wall. For example, the cracks between the wallboard and all pipe and duct penetrations must be sealed with acoustic sealant.

Which of the following drawing is most synonymous with a parti diagram? A. oblique drawing B. napkin sketch C. prototype sketch D. block diagram

B. napkin sketch Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Glossary, parti diagram A parti is usually a sketch, diagram, drawing, doodle, or some other graphic that represents the direction, concept, or theme of a design. It can be very rough; the proverbial back of a napkin sketch.

What is the LEAST important part of a project manager's job? A. staying current with the client's opinion of the progress of the project B. organizing the layout of the construction drawings C. keeping notes on daily decisions and meetings D. planning job tasks for the project staff on a weekly basis

B. organizing the layout of the construction drawings Although on small projects the project manager may organize drawing layout, this is usually the task of the job captain or whoever is in charge of preparing the drawings. The other three choices are more commonly activities of the project manager.

What method enables the designer and owner to evaluate the cost implication of each building component and to make decisions concerning both quantity and quality that might meet the original budget estimate? A. parameter B. parameter and matrix costing C. life cycle cost analysis D. cost indexing

B. parameter and matrix costing As the interior designer and client have a better idea of the exact scope of the work, the budget can be refined by the parameter method, which involves an expanded itemization of construction quantities and furnishings and assignment of unit costs to these quantities. For example, floor finishes can be broken down into carpeting, vinyl tile, wood-strip flooring and so forth. The areas are multiplied by an estimated cost per square foot, and the total budget for flooring is developed. With this type of budgeting, it's possible to evaluate the cost implication of each building component and to make decisions concerning quantity and quality that meet the original budget estimate. Another way to compare and evaluate alternative construction components is matrix costing, a technique in which a matrix is drawn with various alternatives and the individual elements that combine to make up the total cost of the alternatives.

While meeting with clients you are explaining your concept and theme for their new restaurant. Which of the following type of drawings would be the BEST to use to quickly communicate the essence of your design? A. detail B. parti C. elevation D. prototype sketch

B. parti Source: Qpractice Answer Vault, Prototype Sketch and Parti Diagram A parti is usually a sketch, diagram, drawing, doodle, or some other graphic that represents the direction, concept, or theme of a design. It can be very rough; the proverbial back of a napkin sketch. A prototype sketch is more similar to a test fit, or simplified version of the concept, drawn to scale to see if the planned arrangement of spaces and furniture work within the building constraints.

Which tools are important aspects of examining an existing building during the programming and analysis phase of a project? A. post occupancy interviews, site photographs, bubble diagrams, construction plans B. precedent studies, site photographs, matrices, employee interviews C. employee interviews, matrices, precedent studies, furniture schedules D. bubble diagram, construction plans, site photographs, post occupancy interviews

B. precedent studies, site photographs, matrices, employee interviews

If a designer is working on a project with a short completion date what might affect their furniture selections for the project? A. project location B. production time C. number of team members assigned to project D. project size

B. production time The time it takes to produce custom furniture or secure desired furniture will impact what selections can be made and used on a project with a short turnaround time.

At what stage in the design process should views be considered and incorporated into the design process? A. contract documents B. programming C. pre-design D. design development

B. programming

In the drawing below, what does the hatched region represent? A. Exit discharge B. Public way C. Exit D. Emergency exit

B. public way

A budget is always based and influenced by what three items? A. time, quantity, money B. quantity, quality, money C. progress, quality, money D. time, fee, quality

B. quantity, quality, money

Which of the following fabrics would be a poor choice to use for upholstery in a hotel atrium? A. nylon B. rayon C. wool D. cotton

B. rayon Source: Binggeli, C. Interior Graphic Standards: Student Edition, Equipment and Furnishings, Furnishings, Natural Fibers Rayon is a regenerated cellulosic fiber. It has very poor resistance to sunlight and poor resiliency. It has high absorbency, low resistance to water and moisture. It is flammable, ignites upon contact, and continues to burn like paper. It is seldom used for upholstery.

According to standard drawing convention, how would a set of construction drawings produced by an interior designer be organized? A. title and index sheet, fire protection drawings, mechanical, electrical, floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, details B. title and index sheet, floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, details, mechanical drawings, electrical drawings, fire protection drawings C. title and index sheet, architectural, electrical, fire protection, interiors, mechanical, plumbing, structural D. title and index sheet, architectural, interiors, mechanical, electrical, structural, plumbing, fire protection

B. title and index sheet, floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, details, mechanical drawings, electrical drawings, fire protection drawings For a set of construction drawings created by an interior designer the drawings are usually organized in the following sequence: - title and index sheet - floor plans - reflected ceiling plans - elevations - details - mechanical drawings - electrical drawings - fire protection drawings

The design of many beach house interiors have a similar design and aesthetic. This is a primarily a result of what type of social and cultural influence? A. economic conditions B. regionalism C. cultural attitudes D. symbolism

B. regionalism Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Social & Cultural Influences The availability of building materials, the climate, and culture, are some of the contextual influences behind the differences in buildings across the world. Regionalism is related to the concept of vernacular architecture, which refers to buildings by local trades. Sometimes referred to as 'architecture without architects', this style of building develops over time to become more efficient and more performative in its context. Regionalism in architecture is about the context and customs of making buildings in a particular region, designed to perform based upon specific knowledge of the climate, geology, geography, and topography. Regional architecture follows developments in vernacular architecture, while incorporating modern building materials and technologies. Regionalism in interior design also reflects the local geographic area, similar to the concept of vernacular. A similar design and aesthetic style results from common features, materials and natural inspiration found in this type of region. These may be influenced by the local climate, culture, environment and materials. Whether a large vacation home or a small fishing shack, you can typically find relaxing blues and greens reflecting the tones of the water, nautical inspirations such as rope, anchor designs or beautiful aging wood exposed to the elements.

You have contracted with a custom woodworker to create a conference table with a fine quality wood finish that shows minimal grain. Which veneer cut would result in the least veneer waste, but be the least desirable to use for the table? A. quarter slicing B. rotary slicing C. plain slicing D. rift slicing

B. rotary slicing Source: Qpractice Answer Vault, Wood Veneer With rotary slicing, the log is mounted on a lathe and turned against a knife, which peels off a continuous layer of veneer. This produces a very pronounced grain pattern that is often undesirable in fine quality wood finishes, although it does produce the most veneer with the least waste.

Which element of design would best enable a designer to create either an intimate feeling or give the space monumental character? A. proportion B. scale C. light D. space

B. scale Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Design Concepts & Programming, ELEMENTS OF DESIGN There are no definite rules for scale relationships. The judgment of scale is always complex because of the multitude of objects within a space, the form of the space itself, and the way the perception of objects and spaces is affected by color, value, texture, light, repetition and other factors. The "correct" scale is also dependent on the design intent. Scale can be used to gives spaces an intimate feeling or a monumental character. It can be used to provide emphasis and contrast or to harmonize otherwise diverse forms.

Bubble diagrams are most often part of which design phase? A. programming B. schematic C. design development D. pre-design

B. schematic preliminary conceptual, spatial, and technical design of project includes preliminary space planning often using relationship diagrams, matrices, bubble diagrams, blocking diagrams, stacking and fit plans, as well as initial furnishing, fixtures, and equipment deisgn/layout

When it comes to installation of the final FF&E which of the following is NOT a responsibility of the client? A. any costs incurred by the contractor due to the owner's failure to conform to the schedule or due to other delays caused by the owner B. secure and post the certificate of occupancy C. provide adequate facilities for the delivery, unloading, staging, and storage of furniture, fixtures and equipment D. security against loss or damage to the furniture and fixtures stored at the site between the dates of delivery and final acceptance by the owner

B. secure and post the certificate of occupancy Source: Kennon, Katherine, E. and Sharon K. Harmon. The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., CODE OFFICIALS AND THE CODE PROCESS All of these are responsibilities of the client during the final FF&E installation except posting the certificate of occupancy. The Certificate of Occupancy (CO) is issued by the building department (part of the permit process originally paid for by the contractor).

Which of the following would NOT be a responsibility of the project manager? A. write and distribute addenda B. select and award the winning bid C. scheduling consultants D. participate in bidding or negotiations

B. select and award the winning bid Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Contract Documents and Specifications, Competitive Bidding Selecting the final bid is the owner/client's final choice. The designer may advise and assist, but does not make the final selection.

What elements of design best convey the powerful symbolic or emotional qualities which are affected and vary greatly depending on one's culture? A. texture and scale B. shape and color C. scale and shape D. color and texture

B. shape and color Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Elements of Design, Form, Shape, Color, The Psychology of Color Shape conveys powerful symbolic or emotional qualities. The shape of a cross or the outline of an apple, for example, are not just abstract forms but carry definite meanings for some people. That meaning can vary greatly depending on the culture, background, and experience of the viewer. In addition to physical effects on the eye and brain, color conveys many symbolic and associative meanings. For example, in many cultures red means danger or stop; whereas in other cultures it is symbolic of luck, joy, and prosperity.

All are true about pictogram signage except? A. signs must have a non-glare finish B. signs must be at least 12" (300 mm) wide C. text description must be placed directly below the pictogram D. pictograms must be at least 6" (150 mm) high

B. signs must be at least 12" (300 mm) wide Source: 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 703 Signs While there are many requirements for the different elements of signage, there is not one for the overall size of a sign. ADA 703.6.1 Pictogram Field. Pictograms shall have a field height of 6 inches (150 mm) minimum. Characters and braille shall not be located in the pictogram field. Figure 703.6.1 Pictogram Field 703.6.2 Finish and Contrast. Pictograms and their field shall have a non-glare finish. Pictograms shall contrast with their field with either a light pictogram on a dark field or a dark pictogram on a light field. 703.6.3 Text Descriptors. Pictograms shall have text descriptors located directly below the pictogram field. Text descriptors shall comply with 703.2, 703.3 and 703.4.

HVAC stands for: A. Humidity, Ventilation, and Air Control B. High Velocity Air Control C. Heating, Ventilation, And Cooling D. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning

D. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning A designer will coordinate placement of equipment for Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning with the Mechanical Engineer.

The designer is selecting the signage for all new meeting rooms for the conference center of a hotel renovation project. According to the ADA, which of the following signs would not be compliant? A. signs with black upper case san serif font on a matte cream background B. signs with black upper and lower case lettering that is 2" (50.8 mm) high on a matte gold background C. signs with black lettering in a sans serif font that range in height from 5/8" (15.88 mm) to 2" (50.8 mm) h D. signs with white upper case lettering that is 1" (25.4 mm) high on a matte black background

B. signs with black upper and lower case lettering that is 2" (50.8 mm) high on a matte gold background Source: 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, Chapter 2: Scoping Requirements , 216 Signs Not all signage is required to be compliant. The scoping provisions list which sign types for which spaces are required to be accessible. The ADA requires that identification, directional, and informational signs meet 703. Also permanent rooms and spaces must be identified with signs having lettering from 5/8" to 2″ (16 mm to 51 mm) high, depending on the viewing distance. 703.2.2 Case. Characters shall be uppercase. Lettering must be uppercase, in sans serif or simple serif type accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. If pictograms are used, they must be at least 6 in (150 mm) high and be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description, placed directly below the pictogram. Signs must have an eggshell, matte, or other non glare finish with characters and symbols contrast with the background.

Which of the following has the MOST influence on the scheduling of a design project? A. number of design office staff B. size and complexity of project C. time necessary for regulatory review D. design methodology

B. size and complexity of project In most cases the size and complexity of a project have the most influence on the scheduling of a design project. The number of design office staff has less influence on the scheduling and even with a large staff, there is a point of beyond which more people will not move the project along more quickly. The time required for regulatory review usually does not vary, and the rest of the schedule is set to work around it. The method of design does not have as much influence on scheduling as does the size and complexity of the project.

Political conditions, economic conditions, cultural attitudes, symbolism and regionalism are all? A. existing conditions irrelevant to the design solution B. social and cultural beliefs that often influence interior design C. the tenets upon which the Maslow Theory of Hierarchy of Needs is based D. physiological and social influences

B. social and cultural beliefs that often influence interior design Source: Ballast, D. K., FAIA, 9425, N. N. PDF - Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam, eTextbook., Developing Design Concepts, Social and Cultural Influences The end result of architecture and interior design is a response to an existing set of conditions. These conditions may be purely functional in nature, or they may also reflect in varying degrees the social, political, and economic climate (and the climate itself) Political conditions, economic conditions, cultural attitudes, symbolism, and regionalism are all social and cultural beliefs that often influence interior design.

In working with an electrical engineer on a project, what information would the designer most likely put on the interior design power plan? A. speaker locations B. switch locations C. dedicated outlets D. conduit sizing

B. switch locations Because the interior designer coordinates switch locations with furniture placement, they are the best answer. The interior designer does not determine conduit size, and is not responsible for which outlets must be dedicated outlets. Speaker locations would be shown on the reflected ceiling plan.

Which type of information about a multipurpose room in an assisted living facility would be LEAST important for the interior designer to give to the mechanical engineer? A. a copy of the reflected ceiling plan B. the ages of the residents in the apartment building C.. an estimate of the number of people using the room D. the types of activities that commonly occur in the space

B. the ages of the residents in the apartment building Source: 2018 International Building Code, CHAPTER 3 USE AND OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION Activity and number of people would affect the heat generated in the room and how much ventilation would be needed, both of which the mechanical engineer would have to design for. The reflected ceiling plan would tell the engineer what type of ceiling was planned and give an idea of the heat load generated by the lights. As long as the engineer knew the occupancy classification was Residential, Group R-4 for the purpose of assisted living, the exact age is of little concern.

Who must have insurance to cover work stored off the job site or in transit to the job site? A. the owner B. the contractor C. the owner, contractor and interior designer are equally responsible D. the contractor and the interior designer

B. the contractor Source: AIA Document A201 — 2017, Insurance, Stored Materials, 9.3.2 The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction require that the contractor carry insurance that will protect from a variety of claim types. The contractor must carry insurance for any portion of the work that is stored off the job site or in transit to the job site: "shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site"

What is the efficiency factor of a single leased space? A. the space required to accommodate the tenant's specific functions B. the ratio of the net area or net assignable area to the usable area C. the rentable area divided by the useable area D. the amount of floor area needed by one person to function in the space

B. the ratio of the net area or net assignable area to the usable area Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Determining Total Client Occupant Area An efficiency factor is simply the mathematical ratio between one area and another. For a single leased space, the interior layout efficiency is the ratio of the net area (or net assignable area) to the usable area or net/usable.

During installation, who is ultimately responsible for product assembly? A. the contractor B. the vendor or seller of the goods C. the warehouse personnel D. the interior designer

B. the vendor or seller of the goods The vendor is responsible for delivery and installation. Installation also includes testing if required by the contract documents.

Planning requires setting requirements in which three critical areas? A. time, quality, and quantity B. time, fees, and quality C. scheduling, fees, and quantity D. scheduling, time, and fees

B. time, fees, and quality The project manager should be involved, from the initial determination of project scope and estimation of fees to the final follow-up. Planning involves setting requirements in three critical areas: time, fees, and quality.

The practice of finding acceptable substitutions to higher-cost design concepts in order to provide quality outcomes at lower costs is? A. a base bid specification or equal specification B. value engineering C. integrated project delivery D. competitive bidding

B. value engineering Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, The Project Management Process, Value Engineering Value engineering is a method of analyzing and specifying products and design solutions based on cost effectiveness. The key concept in this strategy is to find acceptable substitutions to higher-cost design concepts in order to provide quality outcomes at lower costs.

You are designing a small project that measures 20′ (6096 mm) x 16′ (4877 mm). The total FF&E budget is $18,000. You have spent $15,000 for furniture and equipment and $1900.00 for painting and wall coverings (installed). How much per yard can you spend on carpet that is 12′ (3658 mm) wide? A. $15.45 B. $30.90 C. $25.50 D. $12.75

C. $25.50 Subtract the amount spent from the total budget to get the budget remaining$18,000 - $16,900 = $1,100. Calculate linear feet of carpet needed to cover 20 x 16 space16 + 16 = 32 linear feet (2 strips of 12′ wide carpet 16′ long). Multiply linear feet by 12 to get total square feet needed then divide by 9 (9 square feet per square yard)32 linear feet x 12 (12′ wide carpet roll goods) = 384 sq feet divided by 9 = 42.6 sq ydsRound up to 43 square yards — carpet sold per square yard price Divide budget available by sq yds.$1100 divided by 43 square yards = 25.58You can spend up to $25.58 per square yard, so $25.50 is the best answer.

When would be most appropriate for an interior designer to use the prefix letter 'I' when numbering a set of construction drawings? A. 'I' should always be used for all interior design sheets in a drawing set B. 'I' should never be used; the letter 'A' should always be used for any sheets pertaining to either architectural or interior design C. 'I' should be used for interior design sheets when an architect's drawings are included as part of the drawing set 'D. I' should be used for small interior design projects only

C. 'I' should be used for interior design sheets when an architect's drawings are included as part of the drawing set Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings Typically the prefix 'A' is most commonly used for either Architectural or Interior Design sheets, regardless of the size of project. 'I' is most commonly used when architectural drawings are also included in a drawing set, as a means to easily distinguish between architectural and interiors work.

In planning a design with wood paneling, ceiling coffers, and wainscoting for a restaurant, what percentage of wall and ceiling area cannot be exceeded? A. 15% B. 20% C. 10% D. 25%

C. 10% Source: 2018 International Building Code, CHAPTER 8 INTERIOR FINISHES Per 803.1.2 Interior wall and ceiling finish materials tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL723: Decorative moldings, trim, chair rail or wainscoting shall have a minimum Class C flame spread and smoke-developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723, as described in Section 803.1.2. and cannot exceed 10% of the wall or ceiling area where attached. This excludes laminates and veneers less than .036 inch thick per 803.2 or handrails and guard railings per 806.7. [F] 806.7 Interior trim...Combustible trim, excluding handrails and guardrails, shall not exceed 10 percent of the specific wall or ceiling area to which it is attached.

A local gallery is designing a brochure stand (12″W x 30″H) in an open reception area. Which would be the maximum mounting height to suggest for the brochures? A. 36" AFF to top B. 54" to top C. 15" AFF to bottom D. 48" AFF to center

C. 15" AFF to bottom Source: ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (2009), Figure 308.2.1 Unobstructed Forward Reach 15″ AFF to bottom would be correct because 15″+30″ = 45″. None of the other options fall within the entire 15″ - 48″ reach range. Either the top or bottom would be too high/low. 308.2.1 Unobstructed. Where a forward reach is unobstructed, the high forward reach shall be 48 inches (1220 mm) maximum and the low forward reach shall be 15 inches (380 mm) minimum above the finish floor or ground. A side view is shown of a person using a wheelchair reaching toward a wall. The lowest vertical reach point is 15 inches (380 mm) minimum and the highest is 48 inches (1220 mm) maximum. Figure 308.2.1 Unobstructed Forward Reach

Accessible urinals must sit a maximum of how many inches/mm to the top of the rim? A. 16" (406 mm) AFF B. 15" (380 mm) AFF C. 17" (430 mm) AFF D. 24" (608 mm) AFF

C. 17" (430 mm) AFF Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 605 Urinals The rim can be no higher than 17 inches (430 mm)Refer to Figure 605.2 Height and Depth of Urinals

Based on the adjacency matrix which box indicates the adjacency relationship between the master bedroom and hobby area 1? A. 24 B. 22 C. 23 D. 18

C. 23

In order to support caring for an elderly family member, the designer needs to add an accessible bathroom in the client's home. The designer must take space from two closets in two bedrooms to make enough room. the client wants a tub/shower, a toilet and lavatory. They will install a permanent tiled shower seat. For the smallest size tub available, what is the finished size of the alcove? A. 30 (760) x 30 (760) B. 28 (712) x 30 (760) C. 30 (760) min x 60 (1525) D. 30 (760) min x 72 (1830)

C. 30 (760) min x 60 (1525) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 607 Bathtubs The smallest drop in and undermount tubs start at sizes 45 inches (1145 mm) long x 30 inches wide (760 mm). A standard size tub is 30 inches (760 mm) x 72 inches (1830 mm). Per A117 and ADA, the required size would be the length of the tub + 15″ (380 mm) for the seat. Permanent seats of a minimum depth of 15 inches (380 mm) shall be positioned at the head end of the bathtub. 45+15=60or1145 +380=1525 Note that additional tolerance for the variation in finished wall will also be required.

A retail space has an existing condition of a 1′-0″ (305 mm) vertical step across the entire width of the space. In order to provide an accessible route to this area of the store without having to provide a ramp, what is the minimum clear space needed? A. 60" (1524 mm) x 240" (6096 mm) with a slope of 1:20 B. 60" (1524 mm) x 144" (3658 mm) with a slope of 1:12 C. 36" (915 mm) x 240" (6096 mm) with a slope of 1:20 D. 36" (915 mm) x 144" (3658 mm) with a slope of 1:12

C. 36" (915 mm) x 240" (6096 mm) with a slope of 1:20 Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, Chapter 4: Accessible Routes An accessible route may have a slope up to 1:20 (1 in of rise for every 20 in of distance) or 5%. A slope greater than this is classified as a ramp and must meet requirements for an accessible ramp. The minimum clear width for an accessible route is 36 in (915 mm) continuously and 32 in (815 mm) at a passage point such as a doorway. 403.3 Slope. The running slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:20. The cross slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:48. 403.5.1 Clear Width. The clear width of an accessible route shall be 36 inches (915 mm) minimum. See code for exceptions.

The vertical grab bar at the side-wall of an accessible toilet must be mounted at: A. 33" (840 mm) - 36" (900 mm) AFF B. 30" (760 mm) - 36" (900 mm) AFF C. 39 inches (990 mm) - 41 inches (1040 mm) AFF D. 34" (850 mm) - 42" (1060 mm) AFF

C. 39 inches (990 mm) - 41 inches (1040 mm) AFF Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 604.5.1 Fixed Side Wall Grab Bars. ....with the bottom of the bar located 39 inches (990 mm) minimum and 41 inches (1040 mm) maximum above the floor, Refer to FIG 604.5.1 SIDE WALL GRAB BAR FOR WATER CLOSET

Form, function, economy and time are? A. the 4 major tenets of Gestalt Psychology B. Maslow's theory of the hierarchy of needs C. 4 major considerations of any design problem D. the 4 primary principles of sustainability

C. 4 major considerations of any design problem Source: HOK. Problem Seeking: An Architectural Programming Primer, 5th Edition., Process, The Five Steps It's important to search for and find the entire interior design problem. Do this by considering the problem in terms of: Function — or "what's going to happen in the building." It concerns activities, relationship of spaces, and people—their number and characteristics. Keywords are: (1) people, (2) activities, and (3) relations Form — is what you will see and feel. It relates to the site, the physical environment (psychological, too), and the quality of space and construction. It's "what is there now" and "what will be there." Keywords are (4) site, (5) environment, and (6) quality Economy — concerns the initial budget and quality of construction, but also may include consideration of operating and life-cycle costs. Keywords are: (7) initial budget, (8) operating costs, and (9) life-cycle cost Time — deals with the influences of history, the inevitability of changes from the present, and projections into the future. Keywords are: (10) past, (11) present, and (12) future

What is the minimum width of an interior corridor? A. 36" (914 mm) B. 54" (1350 mm) C. 44" (1100 mm) D. 48" (1200 mm)

C. 44" (1100 mm) Source: 2018 International Building Code, CHAPTER 10 MEANS OF EGRESS Per TABLE 1020.2 MINIMUM CORRIDOR WIDTH, any facility not listed in the table shall have corridor width of 44 inches minimum.

Buildings of three or more stories must have signs that identify the floor level, directions to exit the building, the availability of roof access, and stairs identification. What is the minimum height and location required for the number designating the floor level? A. 5 inches, located at the top of the sign B. 3 inches, located in the center of the sign C. 5 inches, located in the center of the sign D. 3 inches, located at the top of the sign

C. 5 inches, located in the center of the sign Source: 2018 International Building Code, Chapter 10, Means of Egress Section 1023 Interior Exit Stairways and Ramps 1023.9. 1 Stair Identification Signs.Stairway identification signs shall comply with all of the following requirements: 3. The number designating the floor level shall be a minimum of 5 inches (127 mm) in height and located in the center of the sign. We recommend that you view and read the actual code to learn all of the requirements.

Which of the following would be the correct way to number a fire protection plan in a set of construction drawings for a high rise office space? A. 5FP B. 5F4.1 C. 5FP4.1 D. FP1

C. 5FP4.1 In order to provide a logical way to organize and refer to the drawings a system of numbering must be established. There are several ways to do this. The simplest method uses single numbers beginning with 1. For larger drawing sets where consultants are involved, numbers are preceded with a capital letter designating the discipline involved. "FP" is used for fire protection. For large projects the drawings within each discipline can be grouped; for example: floor plans could be group 1. The group number is followed by a decimal point then the sequential numbers start with "1", example: FP2.1 (fire protection group 2 page 1) For projects in a high rise with different sections the number is proceeded with the floor number. For example: 5FP4.1 (5th floor fire protection group 4 page 1).

216 pitch carpet has A. an equivalent gauge of 1/6 B. a pile height that is almost 1/4 in high C. 8 surface yarns per inch D. a commercial-grade stitch rate

C. 8 surface yarns per inch Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Flooring, Carpet, Manufacturing Processes Pitch is the number of ends of surface yarn in a 27 in width. To convert this measurement to gauge (the spacing between stitches) divide 27 in into 216 stitches. This gives 8 stitches/in, or 8 surface yarns/in, so the gauge is 1/8. The higher the pitch, the more dense the carpet is, so would be applicable for commercial use.

While there are no specific "bariatric" furniture standards, there are standards for "large occupants" that approach bariatric weight ranges (upwards of 600 lbs/272 kilos). One such standard is: A. NSF/ANSI 336 B. BIFMA e3 C. ANSI/ BIFMA X5.11 D. ANSI/BIFMA X7.1

C. ANSI/ BIFMA X5.11 Source: BIFMA, ANSI/BIFMA X5.11 - 2015 Large Occupant Office Chair BIFMA has been very busy the last few years on the seating front. They published BIFMA X5.11 for large occupant (254-400 lbs) in 2015 and they have a draft standard on the back burner for healthcare furniture; BIFMA HCF 8.2. Both standards share some tests from BIFMA X5.1 and BIFMA X5.4 and incorporate new tests as well. There is still no BIFMA bariatric standard. However HCF 8.2 goes up to 600 lbs which is getting pretty close to the bariatric realm. Bariatric: Relating to or specializing in the treatment of obesity. ANSI/BIFMA X7.1This standard defines the acceptance criteria for VOC emissions from furniture used in offices to be classified as low-emitting product and should be used in conjunction with the ANSI/BIFMA M7.1 Standard Test Method for Determining VOC Emissions from Office Furniture Systems, Components and Seating. BIFMA e3ANSI/BIFMA e3 Furniture Sustainability Standard. The purpose of this voluntary standard is to provide measurable market-based definitions of progressively more sustainable furniture by establishing performance criteria addressing environmental and social impacts throughout the supply chain. It addresses product-based characteristics in the general areas of environmental, health and wellness, and social impacts. NSF/ANSI 336The purpose of the Standard is to address the environmental, economic and social aspects of commercial furnishings fabric used in public occupancy settings such as office, hospitality, healthcare and institutional interiors. These textiles include but are not limited to woven, non-woven, bonded, knitted, felted and composite materials used for upholstered furniture; walls, draperies, cubicles, furniture systems and other vertical applications; and decorative top-of-bed applications such as bedspreads.

Which standards organization determines sound levels for mechanical systems in buildings? A. OSHA B. ASTM C. ASHRAE D. ANSI

C. ASHRAE Source: Corky, B. (2015). Building Systems for Interior Designers., Architectural Acoustics, Introduction, Acoustic Codes and Standards ASHRAE determines sound levels for mechanical systems in buildings.

What is the recognized standard for ventilation system design and acceptable IAQ? A. AQMD Rule 1168 (South Coast Air Quality Management District) B. CDPH Standard Method V1.1 C. ASHRAE 62.1‐2013 D. ASTM E1678

C. ASHRAE 62.1‐2013 Source: Corky, B. (2015). Building Systems for Interior Designers., Indoor Air Quality, Ventilation and Moisture Control, Introduction, ASHRAE Standards and LEED ASHRAE Standard 62.1‐2013—Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.2‐2013— Ventilation and Acceptable Indoor Air Quality in Low‐Rise Residential Buildings are the recognized standards for ventilation system design and acceptable IAQ.

What testing method and standard is used for interior wall and ceiling textile finishes? A. NFPA 265 (Room Corner Test) B. NFPA 701 (Vertical Ignition Test) C. ASTM E-84 (Steiner Tunnel Test) D. ASTM D2859 (Methenamine Pill Test)

C. ASTM E-84 (Steiner Tunnel Test) Source: Qpractice Answer Vault, ASTM E84 Steiner Tunnel Chamber NFPA 701 is for window coverings, ASTM 2859 is for floor coverings, and NFPA 265 is for textile wall finishes, not including ceilings.

On a reflected ceiling plan, what does this symbol represent? A. Flexible duct 18" x 10" high B. Linear slot diffuser 18" long x 10" wide C. Air duct 18" long x 10"wide D. Air duct 18" wide by 10" high

C. Air duct 18" long x 10"wide Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Mechanical Symbols The symbol shown above, when seen on a reflected ceiling plan, represents an air duct. The dimensions above tell you how wide the opening of the duct is by how high the opening of the duct is, so it is 18″ wide by 10″ high.

Advanced seismic design is not required for which ceiling type: A. Plaster and lath ceiling B. None of these C. All of these D. Structures in seismic design category A or B

C. All of these Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Interior Construction, Ceilings, Seismic restraint for suspended ceilings The type of detailing required for suspended ceilings is determined by the seismic design category of the building. No special seismic design is required for: structures in seismic design category a or b ceilings with areas less than 144 sq ft gypsum wallboard suspensions systems plaster and lath ceilings

Which of the following is a FALSE statement about addenda? A. Addenda are only issued before the construction contract is signed. B. Addenda are used to modify or interpret the contract documents. C. An addendum is sent only to the contractor to request the clarification. D. An addendum must be issued four or five days before bid opening.

C. An addendum is sent only to the contractor to request the clarification. Addenda must be sent to all of the contractors bidding on a project.

UL Environment is a program that: A, Provides independent green claims validation, product certification, training, and advisory services and standards development B. Promotes the market place visibility of sustainable products, services, and organizations C. Both of these D. Neither of these

C. Both of these Source: Underwriters Laboratories, UL Environment UL Environment is a program of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) that promotes the marketplace visibility of sustainable products, services, and organizations. It provides independent green claims validation, product certification, training, and advisory services and standards development. Among the product claims UL Environment can validate are: recycled content, rapidly renewable materials, regional materials, VOC emissions, VOC content, energy efficiency, hazardous or toxic substances, reclamation programs, mold resistance, manufacturing energy audits, degradability, and compostability. It maintains a database of products it has certified. UL is the exclusive provider of GREENGUARD Certification for products that meet stringent chemical emissions requirements, and ECOLOGO Certification for products that meet multi-attribute, life cycle-based sustainability standards.

What are the four broad categories of energy efficiency strategies? A. Electricity use, plumbing, displacement ventilation and embodied energy. B. Environmental profiling, building commissioning, plumbing and commissioning. C. Building commissioning, mechanical systems, electricity use, and plumbing. D. Building commissioning, plumbing, environmental profiling and embodied energy.

C. Building commissioning, mechanical systems, electricity use, and plumbing. Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Sustainable Design, Energy Efficiency Although much of the energy efficiency of a building is decided by the original architecture and mechanical system design, there are many strategies that the interior designer can use to reduce energy consumption. These can be grouped into four broad categories: building commissioning, mechanical systems, electricity use, and plumbing.

This system is divided into the following three parts: General/Products/Execution? A. CPM system B. Master specifications C. CSI MasterFormat D. Guide specifications

C. CSI MasterFormat The organization of the technical sections has been standardized through the general adoption of the Master Format system developed by the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) and Construction Specifications Canada (CSC) to standardize the numbering and format of project-related information for use in specifying, cost estimating and data filing. The MasterFormat system establishes a standard way of organizing any particular specification section. The first level of division within a section is the three-part format. This includes: Part 1, General Part 2, Products Part 3, Execution All sections include three parts, while the specific articles within the parts vary with the type of material or product being specified.

In the exhibit below, the arrow points to which type of exterior construction finish? A. Gypsum wallboard B. Stone C. Concrete stucco D. Masonry

C. Concrete stucco Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Material Indications The area indicated shows a stucco finish.

Upon being notified that a project is ready for closeout, what should the interior designer do? A. Issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion B. Insure the owner receives as-built drawings C. Conduct a punch list D. Submit a final certificate for payment

C. Conduct a punch list Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Contract Administration: Delivery and Project Closeout The first thing an interior designer should do upon initiation of project closeout procedures is conduct a punch list. All other options should happen only after the punch list has been conducted and all items completed by the contractor. The contractor initiates closeout procedures by notifying the interior designer in writing and submitting a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. The designer then makes a first inspection to determine if the work or a designated portion of it is substantially complete or if additional items need to be completed or corrected. The list of items made by the interior designer as a result of the first inspection is called the punch list (or deficiency list in Canada).

All of the following must be included on every title block except: A. Sheet number B. Project Address C. Copy print notice D. A space for professional stamps

C. Copy print notice Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting All of the other options are required to be on every drawing sheet in a set of construction documents. A copy print notice, although recommended to be on every sheet, is not required.

Which of the following is an INCORRECT statement about corridors? A. Corridors are included in calculating travel distance. B. Corridors must be used exclusively for egress. C. Corridor construction must be fire-rated. D. Corridors are part of the exit access.

C. Corridor construction must be fire-rated. The main thing to remember is that corridors are part of the exit access. This means that they are used for calculating travel distance, but they do not necessarily have to be fire-rated (although they usually are). Also, by definition they must be used exclusively for egress.

Which type of decorative millwork is shown in the drawing below? A. Casing B. Chair rails C. Crown molding D. Panel trim

C. Crown molding Source: Ballast, D. K., FAIA. Interior Construction and Detailing for Designers and Architects, eTextbook., Architectural Woodwork, Molding, Standard Wood Molding Profiles This is crown molding as shown in both profile and elevation view. It is designed to finish/cover the area between the vertical and horizontal surfaces of wall and ceiling at a 90 degree angle. All other choices refer to molding types that trim out wall surfaces only.

This space plan showing the effect of "social distancing" on a typical office layout is an example of what? A. Building Information Management B. CPM Diagram C. Data Visualization D. Information Densification

C. Data Visualization Source: Tableau, Data Visualization Beginner's Guide: A Definition, Examples, and Learning Resources Data visualization is the graphical representation of information and data. Using visual elements like charts, graphs, and maps, data visualization tools provide an accessible way to see and understand trends, outliers, and patterns in data. When thinking of data visualization, first thoughts often include simple bar graphs or pie charts. While these may be an integral part of visualizing data and a common baseline for many data graphics, the right visualization must be paired with the right set of information. Simple graphs are only the tip of the iceberg. Many visualization methods can present data in compelling and exciting ways. In this example, by assigning each item of furniture a minimum radius, the software colors the overlapping radii red. The red bubbles show where minimum social distancing cannot be maintained, and the furniture plan will need to be adjusted or reevaluated to maintain these distances. Other common types of data visualization include: Charts Tables Graphs Maps Infographics Dashboards Tableau diagram used with permission from the Flerlage Twins

You are specifying for a health care system who will be using a solution-dyed antimicrobial carpet in a custom pattern and colors for use in some of the corridors. What type of specification should you use? A. Performance B. Reference C. Descriptive D. Proprietary

C. Descriptive In this scenario, the specification must meet both performance and design criteria, without mentioning trade or brand names (proprietary — a type of prescriptive specification) The best type of specification is a descriptive spec — a type of performance specification.

During the design development phase of design, what method would NOT be used to reduce potential noise problems in a room whose exact size and shape had not yet been determined? A. Study ways to increase the transmission loss of the room's partitions. B. Plan for sound-absorbent material on the walls of the room. C. Design the room to have the largest ceiling surface area possible. D. Minimize the length of the wall separating the room from noisier areas.

C. Design the room to have the largest ceiling surface area possible. All are important considerations in controlling both noise within a room and noise being transmitted from outside a room. A large ceiling might be useful for applying sound-absorbent material, but the SIZE of the ceiling (as determined by programmed square footages) is already set by the time design development begins.

If a project is going to be submitted for LEED Certification, all of the requirements would be listed in which division? A. Division-09 B. Division-10 C. Division-01 D. Division-13

C. Division-01 Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Construction Specifications All of the requirements for LEED Certification are listed in Division-01 general requirements.

If a project is going to be submitted for LEED Certification, all of the requirements would be listed in which division? A. Division-13 B. Division-10 C. Division-01 D. Division-09

C. Division-01 Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Construction Specifications All of the requirements for LEED Certification are listed in Division-01 general requirements.

Based on the drawing below, where would you expect to find a section detail of platform wood bed base with drawers? A. Drawing 3 on Sheet ID-600 B. Drawing 1 on Sheet ID-205 C. Drawing 4 on Sheet ID-600 D. Drawing 1 on Sheet ID-600

C. Drawing 4 on Sheet ID-600 Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings and Specifications, Reference Systems. Drawing 1 on Sheet ID-205 is the sheet that the elevation is shown onDrawing 1 on Sheet ID-600 refers to a detailDrawing 4 on Sheet ID-600 correctly refers to the wood baseDrawing 3 on Sheet ID-600 refers to the nightstand and wall panel

How much does a typical building permit cost? A. $4,000.00 B. Set fee for any type C. Fee based on square footage D. $1,000.00

C. Fee based on square footage Source: 2018 International Building Code, Chapter 1, Scope and Administration, 109.3 Building permit valuations. The code uses the concept of valuation to establish the permit fee. This concept is based on the proposition that the valuation of a project is related to the amount of work to be expended in the various aspects of administering the permit. The only possible correct answer is "Fee based on square footage" based on the other given choices:"No fee, covered by inspections" is incorrect — there's always a fee."$4,000.00" (or any number) is incorrect. There is no single price for a fee for a building permit; it is based on other information about the project."Set fee for any type" is also incorrect. These answers are incorrect because the fee can vary depending on the project size and type, for example, new construction or selected remodel. For example, a permit for just plumbing would be a different cost than a full 3-floor renovation. Also, the building permit fees will vary based upon locale too. And remember, there is always a fee for a building permit, no matter what the work entails. So "Fee based on square footage" is the best answer of those given in the options. Refer to the lesson Permit Requirements

What two aspects of environmental regulations often create challenges for interior designers as to the quality of the environment? A. Indoor Air Quality and Hazardous Material disposal codes B. Hazardous Material disposal and Recycle and Reuse standards C. Indoor Air Quality and Energy Efficiency regulations D. Energy Efficiency and Recycling and Reuse requirements

C. Indoor Air Quality and Energy Efficiency regulations Source: Winkel, F.D.K.C.S. R. (2018). Building Codes Illustrated: A Guide to Understanding the 2018 International Building Code., Interior Environment The quality of interior environments is one of the primary factors in code development outside of the considerations of structural safety, fire resistance, and egress. Indoor air quality has become increasingly important, as buildings become more energy efficient and more airtight. The need to prevent accumulations of molds, viruses, toxic gases, and other contaminants while achieving energy efficiency has been a challenge for recent code development.

What provision may be included in a Owner-Contractor Agreement in order to return anticipated losses to the owner in the event that the contractor cannot complete the project on time? A. Penalty clause B. Bonus provision C. Liquidated damages D. Compensatory damages

C. Liquidated damages Source: Piotrowski, C. M. (2020). Professional Practice for Interior Designers., Preparing Design Contracts, Performance and Breach Liquidated damages represent an amount agreed upon by both the owner and the contractor in the event that the contractor cannot complete the project on time. A liquidated damages provision is included with the intent of making the non-breaching party whole again rather than punishing the party in breach. A penalty clause is included in a contract with the intent to punish the breaching party. It often does not represent a reasonable amount and often cannot be enforced in states where common law is practiced. A bonus provision is written into a contract to provide a reward as incentive to the contractor for completing the project early. This is usually based on realistic cost savings by the owner and may be paired with liquidated damages and must be included with a penalty clause. Compensatory damages are awarded by a judge in a civil suit and are equal to the financial loss that the non-breaching party has incurred. Compensatory damages by nature are not written into contracts as they are awarded as a part of a court ordered settlement.

In the following Partition Plan, what element does Note '1' denote? A. None of these B. Building grid C. Overhead ceiling beam to remain D. Overhead ceiling element to be demolished

C. Overhead ceiling beam to remain Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Drawing and Drafting Fundamentals, Line Types Although denoted by dashed lines, the ceiling beam is not to be demolished. Demolition is not shown on a Partition Plan. The dashed lines denote an overhead ceiling beam - a clue to this is also that the dashed lines are in between columns, which is where structural beams are often located. These elements are often shown on Partition Plans for reference, even though it is technically an element pertaining to the ceiling. Generally anything denoted as a dashed line on a Partition Plan means it is an element happening above.

Based on the symbols shown in the drawing below, we can determine that this is what type of drawing? A. Interior Finish plan B. Floor plan C. Power / telephone plan D. Demolition plan

C. Power / telephone plan Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings The symbols shown on this plan represent outlets, data, telephones and other items found on a power/telephone plan.

This exhibit illustrates which type of veneer wood cut? A. Plain slicing B. Rift slicing C. Quarter slicing D. Rotary slicing

C. Quarter slicing Source: Interior Design Reference Manual 6th Edition, Architectural woodwork, types of veneer cuts Quarter slicing is created by cutting a log into quarters, then very thinly slicing perpendicular to the diameter, giving a more uniform graining pattern. Watch the Answer Vault video Wood veneer

The designer is working on a remodel of a public restroom and are required to bring it up to code when completing the work. The toilet partitions are currently held off the ground 3 inches. Based on this information, which of the following design solutions will ensure that these partitions are accessible? A. Raise the toilet partitions to 6 inches maximum AFF on all sides of the stall. B. Relocate the plumbing fixtures so that the centerline is between 16 and 18 inches from a wall. C. Raise the toilet partitions to 9 inches minimum AFF at the front and at least one side of the stall. D. Ensure 60" turning circle.

C. Raise the toilet partitions to 9 inches minimum AFF at the front and at least one side of the stall. Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 306 Knee and Toe Clearance, Figure 306.2 Toe Clearance All toilet stalls must have toe clearance below the front partition and below at least one side partition. This clearance must be a minimum of 9 in (230mm) above the floor and extend a minimum of 6 in (150mm) beyond the compartment-side face of the partition. Partitions at standard stalls could remain at 3″ high off the ground. The toe clearance under the toilet stall is literally for the TOES of someone in a wheelchair to be able to swing by/under if necessary. Think about sitting in a wheelchair (or any chair) and how your feet protrude further out than the rest of the chair. That extra clearance under the toilet partition will help if you turn around INSIDE the stall. For example, if the partition or a solid wall went all the way down to the ground and did NOT have the minimum turning radius or 6″ clear beyond the compartment-side face of that partition, if you turned around inside, you could possibly hit your toes on that lower portion of the wall! OUCH! Although toilets should be located 16-18 inches from centerline to wall, relocating the plumbing fixtures is not the correct answer because it does not have to do with the clearance of the partitions that the question is asking for.

This example of panel construction shows which type of panel edge connection? A. Center match B. Raised panel C. Reveal joint D. Stile and rail

C. Reveal joint Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, Architectural Woodwork, Paneling, Panel Edge Connections The reveal joint is used in flush panel construction where the gap between panels reveals another surface, finish, or panel veneer.

On a set of construction documents, a drawing view title must include all of the following except: A. Drawing name B. Scale C. Sheet number D. Drawing number on sheet

C. Sheet number Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting On a drawing title, in order to identify what the drawing is and how to scale it, it must include the name and scale. The drawing number on the sheet is required because it relates to tags such as elevations and section cuts. Although many office standards will include the sheet number in a view title it is NOT needed because the drawing will already be on the sheet making it repetitive.

Which test is used to test flame spread of wall coverings? A. Critical Radiant Flux B. Smoke Density Chamber Test C. Steiner Tunnel Test D. Methenamine Pill Test

C. Steiner Tunnel Test Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Glossary The Steiner Tunnel Test - also know as ASTM E84, tests the flame spread rating of Interior Finishes and Building Materials, specifically wall and ceiling finishes. The others primarily test floor coverings.

What is NOT true about the COF (Coefficient of Friction) measurement? A. The COF is measured in a resting position B. The COF is used on wet and dry surfaces C. The lower the COF, the less slippery it is D. The ADA only recommends a COF value

C. The lower the COF, the less slippery it is Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam, eTextbook., Finishes, Flooring, Safety Factors COF (coefficient of friction) is measured while static and the DCOF while in motion.The higher the COF, the less slippery the surface. There are two basic measures of friction: the static coefficient of friction, which is measured from a resting position the dynamic coefficient is measured when the two surfaces are in relative motion The measurement for the dynamic COF is always lower than the static COF for the same two surfaces. It is difficult to measure the dynamic COF; the measurement must be done in a laboratory for accurate results. Most tests, in the laboratory and in the field, measure the static coefficient of friction.

Which of the following is a FALSE statement regarding meeting minutes? A. It is crucial to type up and issue meeting minutes as quickly as possible following a meeting B. Email is an acceptable way to distribute minutes to the necessary members of the project team C. They cannot be altered once they have been completed and distributed to all parties D. Anyone on the project team may review and have access to the meeting minutes even if they did not attend

C. They cannot be altered once they have been completed and distributed to all parties Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Project & Business Management Meeting minutes can be altered once they have been completed and distributed. In fact, the interior designer should encourage team members to provide any additions or corrections within 5 business days in order to set the record straight and prevent future disagreements. Including a statement at the end of the minutes encouraging others to do so is how this should be communicated.

Choose the correct drawing order: A. Title, Civil, Arch, Landscape, Structure, Mech, Plumb, Elec B. Title, Arch, Elec, Plumb, Mech, Structure, Landscape, Civil C. Title, Civil, Landscape, Arch, Structure, Mech, Plumb, Elec D. Title, Arch, Structure, Civil, Mech, Plumb, Elec, Landscape

C. Title, Civil, Landscape, Arch, Structure, Mech, Plumb, Elec Source: Qpractice Summary, Sequence of Construction Activities The drawing set is a communication tool for all the parties involved in a construction project. It should be organized so that it is easy to understand and find information, and is typically ordered in the same manner as the sequence of construction activities. The Title sheet always comes first. The site and landscape surround the building so Civil and Landscape drawings appear before drawings of the building. Next, the Architectural drawings, including interior design as incorporated as part of the architectural set come before the consultant drawings. Finally, structure comes before the other consultant drawings which are generally listed in the order that they are performed during construction, so Electrical would come last.

Utilizing BOMA standards, gross building area for a two-story building leased to a single tenant is measured: A. To the inside dominant face of the building and includes all interior area, excluding major vertical penetrations B. To the inside dominant face of the building and includes all interior area C. To the outside face of the building and includes all interior area D. To the interior glass surface of exterior walls and includes all interior area, excluding circulation

C. To the outside face of the building and includes all interior area' Source: BOMA, Best Practices Floor Measurement BOMA's published standards recognize that, in an office building that is leased entirely to a single occupant, it is common to utilize exterior gross area (or construction gross area) instead of rentable area as the basis for leasing. BOMA Standards do not direct which measure of floor area to choose. That choice is generally made by the stakeholders to the lease agreement.

The use of particleboard as part of a construction detail should be carefully evaluated in terms of the particleboard's A. availability B. strength C. VOC content D. permeability

C. VOC content Most particleboard contains formaldehyde and may contain other volatile organic compounds. The other options are incorrect because particleboard is readily available and strong enough for architectural woodwork details and other uses. Permeability, which is the ability to transfer moisture, is not a factor, because the particleboard would only be used as a substrate for other finishes.

A client wants confirmation that the fabrics proposed for a new high school auditorium will be up to the challenges of durability and cleanability. Which of the following fabric selections would be the MOST appropriate to specify for this use? EXHIBIT A. WF-7 Memory B. WF-5 Gallant C. WF-3 Arcade D. WF-8 Abacus

C. WF-3 Arcade Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Millwork, Casework, and Furnishings; Upholstery Fabrics A - WF-5 Gallant — with 100,000 double rubs Wyzenbeek and bleach cleanable maintenance instructions. A manufacturer's fabric specifications for durability consider a fabric that withstands 3,000 cycles as light duty, 9,000 cycles as medium-duty, and 15,000 cycles + as heavy duty. A typical commercial standard requires a minimum of 30,000 double rubs. Some upholstery fabrics can withstand hundreds of thousands of double rubs. This test is also referred to as CFFA-1, the Wyzenbeek method. Additionally, straight industrial cleaning bleach is a more harsh cleaner than diluted house bleach. The combination of those attributes in choice A makes it the best option for the intended use.

When can a contractor make a final application for payment on a project? A. After the interior designer's final site inspection B. After site inspection and all punch list items are corrected C. When the certificate of substantial completion has been issued D. Once the contractor has corrected all items on the punch list (deficiency list) issued by the interior designer

C. When the certificate of substantial completion has been issued Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration Although all of the above steps are part of working towards substantial completion in the closeout phase of a project, only when the certificate of substantial completion is issued can the contractor submit final application for payment.

To minimize conflicts in the contract documents, what is the LEAST important action the interior designer can take? A. Have someone check the drawings before they are issued. B. Make sure terminology in the specifications is the same as in the drawings. C. Write the specifications after the drawings are essentially complete. D. Show only dimensions on the drawings.

C. Write the specifications after the drawings are essentially complete. The specifications should be outlined and begun while the drawings are being done. The specifications writer and the job captain should be in constant contact and coordination while both documents are being completed, to minimize conflicts.

In understanding the relationship between public and private zones in the entry spaces of a residential design, a good tool to use both explore and explain those issues to the client is... A. a blocking diagram B. an adjacency matrix C. a bubble diagram D. a space plan layout

C. a bubble diagram

Solid stock lumber is cut from a log in all of the following ways EXCEPT? A. rift sawing B. plain sawing C. rotary sawing D. quarter sawing

C. rotary sawing Source: Qpractice Answer Vault, Wood Veneer The way lumber is cut from a log determines its final appearance of the grain pattern. There are three ways solid stock is cut from a log: - plain sawing (also called flat sawing) - quarter sawing - rift sawing

Which of these diagrams would be most appropriate for the planning of a small shopping mall?

Diagram A represents a single double-loaded corridor concept with possible entries at one end or in the middle fo the mall. The circles could also represent anchor stores at either end of the mall.

As applicable to Interior Design, a "joint venture" is: A. only used when a contractor and a design firm partner together in a design-build situation. B. created when a larger firm intends to merge with a smaller firm with different expertise. C. a legally distinct entity that allows multiple firms to work under a single project contract. D. a temporary partnership that keeps the names of the original firm members intact.

C. a legally distinct entity that allows multiple firms to work under a single project contract. Source: Kennon, K. E. (2018). Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, The Project Management Process, Integrated Design Team members of a joint venture are willing to work with an integrated and negotiated single contract rather than the separate contracts with each of the individual design-build team members. This often means that the integrated design team will create a joint venture company, legally distinct from any individual company involved in the project.

Which document provides the designer with verification that an item was ordered correctly? A. purchase order B. packing slip C. acknowledgment D. bill of lading

C. acknowledgment A manufacturer issues an acknowledgement after receiving a purchase order. Because the information on the purchase order is repeated, the designer can compare this with the original purchase order and specifications to make sure they match.

Which tool is best for documenting spatial proximity, related activities and identifying priorities? A. zoning diagram B. stacking plan C. adjacency matrix D. bubble diagram

C. adjacency matrix

Which of the following should not be a primary consideration when choosing a light source? A. efficacy B. operating life cost C. aesthetics D. color rendition

C. aesthetics Some of the many considerations that influence the selection of a light source include color rendition, initial cost, operating cost, efficacy, size, operating life and the ability to control output from a luminaire.

According to the IBC, "visible notification" systems: A. need to be connected to visible and audible room alarm devices. B. provide the occupant with visible notification of emergency situations. C. alert a room occupant of incoming phone calls or door knocks. D. need to have an accessible TTY device outlet somewhere in the room.

C. alert a room occupant of incoming phone calls or door knocks. Source: 2018 International Building Code, E104.2.4 Notification devices Per E104.2.4 Notification devices, visual notification devices are required. Visible notification devices alert room occupants of incoming telephone calls and a door knock or bell. Also, Refer to 702.1 General 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

When making furniture decisions, what should the interior designer consider? A. industry standards B. FF&E requirements established by a rating system such as LEED C. all of these D. federal, state and local restrictions related to FF&E

C. all of these Source: BIFMA, Furniture Comfort, Safety, Sustainability, and Durability Standards In making furniture decisions, the designer should consider industry standards for furniture in terms of comfort, safety, sustainability, and durability. Adherence to standards by means such as BIFMA compliance ensure that the item will perform as expected and meet minimum construction requirements. In addition to the requirements that furniture must conform to a particular standard, there may be federal, state and local restrictions related to FF&E, as well as requirements established by a client or by a rating system such as LEED. With an emphasis on sustainability and third-party certification, many clients require that FF&E conform to minimum green standards.

While traveling for an installation, how should the designer handle their travel expenses? A. included in the design fee B. the client arranges for and books the designer's travel directly C. billed to the client at cost or with a service charge D. not included in the contract

C. billed to the client at cost or with a service charge Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Preparing Design Contracts Travel on behalf of the client for installation is a direct expense and billed to the client. A service fee may be included if specified in the contract. Typical direct expenses include reprographic printing, models, travel expense, shipping, freight and handling, and expenses incurred during procurement and installation.

When specifying the method by which two veneer pieces are to be applied, the most pleasing result is usually obtained with a A. slip match B. random match C. book match D. center match

C. book match Only book matching and slip matching refer to the ways individual veneer pieces can be laid up next to each other. Of these two options, book matching is generally considered the preferred, most pleasing match.

While on a field visit to the new hospital wing that your firm has been contracted to design, you notice that the carpeting being installed will not meet ADA requirements. The specs you submitted clearly met all accessibility requirements. What is your next course of action? A. call the client and notify them of the unfortunate situation B. tell the carpet installer to stop work immediately, because they are installing carpet that will not meet code C. call the contractor and let them know you are rejecting the work, because it does not conform to your specifications, and follow up your conversation with a certified letter D. contact the supplier immediately for replacement, as they must have delivered the incorrect product

C. call the contractor and let them know you are rejecting the work, because it does not conform to your specifications, and follow up your conversation with a certified letter Source: AIA A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 4.2.6 According to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, the designer may reject construction work not conforming to the contract documents. The designer should also notify the owner and all parties should receive written documentation.

Within the IPC or International Plumbing Codes, proper water-quality analysis includes "turbidity." What is turbidity? A. biological purity B. potability C. cloudiness D. mineral content

C. cloudiness Source: Corky, B. (2015). Building Systems for Interior Designers., Water Supply Systems, Introduction, Codes and Testing, Codes and Standards Building codes cover almost every aspect of plumbing design and materials. Local health departments and special consultants can assure proper quantity and quality of supply water through water‐quality analysis. This process assesses mineral content, turbidity (cloudiness), total amount of solids, biological purity, and suitability for intended use.

Which of the following concepts would be most critical during a fire in a high rise building? A. containment B. sprinklers C. compartmentation D. emergency lighting

C. compartmentation Source: Kennon, K. E. Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Fire and Smoke Resistant Assemblies Compartmentation is a critical concept in fire and life safety that works as part of the passive fire protection system (as opposed to fire detection or fire suppression) by using assemblies that resist the spread of fire or smoke. These assemblies include fire walls, fire barriers and partitions, horizontal assemblies, smoke barriers and partitions, opening protectives, and through-penetration protectives. The basic idea is to contain a fire and limit its spread, to allow building occupants to escape and to protect other parts of the build that are not initially subject to the fire. In a high-rise building, where it may not be practical to evacuate the building immediately, compartmentation can provide areas of refuge where occupants can wait until the fire is extinguished or until they can exit safely. Compartmentation also provides time for fire suppression by automatic sprinklers or by fire fighting personnel.

Who initiates project closeout procedures? A. client B. interior designer C. contractor D. architect

C. contractor Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Contract Administration: Delivery and Project Closeout The contractor initiates closeout procedures by notifying the interior designer in writing and submitting a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. All postinstallation and postoccupancy activities are an acknowledged part of the contract administration phase. This includes a final site inspection called a walk-through, where the designer, with the client, determines if there are any omissions or damages. Notations are made on a form commonly called a punch list. Final payment to the designer is often withheld until all items on the punch list are taken care of. Larger design firms often also prepare post-occupancy evaluations a short time after the client has moved in.

Which method of information gathering entails using photographs from different angles to create a three dimensional model? A. orthophography B. rectified photography C. convergent photogrammetry D. sterophotogrammetry

C. convergent photogrammetry entails using photographs from different angles to create a three-dimensional model.

Which of the following would not be included in the project notebook? A. punch list B. shop drawings C. copy of all bonds D. submittals

C. copy of all bonds Source: Qpractice Answer Vault, [Video] Project Notebook In addition to completing the work, the contractor must also submit to the owner certain other items including bonds. The interior designer does not keep a copy of the bonds as they are not the interior designer's responsibility. Shop drawings, submittals, and the punch list would be included as part of a project notebook. Do not confuse the project NOTEBOOK (Project Management) with the PROJECT MANUAL (Construction Specifications).

In storage over workstations, what is the most critical in determining the mounting height for barrier free access? A. width of worksurface B. depth of cabinet C. depth of worksurface D. width of cabinet

C. depth of worksurface Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 308.2 Forward Reach. Once the depth of the work surface is known, the cabinet can be hung so that the bottom shelf is within the range of obstructed forward reach. Refer to 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, Section 308.2.2 Obstructed High Reach

What type of drawing is depicted in this image? A. elevation B. section C. detail D. reflected ceiling plan

C. detail Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction drawings, Contents of Construction Drawings, Sections, Details The manner in which an assembly of several parts is organized and connected is commonly referred to as a detail. The construction drawing showing such a part is called a detail drawing or simply a detail, for short. A detail may be as simple as nailing wallboard to a stud or as complex as the intersection of the structural steel of a stairway and floor with the finish flooring, ceiling below, handrail, and concealed lighting, all of which might include dozens of different materials and connection techniques. The terms section and detail, as used in interior construction drawings, are sometimes confused. This is because the majority of details are section cuts through small portions of construction. However, not all details are sections, and not all sections are details. The term "section" is used on architectural drawings to refer to sections through entire buildings. A detail can also be a very large-scale plan view, an isometric view, or a large-scale partial elevation. Normally, a detail section is simply called a detail.

Important criteria for designing a lighting cove detail would include all of the following EXCEPT A. labor costs B. substrates C. ergonomics D. efficiency

C. ergonomics Source: Designing Commercial Interiors, 3rd Edition, Glossary Ergonomics is the scientific study of the physical functioning of humans in the environment. Ergonomic design would not be a factor in the design of something that people do not come in direct contact with.

Add adjacency matrix is used to: A. visualize pairing for power and data location B. list end user profiles, needs and activities C. establish space planning relationships and priorities D. list project goals, assumptions and objectives

C. establish space planning relationships and priorities

What device placed in a duct is designed to automatically close when subjected to a certain increase in temperature or with the detection of smoke? A. smoke damper B. photoelectric detector C. fire damper D. fire suppression detector

C. fire damper Fire damper: A device placed in a duct that is designed to automatically close when subjected to a certain increase in temperature or with the detection of smoke.

In specifying materials to be used for the custom fabrication of window treatments in an assisted living facility, which of the following is the most important consideration when selecting the fabric? A. offgassing B. colorfastness to light C. flammability D. durability

C. flammability Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Finish and Furniture Selection When selecting drapery for commercial, institutional and public residential application, one of the most important considerations is flammability. This takes precedence over other criteria such as durability, fading, resistance and style.

Which type of drawing is used to show items that are up to 48" (1.2 m) AFF? A. reflected ceiling plan B. orthographic projection C. floor plan D. axonometric

C. floor plan Construction plans, also called floor plans or partition plans, are the most common type of floor plan and are required for every project regardless of size or complexity. Construction plans are views seen as though a building were cut horizontally about 4 ft (1.2 m) above the floor with the top section removed.

Which of the following is NOT true about FF&E warranties and manuals? A. commercial clients typically have designer create maintenance schedules that inform the company workers how to clean, wax, vacuum, remove stains from and maintain the furniture, fabrics, and architectural finishes B. warranties can become null and void if the maintenance, use and care instructions have not been followed C. formal maintenance schedules are always part of the contracted design services when the designer acts as the seller of goods D. warranties are related to the quality, fitness, and purpose or title of products or equipment

C. formal maintenance schedules are always part of the contracted design services when the designer acts as the seller of goods Formal maintenance schedules can be either a separate design service or included and charged for in the design contract.

A project manager wants to involve her entire design and construction team in the scheduling of an upcoming project. Which of the following scheduling methods allows for interaction and discussion among the team as it relates to project scheduling? A. PERT chart B. Gantt chart C. full wall schedule D. CPM chart

C. full wall schedule Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Project Management, Scheduling One useful technique for developing a schedule while at the same time involving all members of the design and construction team including the client is the full wall schedule. Image/video courtesy Qpractice alumni Bridgett Fish, ASID, WRID, NCIDQ

Specialized items such as artwork, plants, graphics, and special free-standing or constructed items are called accessories are considered as part of which program? A. finishes B. furniture C. furnishings D. equipment

C. furnishings Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Furnishings and Equipment Plans Furnishings are items that add the finishing touches to the spaces. Furnishings can be utilitarian or decorative, and serve to enhance the architectural features of the space as well as meet the user needs and aspirations. Generally, furnishings include accessories, artwork, plants, graphics, and special free-standing or constructed items. Sometimes window coverings are categorized under Furnishings or in the Finishes.

What type of cushioning would be best for a hospital waiting room? A. combustion modified foam with a low ILD B. cotton batting C. high-density foam D. low-density polyurethane

C. high-density foam A medical waiting area with high usage would benefit from a firmer cushion. Cotton batting and low-density polyurethane do not meet this requirement. Also, any material with a low ILD (indentation load deflection) implies a soft cushion.

If you were looking for an inexpensive, compact light source that could easily be dimmed and produces warm color to be used in a dining room chandelier, which of the following would be your best choice? A. halogen lamp B. fluorescent lamp C. incandescent lamp D. high intensity discharge (HID)

C. incandescent lamp Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Lighting Systems Incandescent lamps are still an inexpensive, compact light source that is easy to dim, can be repeatedly started without a decrease in lamp life, and have a warm color rendition. Their light output can be easily controlled with reflectors and lenses. In many jurisdictions, energy conservation codes may limit their use, so it's important to know which local codes apply.

The main difference between "inclusive" design and "accessible" design is: A. accessible design addresses public facilities while inclusive design addresses private residences B. inclusive design addresses the needs of seniors while accessible design deals with human factors C. inclusive design is for the broadest range of individuals where accessible design is for a single group of people D. accessible design is for all people regardless of ability where inclusive design is for a specific physical disability

C. inclusive design is for the broadest range of individuals where accessible design is for a single group of people Source: Kennon, K. E. Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Finish Selection and Specification, Accessible and Universal Design Inclusive design is for the broadest range of individuals where accessible design is for a single group of people. Accessible design addresses the requirements of a single group within the larger population, specifically, people with disabilities. Universal design is inclusive of all people with respect to human factors. It differs from accessible design by addressing as widespread a group as possible. Many of the same features that promote safety and independence for seniors, such as handrails and nonslip flooring, also enhance the function of a space for the general population.

Ventilation does all of the following EXCEPT? A. remove odor B. carry away contaminants C. increase evaporation and heat loss through convection D. removes carbon dioxide

C. increase evaporation and heat loss through convection Source: Kilmer, R., Kilmer, W. O. Designing Interiors., Interior Environmental Control and Support Systems Ventilation refers to the process of replacing all or part of a space's air to control temperature and other factors. It is required to provide fresh oxygen and remove carbon dioxide, to remove odor and carry away contaminants. It includes the circulation of air within a building's spaces as well as exchange of air to the exterior. Interiors can be maintained at the desired temperature by tempering the air in the space with heating and cooling methods. Ventilation also is essential in introducing fresh air to replace air that can become stale when it is recirculated within a closed building or space. Inadequate ventilation can also produce what has been termed "sick building syndrome," as a result of concentrated indoor air pollutants such as volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

What two aspects of sustainable interior design have a direct affect on human health? A. energy conservation and building re-use. B. sustainable materials and energy conservation. C. indoor air quality and sustainable materials. D. indoor air quality and energy conservation.

C. indoor air quality and sustainable materials. Source: Kennon, K. E. (2018). Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Designing for Human Health and Safety, Introduction The work of interior designers is directly concerned with the health, safety, and welfare of building occupants. Aspects of sustainable design such as indoor air quality and sustainable materials have direct impacts on human health.

In a set of construction drawings, where would you find the general notes? A. last sheet of documents B. general conditions page C. title and index sheet D. appendix

C. title and index sheet This may be on the Title and Index sheet (s). On large projects the first sheet often contains a large title and sometimes graphics identifying the project. In addition, these sheet(s) may contain an index to the set of drawings, a list of standard abbreviations and symbols used on the job, project data required by the building department and general notes that apply to the entire job. On small projects, this information, if included, is placed on the first sheet of the set, which is usually the floor plan.

The following diagram is what type design communication tool: A. flow chart B. critical path method C. infographic D. data visualization

C. infographic Source: Karpan, Cynthia M. Programming Interior Environments. Taylor & Francis, 2019. [VitalSource Bookshelf]., Synthesis, Workflow This is the client's motorcycle retail and repair business workflow diagram presented in an infographic format. The point of collecting it is to gain a deep understanding of individual and procedural work flows, processes, or operations so that you can program a space that will satisfy your client's needs and expectations. Workflow briefly describe how people, information, and products move through your client's facility. Briefly describe who communicates with who, where, when, and how frequently. You may wish to include both existing and desired work flow diagrams. Suggested format: Infographics, sociograms, affinity diagrams, tables, lists, charts. Infographics are visual presentations of information that use the elements of design to display content. Infographics express complex messages to viewers in a way that enhances their comprehension. Images are often an extension of the content of a written article, but infographics convey a self-contained message or principle. Another example of an infographic which you should become familiar with is the CIDQ Exam Development process, excerpt below. Download a printable PDF format here.

Which of the following would be the least useful to a designer in procuring furniture and furnishing BUT are typically excellent sources of information? A. factory or manufacturer's reps B. manufacturer's website C. internet retailer D. specialty shops

C. internet retailer Internet retailers may provide useful information, but are not typically used as professional procurement sources. The designer can go directly to the manufacturer, manufacturer's showroom, or manufacturer's representative — whichever distribution channel that particular manufacturer has set up for working with the trade.

his classification of a roof assembly of a building depends on the costs/maintenance, appearance, energy conservation, ventilation of the attic/roof joist space, and weight of the roof parts (including imposed live loads of snow, etc.). A. low-slope or curved B. flat or steep C. low-slope or steep-slope D. parapet

C. low-slope or steep-slope Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Structural Systems for Buildings The roof assembly is classified as a low-slope or steep-slope system, depending on the costs/maintenance, appearance, energy conservation, ventilation of the attic/roof joist space, and weight of the roof parts (including imposed live loads of snow, etc.). One of the major features of the roof is to have proper drainage or slopes of the roof to promote water runoff and prevent ponding of water on the roof unless the building is designed with a water detention system for building thermal efficiency.

A project seeking LEED Certification needs a minimum number of credits under Building product disclosure and optimization — sourcing of raw materials, which gives preference for bio-based renewable materials. Which of the following materials should the designer reselect? A. bamboo flooring B. wheatgrass cabinetry C. marble flooring D. cotton batt insulation

C. marble flooring Source: Codes Guidebook for Interiors, Glossary Bio-based material: A commercial or industrial material or product that is composed of or derived from living matter such as plant, animal, and marine materials, or forestry materials. Products that meet this criterion include: wool carpets, bamboo flooring and paneling, strawboard, cotton batt insulation, linoleum flooring, poplar oriented strand board, sunflower seed board and wheatgrass cabinetry. Marble is not biobased, nor is it renewable. Once the quarry has been mined and is empty, the marble does not grow back. The designer should respecify the marble and select a bio-based renewable material instead.

What would a designer request from the contractor to learn about product safety information to include the health effects of a material, first aid, safe storage, disposal guidelines, protective equipment required for handling, and procedures for handling leaks and spills? A. manufacturers' safety report B. OSHA report C. materials safety data sheet D. manufacturers' safety data sheet

C. materials safety data sheet The interior designer should request that the contractor submit material safety data sheets for all products that may contain hazardous materials. A material safety data sheet (MSDS) is a listing of product safety information prepared by the manufacturer and marketers of products containing toxic chemicals. An MSDS is required to list the contents of and all health effects of the material, first aid, safe storage and disposal guidelines, protective equipment required of handling, and procedures for handling leaks and spills. It is intended for use by employers and emergency responders, rather than by consumers.

A new startup company is having you design their first office space. As a new company, they are unsure of the space requirements they will need for planning, but they do have a business plan mapping their expected employee growth. What would be the best method to determine their necessary square footage? A. determining the size of an object or piece of equipment that is critical to the space B. compare the client's existing workflow with the space available C. multiply the area one person needs by the total number of people in the same area D. based upon past experience, by comparing to a similar client you have worked with

C. multiply the area one person needs by the total number of people in the same area Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Information Analysis & Synthesis Since you have the given variable of expected employee growth, you can assume from a business occupancy type that a given worker needs approximately 100sf each to accomplish their daily tasks which should include ancillary space as well as circulation. This will give you a quick and decent expectation of how much square footage to plan for. Using a built-in set of rules or customs would be more appropriate for a space such as a basketball court. Determining the size of an object or piece of equipment would be more appropriate for a space such as a screen printing shop. Comparing the client's existing workflow may not be appropriate if they are looking to change their working model or their growth involved new departments/divisions not currently involved with their space.

While joining a professional Interior Design organization has many tangible and intangible benefits, the MOST IMPORTANT benefit of joining multiple professional organizations is: A. they help a designer meet more like-minded professionals. B. multiple organizations enhance the capabilities of a designer. C. they can each provide different benefits or advantages. D. they add to the cache of a professional designer's resume.

C. they can each provide different benefits or advantages. Source: Piotrowski, C. M. (2013). Professional Practice for Interior Designers., Professional Associations, Why Join a Professional Association? Why Join a Professional Association?There are many reasons one might decide to become a member of one of the professional associations.. In fact, some professionals belong to more than one association, as each can bring different benefits or professional advantages to a member.

Which is true about permanent tactile signage? A. when there is no wall space to the latch side of the door, including double-leaf doors, the sign must be placed to the left of the right hand door B. there must be a minimum clear floor space of 24" x 18" (605 mm x 455 mm) centered on the tactile characters and beyond the arc of the door swing C. must be mounted on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, so that there is a minimum clear floor space of 18" x 18" (455 mm x 455 mm) centered on the tactile characters beyond the arc of the door swing D. the mounting height of the base-line of the lowest tactile character must be 48" (810mm) maximum and 60" minimum to the baseline of the highest tactile character

C. must be mounted on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door, so that there is a minimum clear floor space of 18" x 18" (455 mm x 455 mm) centered on the tactile characters beyond the arc of the door swing Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 703 Signs Refer to A117.1 703.3.11 Location, and 2009 ICC A117.1 - FIG. 703.3.11 LOCATION OF SIGNS AT DOORS similar to: ADA 703.4.2 Location. Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with one active leaf, the sign shall be located on the inactive leaf. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door. Where there is no wall space at the latch side of a single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the nearest adjacent wall. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a clear floor space of 18 inches (455 mm) minimum by 18 inches (455 mm) minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. EXCEPTION: Signs with tactile characters shall be permitted on the push side of doors with closers and without hold-open devices.

If a material does not ignite and burn it is considered to be? A. flame resistant B. fire resistant C. noncombustible D. fire retardant

C. noncombustible Noncombustible: material that will not ignite and burn when subject to fire.

When a fabric has been fire-retardant treated, it will A. resist ignition B. contribute to smoke inhibition C. not burn D. have a lower flame spread

C. not burn A fire-retardant (or flame-retardant) treated fabric may ignite, but it will not support continued burning.

When do warranties typically commence? A. once certificate of occupancy has been received B. once owner has inspected and approved the goods C. on the date of substantial completion D. when the items are installed

C. on the date of substantial completion Substantial completion is when the work is sufficiently complete per the contract documents so that the owner can occupy or utilize the work for its intended purpose. The substantial date of completion is important because it has legal implications. For example, in many states, the statute of limitations for errors possibly caused by the interior designer begins with the date of substantial completion. Warranties usually commence (go into effect) on the date of substantial completion.

Which of the following are conceptual plan arrangements? A. open, linear, axial, adjacent B. open, centralized, enveloped, linear C. open, clustered, linear, grid D. open, transitional, centralized, grid

C. open, clustered, linear, grid Source: Ching, F.D. K. Architecture: Form, Space, and Order., Form The correct answer is "open, clustered, linear, grid." For interior design and architecture, the configuration of the plan is one of the most basic conceptual ideas. A plan takes on particular importance for the interior designer because the existing ceiling or roof plane typically limits the third dimension of height in interior design. Regardless of the enclosing walls, a plan can be viewed conceptually as open, linear, axial, centralized, grid, and clustered. Adjacent, enveloped, and transitional are NOT terms describing contextual plan arrangements.

Which procedure is used to refine the budget as design progresses, when the designer and client have a good idea of the exact scope of work? A. itemization B. matrix C. parameter D. take off

C. parameter As design progresses and the interior designer and client have a better idea of the exact scope of the work, the budget can be refined. The procedure most often used is the parameter method, which involves an expanded itemization of construction quantities and furnishings and assignment of unit costs to these quantities.

Following the final design development meeting, the client has requested to see a revised budget. At this point in the design process, what estimating method would provide the most appropriate budget for the client's review? A. detailed quantity takeoffs B. matrix costing C. parameter method D. square footage cost

C. parameter method Source: 9425, David Kent Ballast, FAIA, NCIDQ-Cert. N. Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Cost Estimating and Budgeting, Methods of Estimating, Parameter At this point in the design, scope has been fully established and finishes and materials should have been decided although the exact final specifications may still be in the works. The parameter method using the totaled unit pricing per material type would provide the most accurate pricing at this point until all selections have been finalized. Once final specifications have been decided, detailed quantity takeoffs can be utilized for a more exact budget. The square footage method is typically used earlier on in the design process for a more general budget speculation. Matrix costing would be used if there were pricing alternatives that needed to be considered.

What does the symbol indicate? A. partial elevation for the wall indicated B. a wall section C. partition tag D. wall needs to be furred out for plumbing

C. partition tag The "P4" symbol indicates a partition tag. The specific information about the partition will be noted in a schedule.

What are the three basic adjacency needs? A. economy, people and products B. juxtaposed, transitional, interlaced C. people, products and information D. function, interaction and efficiency

C. people, products and information Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Information Analysis & Synthesis There are three basic types of adjacency needs: people, product, and information.

All of the following are true about suspended acoustical ceilings EXCEPT? A. is perforated or fissured in various ways to absorb sound B. consists of thin panels of wood fiber, mineral fiber or glass fiber set in a support grid of metal framing C. prevent sound transmission to an appreciable extent D. offer easy access to electrical and mechanical components in the plenum

C. prevent sound transmission to an appreciable extent While suspended acoustical ceilings can absorb sound for better acoustical qualities within a space, they do not prevent sound transmission between spaces to any appreciable extent.

What type of specification gives a designer complete control over what is installed? A. master specifications B. reference standard specifications C. proprietary specification D. base bid specifications

C. proprietary specification Source: Qpractice Answer Vault, Specification Types Proprietary specifications are the most restrictive specifications in that they call out a specific manufacturer's product. These give the interior designer complete control over what is installed.

Before placing a wood floor over a concrete substrate which of the following is the most critical consideration? A. hairline fractures in the subfloor B. level substrate by applying a plywood subfloor over the concrete C. test concrete for moisture level D. choice of installation method - glue down or nail or snap and lock

C. test concrete for moisture level Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Floor Finishes, Wood and Bamboo flooring Solid wood floors react to the dryness of heated buildings by contracting, leaving gaps between the planks. When the humidity returns with warm weather, the planks expand and the gaps disappear. Expansion gaps are left where the wood floor meets the wall to accommodate these dimensional changes. Due to concerns about moisture, solid wood strip and plank floors are usually installed only on wooden subfloors at or above grade level. Both subfloors and the finished layer of wood should be checked for moisture content before installation. Solid wood flooring is installed over a plywood subfloor or on wooden sleepers. Tongue-and-groove wood floor strips or planks are blind nailed or stapled; butt-jointed flooring is face nailed. An underlayment, typically exterior-grade plywood, may be required for installation on a concrete slab In a floating floor installation, the floor planks are not mechanically fastened to the subfloor. An acoustic underlayment can be added to reduce sound transmission. Whatever type of wood flooring is selected, it is critical that the substrate be free of excess moisture and alkalinity. This is usually problematic when tile or other flooring material is being placed on a concrete subfloor.

What does the following diagram tell you about adjacencies in a particular building? A. That the gym and coffee shop is a mandatory adjacency B. That the executive offices and reception are a secondary adjacency C. that the accounting department should be on floor 3 along with the executive offices, began and support department D. that the mail room and reception should be adjacent to each other

C. that the accounting department should be on floor 3 along with the executive offices, began and support department

In developing a signage system for a health care clinic, the designer decides that the room identification signs should be mounted perpendicular to the wall near the door to each room. What would be of LEAST concern in the design work? A. the mounting height to the center of the sign B. whether or not the width of the accessible route was reduced C. the color of the lettering and its background D. the amount the Braille lettering is raised above the surface

C. the color of the lettering and its background Source: 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 703 Signs Per ADA 703 Signs: 703.1 General. Signs shall comply with 703. Where both visual and tactile characters are required, either one sign with both visual and tactile characters, or two separate signs, one with visual, and one with tactile characters, shall be provided. Wayfinding application for barrier-free design requires that objects do not protrude into the accessible path in such a way as to present a hazard. In addition, tactile signs must have a minimum 1/32 in raised surface, and accessible routes must not be reduced in width.

In developing a signage system for a health care clinic, the designer decides that the room identification signs should be mounted perpendicular to the wall near the door to each room. What would be of LEAST concern in the design work? A. whether or not the width of the accessible route was reduced B. the mounting height to the center of the sign C. the color of the lettering and its background D. the amount the Braille lettering is raised above the surface

C. the color of the lettering and its background Source: 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 703 Signs Per ADA 703 Signs: 703.1 General. Signs shall comply with 703. Where both visual and tactile characters are required, either one sign with both visual and tactile characters, or two separate signs, one with visual, and one with tactile characters, shall be provided. Wayfinding application for barrier-free design requires that objects do not protrude into the accessible path in such a way as to present a hazard. In addition, tactile signs must have a minimum 1/32 in raised surface, and accessible routes must not be reduced in width.

What are two (2) critical areas of the Tenant Work Letter? A. the construction and the schedule/timeline for when the improvements will be completed B. the construction allowance and who will bear the costs of the tenant improvements C. the construction allowance and the detailed explanation of what is included as well as the parameters under which the work is to be performed D. who will bear the costs of the tenant improvements, and the schedule/timeline for when the improvements will be completed

C. the construction allowance and the detailed explanation of what is included as well as the parameters under which the work is to be performed The tenant work letter is an important part of any commercial lease. The letter serves as an agreement between the landlord and tenant that details the initial tenant improvements (TI) to be built. The two critical areas of the tenant work letter are the construction allowance and a detailed explanation of what is included, who is responsible and the conditions under which the work will be performed.

Embodied energy is defined as? A. the energy and resources required to dispose of product at the end of the product's life cycle B. the energy that a green product will save over the course of its life cycle C. the energy required by a product or material for its extraction as a raw material, initial processing, and subsequent manufacture into a finished product D. the process of inspecting, testing, starting up and adjusting building systems and then verifying and documenting that they are operating as intended and meet the design criteria of the contract documents

C. the energy required by a product or material for its extraction as a raw material, initial processing, and subsequent manufacture into a finished product Source: Piotrowski, C. M. Designing Commercial Interiors., Healthcare Interiors, Sustainable Design Embodied energy is the total energy required to extract, produce, fabricate and deliver a material to a job site. This includes: the collection of raw materials, the energy used to extract and process the raw materials, transportation from the original site to the processing plant or factory, the energy required to turn the raw materials into a finished product, the energy required to transport the material to the job site Designers should seek to choose products based on their total life-cycle cost, including maintenance, durability, and embodied energy.

Planning requires setting requirements in which three critical areas? A. scheduling, time, and fees B. time, quality, and quantity C. time, fees, and quality D. scheduling, fees, and quantity

C. time, fees, and quality The project manager should be involved, from the initial determination of project scope and estimation of fees to the final follow-up. Planning involves setting requirements in three critical areas: time, fees, and quality.

All of the following are true about the use of consultants EXCEPT? A. when the owner contracts directly with the consultant, the interior designer may lose some ability to direct the consultant B. it is the interior designer's responsibility to inform the consultant about the applicable code requirements C. the interior designer is responsible for code compliance of all consultants' work D. the interior designer should involve the consultant in the project as early as possible

C. the interior designer is responsible for code compliance of all consultants' work Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Project Management, Consultant Coordination Consultants may be contracted directly with either the designer or the owner. When contracted directly with the owner, the interior designer sometimes loses some ability to direct the consultant. The consultant should be involved in the project as early as possible. Their advice is vital in determining the project's scope and understanding both the client's problems and other professionals' concerns working on the project. The interior designer should inform consultants about applicable codes and how their design decisions may affect code. Because the interior designer is not a licensed engineer, electrician, etc., the consultant is responsible for code compliance of their own work.

According to the Uniform Commercial Code (UCC), all of the following are true about FOB Factory except? A. buyer owns furniture once it leaves factory B. title passes to the buyer after the goods are consigned at the factory C. the manufacturer is responsible for the loss or damage during shipping D. buyer pays transportation costs

C. the manufacturer is responsible for the loss or damage during shipping FOB Factory means that the title is transferred at the factory, the buyer pays the transportation costs, and the manufacturer is not responsible for the loss or damage during shipping. Title passes to the buyer after the goods are consigned at the factory.

In regards to means of egress, the travel distance is? A. the distance between two exits within a space B. a fully enclosed portion of an exit that is only used as a means of egress and provides for a protected path of egress either in a vertical or horizontal direction C. the measurement of the distance between the most remote occupiable point of an area or room to the entrance of the nearest exit that serves it. It is part of the exit access and measured in a straight line along the path of egress travel D. the distance traveled to reach a fire rated area of refuge

C. the measurement of the distance between the most remote occupiable point of an area or room to the entrance of the nearest exit that serves it. It is part of the exit access and measured in a straight line along the path of egress travel Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Means of Egress, Travel Distance Travel Distance - The overall distance from the most remote point within a room/area/or story to the exit that serves it, measured along the natural and unobstructed path of egress travel. The building code and the LSC maximum travel distances may differ. In most cases, the shortest required distance applies. Also check for exceptions to the allowable travel distances based on sprinkler requirements and occupancy.

How is CAL TB117-2013 different from the previous CAL TB-117? A. the newer version uses an open flame test and now requires all furniture manufacturers to use flame retardants on filling materials B. the newer version requires the smolder test for all furniture manufactured in the United States and furniture imported from abroad before it can be sold on the open market. C. the newer version uses a smolder test instead of an open flame test to allow manufactures a choice in using flame retardant chemicals in filling materials D. the newer version allows manufacturers with proven industry safety records to choose between the smolder test and the open flame test

C. the newer version uses a smolder test instead of an open flame test to allow manufactures a choice in using flame retardant chemicals in filling materials The newly revised CAL TB-117 uses the smolder test instead of the open flame test to provide furniture manufacturers with the option on whether to use flame retardant on their filling materials. The flame retardants used on furniture have been found to be toxic and may cause potential harm to human health, including one particular chemical that is named as a known carcinogen by the California State government.

The two most important factors in determining the number of exits required for a particular room or space are: A. the occupant load and building size B. the exit widths and common path of egress travel C. the occupancy and the occupant load D. occupancy and the distance from the room exit to the building exit

C. the occupancy and the occupant load Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Means of Egress, Means of Egress Capacity The number of exits is based on the occupant load of the space or building. Use the occupant load tables in the building codes to determine the occupant load of the area requiring exits. If determining the required number of exits for an entire building, the occupant load must be calculated for each floor or story. Each floor is considered separately.

When goods are shipped FOB destination, who has title to them while they are in transit? A. the designer B. the carrier C. the seller D. the insurer

C. the seller FOB (free on board) destination means that the seller retains title to the goods while in transit, because the title is transferred at the destination (delivery). FOB (shipping point) means that title is transferred to the buyer when the goods leave the manufacturer or seller.

Ergonomics is best described as? A. the correctness of fit between objects and spaces and the needs of the people using those objects and spaces B. the measurement of the size, proportions, and range of motion of the human body C. the study of the relationship between human physiology and the physical environment D. the interrelated observations and theories about how people use space as a specialized elaboration of culture

C. the study of the relationship between human physiology and the physical environment Source: Kilmer, R., Kilmer, W. O. Designing Interiors., Programming Interior Spaces; Furniture Ergonomics is the study of the relationship between human physiology and the physical environment. Ergonomics uses the information developed by anthropometrics, but goes further by studying exactly how humans interact with the physical objects such as chairs, controls, desks and more. Human beings vary in shape, size, and age, producing a wide range of anthropometric dimensions. Most furniture and other parts of our built environment are designed to accommodate an "average" size, based on statistical studies of populations. Some furniture, like ergonomic office chairs, are kinetic, providing comfort for extended use by supporting the human form as it shifts and changes throughout the day's work activities. Self-adjusting chairs support the body in an upright working position or adapt to a reclining position as the user leans back while the feet remain on the floor. These chairs reduce physical discomfort while contributing to user satisfaction and increased productivity. Other seating and desks can also be adjusted to accommodate different body dimensions or positions, such as to standing height. The designer should consider the specific situation when applying ergonomics, since needs may vary considerably depending upon the application. The needs of a mixed group of users will be quite different from those of a specific single user.

Which of the following tests is not one that is used measure the moisture level of a concrete floor? A. calcium chloride test B. mat test C. titration test D. relative humidity test

C. titration test Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Finishes, Testing Concrete for Moisture Content and Alkalinity The titration test measures for alkalinity, and is used in addition to pH test testing to concrete prior to application of tile adhesives or coatings. Alkalinity in concrete can cause two types of problems. High alkalinity on the surface of a slab can damage a tile installation by causing the adhesive to re-emulsify, or return to its original liquid state. It can also cause problems with other coatings. All others measure for moisture content.

Which of the following tests is not one that is used measure the moisture level of a concrete floor? A. relative humidity test B. mat test C. titration test D. calcium chloride test

C. titration test Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Finishes, Testing Concrete for Moisture Content and Alkalinity The titration test measures for alkalinity, and is used in addition to pH test testing to concrete prior to application of tile adhesives or coatings. Alkalinity in concrete can cause two types of problems. High alkalinity on the surface of a slab can damage a tile installation by causing the adhesive to re-emulsify, or return to its original liquid state. It can also cause problems with other coatings. All others measure for moisture content.

Why is it important to coordinate the locations of audible and visual (A/V) alarms with the appropriate consulting engineer? A. to ensure that all doors open to allow the alarm to notify occupants within exit stairways B. to ensure that audible and visual (A/V) alarms are placed within the exit stairs C. to ensure that audible and visual (A/V) alarms can be seen and heard where required D. to ensure the appropriate strobe and horn pattern is used according to project location

C. to ensure that audible and visual (A/V) alarms can be seen and heard where required Source: Kennon, K. E., Harmon, S. K. The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., Fire Protection Systems, Alarm Systems, Visual and Audible Alarm Systems Visible alarms are not required in exits such as stairwells because of the distraction and/or tripping hazards they may create. It may be necessary to coordinate placement of the audible and visual alarm systems with an engineer based on the design of the space to ensure that the alarms can be seen and heard and be in appropriate locations in the design. In particular, the distance from the origin of the alarm, walls, and closed doors could reduce the level of sound.

The Greenguard Environmental Institute follows ASTM Standards D5116 and D6670 primarily for what purpose? A. to establish the allowable levels of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) in building products. B. to establish radon remediation and mitigation standards for trained contractors. C. to identify the required emissions levels of products before certification by the organization. D. to certify a company using approved methods for removal and disposal of lead paint.

C. to identify the required emissions levels of products before certification by the organization. Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Sustainable Design, Indoor Air Quality Standards Greenguard Environmental Institute: The Greenguard Environmental Institute tests products following ASTM Standards D5116 and D6670, the EPA's testing protocol for furniture, and the state of Washington's protocol for interior furnishings and construction materials. Greenguard has a list of the emission levels that products must meet before they are certified by the organization.

Ethical behavior of an Interior Designer is arguably the most important part of being a professional. According to both IIDA and ASID, what is the MOST IMPORTANT consideration for all aspects of an Interior Designer's work? A. to protect the confidentiality between client and designer. B. to guard against unlicensed use of intellectual property. C. to protect the health, and welfare of the client and public. D. to always perform services in the best interest of their clients.

C. to protect the health, and welfare of the client and public. Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Interior Design Business Practices, Professional Ethics From the ASID code of ethics: Responsibility to the Public: The interior designer must at all times consider the health, safety, and welfare of the public in spaces he or she designs. Responsibility to the Client: The designer must perform services in the best interests of the client as long as those interests do not violate laws, regulations, and codes; the designer's aesthetic judgment; or the health, safety, or welfare of the occupants.

All of the following are examples of trim or molding EXCEPT? A. casing B. chair rail C. wainscoting D. panel

C. wainscoting Source: International Building Code, Chapter 2 Definitions; Chapter 8 Interior Finishes All of these are examples of molding or trim except wainscoting, which is traditional wood paneling that extends from the floor up a portion of the wall, typically ending at the chair rail. Interior wall and ceiling finish is defined in the International Building Code (IBC) as exposed interior surfaces of buildings including but not limited to: fixed or movable walls or partitions, toilet room privacy partitions, columns, wall and ceiling finishes including wainscoting, paneling, or other finish, applied either structurally or for decoration, acoustical correction, surface insulation, or similar purposes, but not including trim. Trim is defined as picture molds, chair rails, baseboards, handrails, door and window frames, and similar decorative or protective materials used in fixed applications. The distinction is important in terms of classification and testing for fire performance. Requirements do not apply to some types of trim, including handrails and guardrails. Nor do they apply to materials that are less than 0.036 in (0.91 mm) thick and applied directly to the surfaces of walls or ceilings.

On which drawings would you find the abbreviations NIC, BRK, FPL? A. lighting plans B. power plans C. working drawings D. millwork elevations

C. working drawings On the floor plans, also called working drawings, you may see abbreviations like: NIC: not in contractBRK: breakFPL: fireplace As abbreviations may vary, these should also be listed in the drawing legend.

Parameter Method (Estimating)

Calculates an estimated cost per square foot for many types of materials so that the designer can understand cost implications of each

AATCC 8

Colorfastness to Crocking

AATCC 16

Colorfastness to Light, known as the Fade-Ometer test Fade-Ometer tests colorfastness to light. This test simulates accelerated light aging and evaluates a coated fabric's ability to resist fading, gloss change, and surface deterioration

Where is the junction box for a power pole located? A.. plenum B. access panel C. circuit breaker box D. non-load bearing partition

Commercial construction includes a plenum space above finished ceiling for mechanical systems, wiring and other building services. A J-box for branching or connecting electrical circuits would be within the plenum space. Wiring is concealed within a conduit. J-boxes will be exposed or mounted on the wall or finished ceiling for lighting or other features requiring an electrical connection.

What is regionalism

Consciousness of, and loyalty to, a distinct region with a population that shares similarities.

Which type of drawing is used to show items that are up to 48" (1.2 m) AFF? A. reflected ceiling plan B. orthographic projection C. floor plan D. axonometric

Construction plans, also called floor plans or partition plans, are the most common type of floor plan and are required for every project regardless of size or complexity. Construction plans are views seen as though a building were cut horizontally about 4 ft (1.2 m) above the floor with the top section removed.

C2C

Cradle to Cradle, sustainable zero waste product development

AATCC 8

Crocking Resistance Test Determines the resistance of a colored textile to transfer its color from its surface to other surfaces by rubbing.

In which situation should an interior designer include a furniture plan as part of their construction drawing package? A - If the existing furniture is being reused/relocated B - A furniture plan should never be included in a construction drawing package as it is confusing to mix construction and furniture drawings. A furniture plan should always be separate. C - To coordinate the location of electrical outlets in relation to the location of furniture D - Both A and C E - To show locations of new furniture only. The client takes care of any furniture to be reused

D - Both A and C Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Furnishings and Equipment Plans Furniture plans show the location of each piece of furniture - both reused and/or new with a corresponding code number that identify each piece. A furniture plan can be included in the construction drawing package, however the furniture plan itself should not be combined on the same page as interior construction as it can cause confusion.

Which of the following hatch patterns represent batt insulation in a wall type? A B C D

D. Source: Interior Design Reference Manual 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Materials in Section The line type shown in option D represents batt insulations. Option C is insulation but it represents rigid insulation. The other options represent concrete and concrete masonry.

You are designing a small project that measures 20′ (6096 mm) x 16′ (4877 mm). The total FF&E budget is $18,000. You have spent $15,000 for furniture and equipment and $1900.00 for painting and wall coverings (installed). How much per yard can you spend on carpet that is 12′ (3658 mm) wide? A. $12.75 B. $15.45 C. $30.90 D. $25.50

D. $25.50 Subtract the amount spent from the total budget to get the budget remaining $18,000 - $16,900 = $1,100. Calculate linear feet of carpet needed to cover 20 x 16 space 16 + 16 = 32 linear feet (2 strips of 12′ wide carpet 16′ long). Multiply linear feet by 12 to get total square feet needed then divide by 9 (9 square feet per square yard) 32 linear feet x 12 (12′ wide carpet roll goods) = 384 sq feet divided by 9 = 42.6 sq yds Round up to 43 square yards — carpet sold per square yard price Divide budget available by sq yds.$1100 divided by 43 square yards = 25.58 You can spend up to $25.58 per square yard, so $25.50 is the best answer.

What is the minimum height of an accessible wall outlet? A. 9" (225 mm) B. 18" (450 mm) C. 12" (300 mm) D. 15" (375 mm)

D. 15" (375 mm) Source: ADA.gov, ADA 309.3 Height. Standard height wall outlets typically range from around 15-18 inches (380-450 mm) above above the finished floor. Per ADA, The height for an accessible wall outlet is 15 inches (380 mm) minimum above the finish floor or ground. You should also review 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities for the reach ranges for obstructed forward and side reach. ADA 309.3 Height. Operable parts shall be placed within one or more of the reach ranges specified in 308. 308.2 Forward Reach.308.2.1 Unobstructed. Where a forward reach is unobstructed, the high forward reach shall be 48 inches (1220 mm) maximum and the low forward reach shall be 15 inches (380 mm) minimum above the finish floor or ground. 308.3 Side Reach.308.3.1 Unobstructed. Where a clear floor or ground space allows a parallel approach to an element and the side reach is unobstructed, the high side reach shall be 48 inches (1220 mm) maximum and the low side reach shall be 15 inches (380 mm) minimum above the finish floor or ground.

What is the MINIMUM depth of an accessible lavatory? A. 9 inches (230 mm) B. 11 inches (280 mm) C. 25 inches (635 mm) D. 17 inches (430 mm)

D. 17 inches (430 mm) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 306.2.3 Minimum Depth Refer to both A117 and ADA 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design306.2.3 Minimum Required Depth. Where toe clearance is required at an element as part of a clear floor space, the toe clearance shall extend 17 inches (430 mm) minimum under the element.

How much fabric width is required to create drapery with a fullness of 150%? A. 2 times the finished fabric width B. 1.5 times the finished fabric width C. 3 times the finished fabric width D. 2.5 times the finished fabric width

D. 2.5 times the finished fabric width Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition. [VitalSource Bookshelf]., Wall and Window Finishes, Draperies and Curtains The fullness of drapery is a measure of how much of the fabric is taken up in pleating. For example a 48″ wide width of fabric will pleat down to a finished width of 16-24″ depending upon how much fullness is desired. There are 3 standard fullnesses used for drapery:2:1, 2 to 1 or 100%2.5:1, 2 1/2 to 1 or 150%3:1, 3 to 1 or 200% 2:1 is used for bulky thick fabrics or less expensive treatments where cost savings are important, such as an apartment, hotel, office or commercial space. A fabric width of 48″ will pleat down to 24″ using a 2:1 fullness. 2.5:1 Most custom draperies, lined and unlined, are finished at 2 1/2 to 1 or 150%. 3:1 Sheer lightweight fabrics are usually pleated at 200% or 3:1.

What scale would you typically draw small and complex construction details in? A. 3/16" = 1'-0" B. 1/2" = 1'-0" C. 1/8" = 1'-0" D. 3" = 1'-0"

D. 3" = 1'-0" Source: Elevations, Sections and Detail Drawings On detail drawings that are small and complex it is difficult to determine what is happening in the construction. These details should be drawn at 3" = 1'-0" to help make them larger.

Horizontal grab bars at the side-wall of an accessible toilet must be mounted at: A. 34" (850 mm) - 42" (1060 mm) AFF B. 30" (760 mm) - 36" (900 mm) AFF C. 36" (900 mm) - 42" (1060 mm) AFF D. 33" (840 mm) - 36" (900 mm) AFF

D. 33" (840 mm) - 36" (900 mm) AFF Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 609.4 Position of Grab Bars. 609.4.1 General.Grab bars shall be installed in a horizontal position, 33 inches (840 mm) minimum and 36 inches (915 mm) maximum above the floor measured to the top of the gripping surface... Refer to FIG 604.5.1 SIDE WALL GRAB BAR FOR WATER CLOSET

As measured from the nosing, a handrail for barrier-free design must have a height of: A. 28 to 32in B. 32 to 36in C. 30 to 34in D. 34 to 38in

D. 34 to 38in Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 505 Handrails As measured from the nosing, a handrail for barrier-free design must be 34 in to 38 in high. Please review Fig. 505.4 HANDRAIL HEIGHT See also 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 505 Handrails 505.4 Height. Top of gripping surfaces of handrails shall be 34 inches (865 mm) minimum and 38 inches (965 mm) maximum vertically above walking surfaces, stair nosings, and ramp surfaces. Handrails shall be at a consistent height above walking surfaces, stair nosings, and ramp surfaces.

Upper shelves located above an accessible (barrier free) work surface must not exceed: A. 36" (912 mm) H B. 44" (1100 mm) H C. 60" (1500 mm) H D. 48" (1200 mm) H

D. 48" (1200 mm) H Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 308 Reach Ranges Per 308.2.2 Obstructed High Reach. The maximum allowable height would be 48 inches (1220 mm). Please refer to the code to note the conditions which may affect this depending upon the depth of the work surface.

All of the following are true about gypsum wallboard EXCEPT? A. the main source of synthetic gypsum in North America is flue-gas desulfurization B. synthetic gypsum is chemically identical to natural mined gypsum C. its manufacture, use, and disposal has an effect on the environment D. 70% of the industry's total use of gypsum is synthetic gypsum

D. 70% of the industry's total use of gypsum is synthetic gypsum About 28% of the industry's total use of gypsum is synthetic gypsum. Synthetic gypsum is chemically identical to natural, mined gypsum but is a byproduct of various manufacturing, industrial, or chemical processes. The main source of synthetic gypsum in North America is flue-gas desulfurization.

Which test determines the colorfastness under light exposure of textile materials? A. crocking resistance test B. light resistance test C. blue scale test D. AATCC 16

D. AATCC 16 Source: AATC, Textile testing The AATCC 16 (American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorist) test uses a Fade-Ometer to determine the color fastness under light exposure of textile materials using six different test options. The most common test option uses xenon arc lamp with continuous light. Although many tests evaluate aspects of colorfastness, panel and upholstery fabrics are most commonly tested for Colorfastness to Light (AATCC 16) and Colorfastness to Crocking or rubbing (AATCC 8). Read more: Ballast, D. K., FAIA, 9425, N. N. PDF - Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam, eTextbook. Selection of Materials, Finishes, and Furnishings, Standards, Wearability and Durability Standards

The performance level standards that mechanical engineers and refrigeration specialists use are developed by: A. ANSI B. OSHA C. ASTM D. ASHRAE

D. ASHRAE Source: Kennon, K. E. (2018). Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Designing for Human Health and Safety, Building Codes and Standards, Standards and Organizations ASHRAE®, formerly known as the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air‐Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), was formed in 1959 to sponsor research projects and to develop performance level standards for HVAC and refrigeration systems. Mechanical engineers and refrigeration specialists and installers use ASHRAE standards.

Which of these are a type of wayfinding? A. Change in Floor Direction B. Wall Color C. Signage D. All of the Above

D. All of the Above Source: Piotrowski, C. M. (2016). Designing Commercial Interiors., Lodging Facilities, Wayfinding Wayfinding uses signs, maps, graphics, and directional arrows to help individuals find their way around complex properties and building interiors. Wayfinding can also be accomplished by changes in flooring materials. The main traffic path can be in one material, with other areas in another. For example, it is common for the main traffic path in the lobby to be finished as carpet or hard-surface material while the flooring for an adjoining lobby seating area is in another type of material. The area in front of the elevator bank is frequently a different material than what is used in the corridors, and, of course, wayfinding assistance can also be achieved with changes in wall colors.

The following image depicts what style of window covering? A. Pleated shades B. Balloon shades C. Roman shades D. Austrian shades

D. Austrian shades Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition. [VitalSource Bookshelf], Wall and Window Finishes, Window Treatments, Shades, Window Shade Types Austrian shades typically feature sheer or semi-sheer fabric gathered vertically by cords into soft horizontal scallops. Roman, Austrian and balloon shades are similar. Roman shades draw up into neat horizontal folds, Austrian shades into scalloped folds, and balloon shades into loose billows. All have rings on the back through which cords are strung. Pleated shades feature evenly spaced, crisp folds of fabric that compress tightly into a compact accordion shape when raised. The defining feature of Austrian shades is that they fold into scallops when opened.

What organization develops standards related to the commercial furniture industry? A. ICC B. OSHA C. ANSI D. BIFMA

D. BIFMA Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Furniture and Furnishings Documents and Procurement, Furniture and Furnishings Standards Many of the standards for commercial office furniture have been promoted by the Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association (BIFMA). The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) has approved these standards.

The program that has been developed by BIFMA to address sustainability in the contract furniture industry is called the: A. SMaRT (Sustainable Materials Rating Technology) Program B. Greenguard Product Guide C. Energy Star Program D. Furniture Sustainability Standard

D. Furniture Sustainability Standard Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Sustainable Design, Product Certification, BIFMA International BIFMA has also developed standard BIFMA e3, Furniture Sustainability Standard. This standard establishes criteria in four areas: energy and atmosphere human and ecosystem health materials corporate social responsibility Based on a point system by an accredited third party certifier (e.g., NSF International or Scientific Certification Systems), a product can achieve a level rating of 1, 2, or 3.

All of the following relate to the design principle proportion EXCEPT? A. modular system B. golden section C. Fibonacci series D. Gestalt psychology

D. Gestalt psychology Source: Jones, M., L. Beginnings of Interior Environments, 11/e, ELEMENTS AND PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN, Principles of Design Gestalt psychology holds that humans innately perceive things as a whole and has nothing to do with the design principle, proportion. All the other items relate directly to proportion

Which of the following tasks is an interior designer not responsible for when acting as prime consultant? A. Informing consultants of any design decisions that may have code implications B. Coordinate activities of various consultants involved in the project C. Ensuring that each consultant's work complies with applicable codes D. Being liable to the owner for code compliance of the consultant's work

D. Being liable to the owner for code compliance of the consultant's work Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Project Management, Consultant Coordination Although the interior designer is responsible for ensuring that drawings and specifications conform to the applicable codes, the consultants are responsible for code compliance regarding their area of work. Once the consultants are retained, the interior designer should inform the appropriate consultants about the applicable code requirements. The interior designer is also responsible for informing the consultants of any design decisions that may have code implications. Although the interior designer is responsible for ensuring that the drawings and specifications conform to the applicable codes, such as those in the project AHJ, only the consultants can be responsible for code compliance regarding their area of work in the same way the interior designer is responsible to the owner. The interior designer is not a licensed engineer, electrician, etc. so is not qualified to determine whether the engineer's work meets the applicable code requirements, only that they are using the correct versions of the code for the project.

This invoice includes what type of additional expenses billed to the client? A. Bidding & Negotiation B. $8.00 C. Construction Documents D. Bid set

D. Bid set Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration This invoice shows additional expenses being billed to the client for plotting for a bid set for the plumber.

According to the invoice document, what phase is the project now in and what percentage of the invoice accounts for this phase? A. Bidding & negotiation, 86.34% B. Construction documents, 89.94% C. Construction documents, 100% D. Bidding & negotiation, 10.06%

D. Bidding & negotiation, 10.06% Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration This invoice shows 2 phases, construction documents and bidding and negotiation. Since the project has moved into bidding and negotiation, the next phase, this is where the project currently stands. The invoice shows in the far left hand column billing for 10.06% of the current phase.

Which information should the designer know first when designing a home with a passive solar heating system? A. Orientation of the building to the sun. B. Area of glazing required to achieve desired temperatures. C. Quantity of thermal mass needed to store solar heat. D. Climate zone in which the project will be constructed.

D. Climate zone in which the project will be constructed. Source: Green Building Illustrated, Ching, F.D. K., Shapiro, I. M., Community and Site Passive solar energy refers to the harvesting of solar heat without the use of mechanical or electrical systems, such as pumps or fans. Climate zones substantially impact green building design. Whether the climate is cold, hot, or mixed—such as hot and humid or hot and dry—will have an impact on building design. The loads that climate zones affect are primarily outdoor temperature, outdoor humidity, and solar radiation. These impacts can be so great as to substantially change how the same type of building will be designed in different climates. Differences in climate affect all aspects of a building design, including wall materials and assembly, size and orientation of windows, heating system selection, and methods for controlling the moisture due to varying dew point temperatures within the building envelope. Regional microclimates can further impact the duration of sunlight during the day, the amount of rain, local wind speeds, and type of vegetation available for landscaping.

A separate finish plan is used to communicate which of the following? A. To communicate a large amount of complex information in a small space. B. Specification items, such as installation instructions. C. The building configuration, including all walls, dimensions, existing construction to remain, references to elevations and details drawn elsewhere, room names (and numbers, if used), floor material indications, millwork, plumbing fixtures, built-in fixtures, stairs, special equipment, and notes as required to explain items on the plan.

D. Complex finish configurations, when there are several finish types on each wall. Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Finish Schedules and Finish Plans A separate finish plan is used to communicate complex finish configurations, when there are multiple finishes on each wall. The building configuration relates to the construction plan. Lists containing each room and the types/specifics of finishes, and communication of a large amount of complex information in a small space has to do with the finish schedule. Installation instructions are not listed on the plans, but as part of the specifications.

In which situation should an interior designer include a furniture plan as part of their construction drawing package? A. A If the existing furniture is being reused/relocated B. B - A furniture plan should never be included in a construction drawing package as it is confusing to mix construction and furniture drawings. A furniture plan should always be separate. C. C - To coordinate the location of electrical outlets in relation to the location of furniture D. D - Both A and C E. E - To show locations of new furniture only. The client takes care of any furniture to be reused

D. D - Both A and C Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Furnishings and Equipment Plans Furniture plans show the location of each piece of furniture - both reused and/or new with a corresponding code number that identify each piece. A furniture plan can be included in the construction drawing package, however the furniture plan itself should not be combined on the same page as interior construction as it can cause confusion.

Which types of luminaires require a ballast? A. Xenon and fluorescent B. LED and HID C. LED and fluorescent D. HID and fluorescent

D. HID and fluorescent Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Building Systems and Construction, Fluorescent, High-Intensity Discharge LED luminaires do not require ballasts, but do require a transformer or driver which is sometimes incorporated into the lamp Xenon luminaires do not require ballasts Both HID and fluorescent luminaires require ballasts to transform the voltage for the fixture

Which of the following light fixtures would not be appropriate to use in a residential space? A. fluorescent troffer B. incandescent track system C. halogen track system D. HID down light

D. HID down light Source: Interior Lighting for Designers, HIGH‐INTENSITY DISCHARGE SOURCES The HID lamp warm-up process can take three to seven minutes, depending on ambient temperature conditions, so this not appropriate for residential use where someone would want the light to come on instantly.

The general contractor discovers a discrepancy in dimensions on the designer's working drawings for the height of a soffit, and calls the designer to clarify. The designer makes a decision, and the contractor frames the soffit accordingly. During the next field visit, the designer finds that the direction to the contractor was incorrect. A. Who pays for the reconstruction? B. Construction damage insurance. C. Contractor's liability insurance. D. Designer's errors and omissions insurance. E. Designer's liability insurance. Source: Piotrowski, Christine M. Professional Practice for Interior Designers. Available from: VitalSource Bookshelf, (6th Edition). Wiley Professional Development (P&T), 2020., Advice and Counsel There are many situations that require an interior designer to depend upon professional liability insurance. This type of insurance protects the designer in the event of actions, errors, or omissions during the course of work on a project. This type of professional liability insurance is often called E&O, for errors and omissions coverage. E&O can also provide coverage for claims should a court claim be decided against a designer.

D. Designer's errors and omissions insurance. Source: Piotrowski, Christine M. Professional Practice for Interior Designers. Available from: VitalSource Bookshelf, (6th Edition). Wiley Professional Development (P&T), 2020., Advice and Counsel There are many situations that require an interior designer to depend upon professional liability insurance. This type of insurance protects the designer in the event of actions, errors, or omissions during the course of work on a project. This type of professional liability insurance is often called E&O, for errors and omissions coverage. E&O can also provide coverage for claims should a court claim be decided against a designer.

Which consultant is most likely to be responsible for designing the security systems on the majority of projects? A. Both Electrical and Security consultant work together to design the security systems B. Telecommunications Consultant C. Security Consultant D. Electrical Engineer

D. Electrical Engineer Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Project Management On most projects, the electrical engineer will design the security systems, along with the telephone system and signal systems. Typically a security consultant would only be required on larger scale commercial projects with more sophisticated security requirements.

What can designers reduce to address climate change through product specifications? A. Eliminate LCAs B. Eliminate IAQs C. Eliminate ESGs D. Eliminate GHGs

D. Eliminate GHGs Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 3rd Edition ePDF for QPractice., Environmental Conditions and the Site Eliminate GHGs. GHGs are greenhouse gases. Product specifications that strive to not contribute to greenhouse gases and support the conservation of energy and use of sustainable energy sources provide a direct positive effect on climate change. Continued emission of greenhouse gases will cause further warming and long-lasting changes in all components of the climate system, increasing the likelihood of severe, pervasive, and irreversible impacts on people and ecosystems. Limiting climate change requires substantial and sustained reductions in greenhouse gas emissions which, together with adaptation, can limit climate change risks.

The lobby of a building from the stair enclosure to the exterior door is called: A. Exit refuge B. exit passageway C. exit access D. exit discharge

D. Exit discharge may include building lobbies if one of the exit stairways open into the lobby, if the exit door is clearly visible

Which of these daylighting strategies can be used effectively in all climate zones for improving energy efficiency? Select 4 that apply: A. Orient the long axis of the building parallel with N/S B. Locating fixtures and controls to comply with ADA, A117, and other relevant codes C. Active heating through sunlight collection D. Use of architectural features such as light shelves, vanes, or louvers E. Choose materials and finishes with low reflectance to minimize inter-F. reflection and glare F. Reflect diffused lighting deeper into the building core with light tubes G. Use glazing with a lower visible transmittance (VT) to minimize heat gain H. Top lighting with skylights or clerestory windows

D. F. G. H. Source: Livingston, Jason. Designing With Light: The Art, Science and Practice of Architectural Lighting Design, Daylighting The four answer choices that apply are: Top lighting with skylights or clerestory windows Reflect diffused lighting deeper into the building core with light tubes Use glazing with a lower visible transmittance (VT) to minimize heat gain Use of architectural features such as light shelves, vanes, or louvers During the schematic and design development phases, the architect and interior designer will seek to arrange the building orientation and interior to take advantage of daylighting opportunities. By aligning the long axis parallel with East/West (not N/S), this presents the maximum building face to direct daylighting along the South face and indirect northern light along the North face. There are two types of daylighting: sidelighting — through windows in the walls top lighting — through skylights, roof monitors, or clerestories One means of top lighting is using a light tube when a greater separation exists between the roof and ceiling. Designers should also choose materials with high reflectance (not low reflectance) to maximize inter-reflection, which helps daylight penetrate deeper into the building. The use of architectural features such as light shelves, vanes, or louvers can help redirect light where needed and provide shade to block direct sun and glare. Visible light transmittance (VT) is the percentage of light that passes through glazing. A lower VT for South facing glazing controls the light intensity and minimizes heat gain from direct sun. "Active heating through sunlight collection" can save energy, and "compliance with locations for accessibility" are beneficial to design strategies but do not have to do with daylighting.

In surveying existing conditions of an older building before beginning space planning, an interior designer would probably need to seek expert consulting assistance to determine the A. existence of floor-mounted electrical outlets in an open space B. number of supply air diffusers in the space C. presence of adequate water pressure to add a sink in a washroom D. Feasibility of opening a double-wide doorway in an existing wall

D. Feasibility of opening a double-wide doorway in an existing wall Source: Piotrowski, C. M. Designing Commercial Interiors., Project Management, Managing the Design Team The interior designer can easily determine the following by inspection and observation: water pressure location of electrical outlets number and location of air diffusers The structural considerations and the feasibility of cutting through a load bearing wall may not be readily obvious to an interior designer.

What of the four major considerations are MOST important during programming? A. Programming, analysis, synthesis, and function B. Establishing goals, collecting data, anthropometrics and ergonomics C. Spatial requirements, code compliance, sustainability, occupancy classification D. Form, economy, function and time

D. Form, economy, function and time Source: Problem Seeking, An Architectural Programming Primer, Four Major Considerations During Programming Form, function, economy and time are the major categories to consider during programming. All other choices would fall under these categories. Form: Priority, hierarchy, density, spatial requirements, occupancy classificationFunction: Establishing goals, collecting data, suitability, code compliance, anthropometrics and ergonomics, sustainability, communicationEconomy: BudgetTime: Lead time

While designing a clinic, the interior designer has discovered the extensive requirements for patient privacy in a healthcare facility. Which of the following partitions is the BEST to incorporate into the design for a block of back-to-back exam rooms? A. I B. II C. III D. IV

D. IV Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Interior Construction, Partitions: Gypsum Board Resilient channels are used to improve the acoustical properties by isolating the wallboard from rigid attachment to the framing. Insulation is also placed in the stud cavities to improve the acoustical quality of the partition. For the best STC ratings in a healthcare facility, the interior designer should accommodate a wall thickness that includes resilient channels. Option I shows a typical partition with one layer of gypsum on each side, which could work but likely wouldn't meet the patient privacy guidelines for a clinic setting. Option II shows a gypsum board on only one side of the partition and an unfinished face on the other. Option III would work if the exam rooms weren't back-to-back, as mentioned in the question, since only one side has two layers of gypsum board. Option IV gives the best acoustical separation between the exam rooms because of the inclusion of resilient channels and staggered studs.

"Precept" drawings are what type of design document? A. Diagrams developed to make programming issues more understandable to the designer than if they were expressed only in words. B. Sketch examples of similar previous design solutions collected during programming that characterize this type of project. C. Traditional relationship diagrams generated for the entire project, based on certain organizational programming assumptions. D. Idea sketches developed during programming about how the final design solution might respond to the identified design problems.

D. Idea sketches developed during programming about how the final design solution might respond to the identified design problems. Source: Hershberger, R. (2015). Architectural Programming and Predesign Manager., Program Preparation, Design Analysis, Design Precepts Precept drawings are idea sketches developed during programming about how the final design solution might respond to the identified design problems. Precepts can be diagrammatic, physical, or even metaphorical in nature and in how they are presented. This does not matter as long as everyone understands that they are all just ideas—preconceptions about how the final design might respond to the design problem. If they are included in the program document in this way, they give the design architect the benefit of all of the ideas uncovered in the programming process—ideas uncovered in literature review, client and user ideas, and programmer distillation of all of these ideas. If everyone understands that they are only suggestions, not requirements, the designer should benefit from the added insights.

Which solutions can interior designers incorporate for good bathroom design to address the loss of visual acuity due to aging? A. Greater down lighting above the sink. B. Lighting on either side of the mirror. C. Integral overhead medicine cabinet lighting. D. Increased and flexible general lighting.

D. Increased and flexible general lighting. Source: Kilmer, Rosemary Kilmer, W. O. Designing Interiors., Lighting Needs and Application, Lighting for Special Groups As people age, their color vision, depth perception, visual acuity, peripheral vision, glare, flicker tolerance, and visual field change. Even with glasses, more light is required for detailed tasks such as grooming. Designers can help compensate through flexible lighting design, including the addition of dimmers so that individuals can adjust the light lever for their particular needs.

South Coast Air Quality Management District (AQMD) Rule 1113 addresses what important aspect of sustainable concerns? A. Recycling and Reuse of Materials requirements B. Energy Efficiency standards C. Hazardous Material Mitigation processes D. Indoor Air Quality regulations

D. Indoor Air Quality regulations Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Sustainable Design, Indoor Air Quality, Indoor Air Quality Standards INDOOR AIR QUALITY STANDARDS: The last few decades have seen the development of many laws, regulations, and standards enacted at the federal, state, and local levels that attempt to control and improve IAQ. OSHA has also proposed rules for IAQ. Some of the more important laws, standards, and regulations with which interior designers should be familiar are listed here: South Coast Air Quality Management District (AQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings:This rule limits the VOC content of architectural coatings used in the South Coast Air Quality Management District in California. The limits it sets are more restrictive than those of the national VOC emission standard published by the EPA. AQMD Rule 1168 limits the VOC content of adhesives and sealants.

Using behavioral analytics as part of the Interior Design programming process is helpful as it does which of the following? A. It generates comparisons between similar types of spaces. B. It develops useful information on employee interpersonal interactions. C. It provides lists of monitored sites within an existing building. D. It allows real time data gathering of how users experience a space.

D. It allows real time data gathering of how users experience a space. Source: Building Design + Construction, Predictive analytics: How design firms can benefit from using data to find patterns, trends, and relationships User behavior analytics (UBA) is the tracking, collecting, and assessing of user data and activities using observation and monitoring systems for the purpose of finding existing usage patterns, trends, and relationships to better predict future user and occupant behavior.

Tekton is a trade name for what? A. Polyester B. Acetate C. Nylon D. Olefin

D. Olefin Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Selection of Materials, Finishes, and Furnishings Tekton is the brand name for Olefin (polypropylene) fibers used in carpeting and carpet backing. It's most well known asa brand of housewrap, which reduces the risk of air and moisture infiltration that could ultimately waste energy or lead to mold. Olefin is inexpensive and is highly resistant to chemicals, mildew, and microorganisms. It is highly resilient and nonabsorbent. Its desirable qualities make it useful for carpeting and carpet backing, but its low resistance to sunlight, heat, and flame makes it undesirable for most upholstery fabric. TEKTON® and all TEKTON products denoted with ® or TM are registered trademarks or trademarks of Avintiv, which is owned by Berry Global.

Which of the following statements is LEAST accurate in describing balance? A. Furnishings positioned above eye level appear heavier than items positioned below. B. Bright colors, heavy textures, unusual shapes, bold patterns, and strong lighting readily attract attention and can be manipulated to achieve balance within a space. C. A collection of small elements of various textures appears "heavier" than a very large object with no texture. D. Placement is more important than the visual weight of an object when viewing an entire composition.

D. Placement is more important than the visual weight of an object when viewing an entire composition. Source: ASID, L.M. J., IIDA, IDEC. (2014). Beginnings of Interior Environments, 11th Edition., Design Fundamentals, Elements and Principles of Design In the interior environment, balance is necessary to achieve a comfortable atmosphere. It is a sense of weight as the eye perceives it. Generally, humans have a need for balance in many aspects of their lives. Balance is based substantially on visual stimuli or perception. The architectural background of rooms including doors, windows, paneling, and fireplaces, along with accompanying furnishings, can be effectively arranged to provide a feeling of equilibrium or balance. All other things being equal, people tend to perceive the color, texture, shape, and other aspects of visual weight more than placement. Some considerations include the following: Opposite walls and interior spaces and objects should have a comfortable feeling of balance through the distribution of high and low, as well as large and small objects. When furnishings are positioned above eye level, they appear heavier than items positioned below. Bright colors, heavy textures, unusual shapes, bold patterns, and strong lighting readily attract attention and can be manipulated to achieve balance within a space. Large furnishings in a space can be complemented by placing them next to groups of small items, and vice versa, creating a refreshing contrast.

In a small lounge area with exposed mechanical systems, you have designed two walls to receive a custom wood planked finish on the entire wall up to 10'. Above this 10' mark the wall will continue up with a painted finish into the exposed plenum space. What gypsum wallboard finish level would be most appropriate for this wall? A. Level 4 B. Level 5 C. Level 2 D. Level 3

D. Level 3 Source: Interior Construction Detailing for Designers, Partitions Though the plenum is mentioned, the wall is exposed to view and requires more than a simple Level 1 finish. Since the majority of the wall will be receiving a heavy textured finish and the exposed wallboard will be above eye level with minimal exposure to light reflections, a simple and economical Level 3 finish should be appropriate. The types of finishes on gypsum wallboard have been standardized by the Gypsum Association (GA) and published in GA-214, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. The levels provide a way to specify the exact requirement for any project. This is important because factors such as lighting conditions and paint type can affect the appearance of a surface that has not been properly finished. For example, strong side lighting from a window perpendicular to a partition can accentuate minor flaws and dents in the wallboard. Level 0: Requires no taping, finishing, or accessories. Level 1: Joints and interior angles have tape embedded in joint compound with the surface free of excess joint compound. This level is used for plenums above ceilings and other areas not normally open to view. Level 2: All joints and interior angles have tape embedded in joint compound, and one separate coat of compound is applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. This level is used where water-resistant backing board is employed as a substrate for tile and in other areas where appearance is not critical. Level 3: Similar to Level 2, except that two coats of joint compound are used and the surface is free of tool marks and ridges. This level is used where the surface will receive heavy- or medium-textured finishes or where heavy-grade wallcoverings are to be applied. Level 4: Similar to Level 3, except that three coats of joint compound are used. This level is used where light textures or wallcoverings will be applied or where economy is of concern. Gloss, semi gloss, and enamel paints are not recommended over this level of finish. Level 5: Similar to Level 4 except that a thin skim coat of joint compound is applied over the entire surface. This level is used where gloss, semi gloss, enamel, or non textured flat paints are specified or where severe lighting conditions exist.

The amount of light output produced by a lamp or light source; this is how lamp manufacturers rate their lamps and publish catalogs with this information: A. Candelas B. Footcandles C. Kelvin degrees D. Lumens

D. Lumens Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Reflected Ceiling and Electrical Plans Lumens are the amount of light output produced by a lamp or light source; lamp manufacturers rate their lamps in lumens and publish catalogs with this information.

The following is an example excerpt of what? 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM MATERIALS A. Regular Gypsum Board: Gypsum core panel surfaced with paper on front and back edges and complying with ASTM C 1396 and ASTM C 36.1.Acceptable Product: Continental Building Products LiftLite or Regular Drywall2.Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), unless otherwise indicateda.Use 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thickness at _______b.Use 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thickness at _______ ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete one of the following two paragraphs. 3.Width: 48 inches (1219 mm)4.Width: 54 inches (1372 mm) ** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** 1/2 inch regular gypsum board is available in lengths from 8 feet through 16 feet. 3/8 inch regular gypsum board is available in lengths from 8 feet through 12 feet. 1/4 inch regular gypsum board is available in 8 foot lengths only. 5.Length: Use longest length available, avoiding unnecessary joints * * NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** 1/4 inch and 3/8 inch thick gypsum board is only available with tapered edge. Rounded or square is available in 1/2 inch. Select edge type(s) required and delete those not required. 6.Edges:a.Use square edges at ______b.Use rounded tapered edges at ______c.Use tapered edges at ______ A. Descriptive Specification B. MasterFormat Specification C. MasterFormat Division D. Master Specification

D. Master Specification Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Specifications Master Specifications are pre written specifications that cover nearly all types of products, methods of installation, and other variables that relate to a specific product or construction activity. The specifier or designer edits the pre written specification when prompted in the Master Specifications in order to customize the specifications to suit the conditions of each project.

Rentable Area, the portion of a tenant's rented space plus a pro-rated portion of any shared spaces is calculated by: A. Dividing the Gross Occupant Area by the sum of Gross Shared Space Areas B. Multiplying the Net Assignable area by the gross Occupant Area C. Multiplying the Net Assignable Area by the Building Load Factor D. Multiplying the gross Occupant Area by the Building Load Factor

D. Multiplying the gross Occupant Area by the Building Load Factor Source: Circulation Defining and Planning The Rentable Area, which is the portion of a tenant's rented space plus a pro-rated portion of any shared spaces, is calculated by multiplying the gross Occupant Area by the Building Load Factor.

The NEC/National Electric Code is published by which organization? A. IBC B. ANSI C. ASHRAE D. NFPA E. ICC

D. NFPA Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam., Building Regulations and Codes, Building Regulations, Adjuncts to Building Codes "The electrical code used by all jurisdictions is the National Electrical Code (NEC), published by The National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. In order to maintain greater uniformity in building regulations, the ICC does not publish an electrical code, but relies on the NEC. The ICC only publishes administrative text necessary to administer and enforce the NEC." (IBC) is The International Building Code, which is published by ICC, the International Code Council (ANSI) is the American National Standards Institute (ASHRAE) is the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air‐Conditioning Engineers

Stainmaster is a trade name for what? A. Olefin B. Acrylic C. Cotton D. Nylon

D. Nylon Source: EPA.gov StainMaster® is the trade name for a specially engineered nylon fiber made by Invista (formerly DuPont Textiles and Interiors, now owned by Koch industries) that resists stains, most typically used in carpet. Related is Scotchguard, the registered trademark of 3M. Both use the perfluorinated compounds (PFCs), a family of chemicals with unique properties to make materials stain- and stick-resistant, but are likely human carcinogens. PFOA was formerly used by DuPont to make Teflon, and PFOS was formerly an ingredient in 3M's Scotchguard. They were both phased out after revelations that the manufacturers had withheld decades of studies showing that the chemicals were extraordinarily persistent in the environment and build up in people's blood. In 2018 the State of California proposed that carpets and rugs containing the stain resistant fluorinated chemicals be considered a priority product under the state's Safer Consumer Products program, in effort to get manufacturers to develop safer products. "To repel stains, the carpet industry used the same kind of chemicals in DuPont's Teflon cookware - poly- and perfluoroalkyl substances, known as PFAS chemicals. The Scotchgard chemical, called PFOS, and its close chemical cousin PFOA, were phased out under pressure from the Environmental Protection Agency after the revelation of secret studies by their manufacturers that found they caused cancer and birth defects in lab animals, built up in people's bodies and did not break down in the environment. In studies of tens of thousands of people exposed to PFOS and PFOA, very small doses of the chemicals have been linked to cancer, hormone disruption, immune system harm, reproductive harm and liver damage. The U.S. carpet industry transitioned away from its use of PFOS, PFOA and other so-called long-chain PFAS chemicals in 2008. But they've been replaced by a new generation of "short-chain" chemicals in this class that have many of the same potential health concerns. California regulators lists all PFAS chemicals as having the potential for bioaccumulation; cancer; developmental, endocrine and liver toxicity; and other health hazards."

Furniture plans can typically be doubled with which two plans since the exact locations of outlets can be directly related to the location and orientation of furniture? A. RCP and Power B. RCP and Finish Plan C. Finish schedule and Site D. Power and Communications

D. Power and Communications Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings The furniture plan is sometimes doubled up with a power and telephone/communications plan because the exact locations of outlets can be directly related to the locations and orientations of furniture. For example, telephone and electrical outlets are best placed directly to the side of a desk.

Which test is NOT used to determine flammability of upholstery fabric? A. Smoke Density Test B. Steiner Tunnel Test C. Smolder Resistance Test D. Radiant Panel Test

D. Radiant Panel Test, ASTM E648,

Which color does OSHA require for fire alarm pull boxes, fire extinguishers, and audible or visual fire alarms? A. Yellow B. Green C. Orange D. Red

D. Red Source: Occupational Safety and Health Standards, 1910.44 General Environmental Controls, Safety color code for marking physical hazards. Life safety equipment must be red, including pull stations, alarm boxes, and most portable fire extinguishers. Red is universally recognized for identifying the most serious hazards, as well as fire hazards and fire equipment. Orange identifies dangerous machines or equipment that may crush, cut, shock, or injure workers, such as electrical hazards or a construction area. Yellow is a color for communicating hazards that may lead to worker injuries if not avoided, such as caution signs on a wet floor. Green is reserved for general safety signs, which offer safety-related messages that don't touch on specific workplace hazards, such as pointing out a first aid kit. OSHA and Safety Colors OSHA outlines requirements for safety colors in its standard for safety color codes (29 CFR 1910.144). Red must be used for fire-related hazards and emergency stop switches, bars, and buttons on hazardous machines. Fire-related hazards include identifying fire protection equipment and containers of flammable liquids. The interior designer should be aware of what these colors mean and consider whether these colors are visible as appropriate within the designed environment.

The designer is specifying a veneer cut of oak for use at the architectural woodwork located behind the main reception feature wall at a high end boutique hotel. The desired look has a minimal grain pattern. Which method of cutting should be specified? A. Plain Sawn B. Rotary Sliced C. Rift Sliced D. Rift Sawn

D. Rift Sawn Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Architectural Woodwork, Lumber and Veneers for Architectural Woodwork Rift slicing is accomplished by quartering a log and cutting it at 15 degree angle to the growth rings. Like quarter slicing, it results in a straight-grained pattern and is commonly used with oak to eliminate the appearance of markings perpendicular to the direction of the grain. Rift Sawn and Plain Sawn are types of solid stock lumber cutting, not a veneer as indicated in the question. Rotary Slicing produces a very pronounced grain pattern that is often undesirable for fine-quality wood finishes, although it does produce the most veneer with the least waste. Watch the Answer Vault video Wood Veneer

You need to specify a veneer cut for oak paneling. Which type of cut would you recommend for this species if the desired effect is a straight grain pattern with no perpendicular defects? A. Quarter Slicing B. Half Round Slicing C. Plain Slicing D. Rift Slicing

D. Rift Slicing Source: Materials for Interior Environments, 2nd Edition, Wood and Wood Products Rift Slicing is commonly used to gain this type of appearance from oak. It produces a straight grain and eliminates the appearance of markings perpendicular to the grain caused by medullary rays. Watch the Answer Vault video Wood veneer

Which of the following describes the method most commonly used for setting floor tile in a residential installation? A. Tile that is set in a mortar base that is 1 1/4" to 2" (30 to 50 mm) thick. B. Tile that is set with organic mastic over green board. C. Setting tile in a mud bed over thin plywood base. D. Setting tile in an adhesive made from cement, fine sand and other chemicals that is not typically greater than 3/32" (2mm) thick.

D. Setting tile in an adhesive made from cement, fine sand and other chemicals that is not typically greater than 3/32" (2mm) thick. Source: Specifying Interiors: A Guide to Construction and FF&E for Residential and Commercial Interiors Projects, 2nd Edition., Construction Materials, Tile Types Thin-set is the method of setting tile in an adhesive made from cement, fine sand and other chemicals that is not typically greater than 3/32″ (2mm) thick. Thin-set installations account for nearly 90% of ceramic tile installations in the United States. All methods other than the conventional portland cement applications are considered thin set.

Analyzing transportation available to your client's proposed new urban business location would be part of which part of the design process? A. due diligence analysis B. task and activity analysis C. environment analysis D. Site context analysis

D. Site context analysis is the investigation and evaluation of conditions within which the project will be completed. It is a form of diligence in which determining preliminary sustainability requirements and goals for the project are developed

Overall department relationships of a large company being planned to occupy a multistory building would most likely be shown in A. a bubble diagram B. an adjacency matrix C. a block diagram D. a stacking diagram

D. a stacking diagram Source: William M. Peña, Steven A. Parshall, HOK, Problem Seeking: An Architectural Programming Primer, 5th Edition., Part Two, Space Lists For the needs analysis in a program, a space list is developed representing a compilation and interpretation of the project goals, supported by the collected facts, and represents the concepts of how the space will be used. A space list may be a comprehensive, detailed listing of every net assignable area and its characteristics, or it may take the form of summaries. For example, for departmental office space, the summary table might show the net assignable area by department and apply the net to usable efficiency factor to calculate usable area for each department. This figure is useful for the blocking and stacking of departmental office space in a building. To show overall departmental relationships (rather than individual space relationships), a stacking diagram is then used. Then individual block diagrams or bubble diagrams are developed for each floor.

Which surface finish provides the greatest NRC? A. plaster B. 1/4" pile carpet C. 1/2" pile carpet D. acoustical ceiling tile

D. acoustical ceiling tile Depending on the thickness, acoustic ceiling tile typically has the most sound absorbing qualities, from .6 to .9 NRC. Refer to the Qpractice lesson on Acoustical Systems

It is important to determine the correct jurisdictional requirements of your project location, the enforceable codes and standards for that jurisdiction, and if there are any addendums to those codes and standards that have been made. Which of the following statements is NOT true when confirming issues related to jurisdictional codes? A. Each jurisdiction decides when to change or update code publications they enforce. B. The relationship of the state/provincial code and the local code varies among states/provinces. C. Each jurisdiction can make amendments to codes so that it is more relevant to that jurisdiction. D. State mandated and enforced codes only apply to buildings in more rural areas that do not have a local code.

D. State mandated and enforced codes only apply to buildings in more rural areas that do not have a local code. Source: Harmon, K.E.K.S. K. The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., Code Officials and the Code Process, Code Jurisdiction The code jurisdiction of a project is determined by the location of the building. A jurisdiction is defined as a geographical or governmental area that uses the same codes, standards, and regulations. A state typically mandates codes that must be followed by each jurisdiction within the state. A county or city municipality will also establish a set of codes to be used in their local jurisdiction. The relationship of the state code and the local code varies among states. Sometimes the state code has to be followed in conjunction with other locally adopted codes, or it might only apply to buildings in more rural areas that do not have a local code. Typically, the state will at least enforce regulations on state‐owned buildings. Just as each jurisdiction decides which code publications are to be enforced, it also decides when to change or update the codes. The newest edition of the code may not be the one being enforced. For example, the state building code may be the 2009 IBC and the local building code may be the 2015 IBC. If both apply to your project, it can cause conflicts. You may have to be aware of the differences between the two editions. Also, each jurisdiction can make amendments to codes that change the original code requirements. These modifications may remove a particular requirement, call for a more stringent requirement, and/or modify a requirement so that it is more relevant to that jurisdiction. It is important to determine the correct jurisdiction of your project, the enforceable codes and standards for that jurisdiction (including the edition of the codes), and if there are any addendums that have been made. All this is necessary at the beginning of a project so that proper code research can be done.

Which of the following is not typically required by the AHJ to appear on the first sheet of the drawing set? A. The valuation of the new construction represented by the plans and specifications B. An indication of whether the space is sprinklered or not C. Construction type and occupancy group or groups D. The number of occupants to be accommodated on every floor and in all rooms and spaces

D. The number of occupants to be accommodated on every floor and in all rooms and spaces Source: The Codes Guidebook for Interiors, Code Officials and the Code Process The number of occupants to be accommodated will be a part of the overall occupant load calculations included on the first sheet, however, the number of occupants in all rooms and spaces is reserved for the life safety plan so it can provide sufficient clarity along with the means of egress.

Why is it most beneficial to show the column grid layout on the reflected ceiling plan if available? A. Dimensions provided on the RCP should be taken from existing structures such as the centerlines of columns and exterior elements that may already be in place to be most beneficial and accurate for the subcontractors that will work on the ceiling in the sequence of construction. B. The grid provides a foundation for the wall and organizational layout of the space plan. C. The grid provides simple alignments to arrange ceiling layouts for parallel or perpendicular configurations with the building. D. The simple description of the structural system that may be happening above the ceiling gives attention to consider beams or other structures that may interfere with systems and equipment that need to handled in the ceiling or plenum space.

D. The simple description of the structural system that may be happening above the ceiling gives attention to consider beams or other structures that may interfere with systems and equipment that need to handled in the ceiling or plenum space. Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings Column grids are a useful and logical tool for space planning exercises, but this is not particularly useful for the reflected ceiling plan. They are also beneficial for dimensioning the RCP though the same can be done from the centerlines of a column as needed for particular dimensions rather than requiring the entire grid to be shown. However, the grid does provide an immediate visual for the multiple designers, engineers, and subcontractors that deal with ceiling systems to be aware of the structure and pay close attention to coordination needed in these areas.

Which fabric would be most appropriate for a light-duty upholstery area in a residential client's guest room where chemical sensitivity is also a concern?EXHIBIT A. WF-6 The Story of My Life B. WF-1 Wool Check C. WF-4 Acqua e Fuoco D. WF-2 Blumen

D. WF-2 Blumen Source: Oeko-Tex, Overview WF-2 Blumen meets 22,500 double rubs Wyzenbeek and is 53% cotton and 47% Rayon, and with Oeko-Tex certification on being free of harmful substances. WF-4 Acqua e Fuoco is suitable for windows/vertical applications, not upholstery WF-6 The Story of My Life meets 15,000 double rubs Wyzenbeek and has no chemical-free certification WF-1 Wool Check meets 25,000 cycles Martindale but is made from 100% Wool, and many people have allergic reactions to this fiber To attain Oeko-Tex Standard 100 Certification, the fabric has been tested and certified to be free from harmful levels of more than 100 substances known to be harmful to human health. A fabric is considered durable if it withstands 15,000 doublerubs. Some manufacturers and specifications consider a fabric that withstands 3000 cycles as light-duty, 9000 cycles as medium-duty, and 15,000 cycles as heavy duty. The Martindale test (ASTM D4966) is similar to the Wyzenbeek test.

When working in a tenant space, which does NOT require a fire rated partition? A. the demising partitions between tenant spaces B. partitions that demise the 800 sq ft (74.3 m2) training room C. partitions along the public corridors D. a 75 sq ft (7.5 m2) storage room

D. a 75 sq ft (7.5 m2) storage room Source: 2018 International Building Code, SECTION 1020 CORRIDORS There is no longer a requirement for storage rooms to be fire rated in 2018 IBC. 1020.1 Construction. Corridors shall be fire-resistance rated in accordance with Table 1020.1. The corridor walls required to be fire-resistance rated shall comply with Section 708 for fire partitions. Refer to the table 1020.1, this depends upon occupant load and sprinkler system.

Detailed information about furniture is commonly found on A. a furniture schedule B. the specifications only C. the furniture plan D. a schedule or the specifications

D. a schedule or the specifications The furniture plan typically contains tags with code numbers for each piece of furniture. The code number refers either to a schedule on the drawings or to the specifications where the information such as a manufacturer, model number, color, finish, and other criteria are listed.

Which of the following should not be a primary consideration when choosing a light source? A. color rendition B. operating life cost C. efficacy D. aesthetics

D. aesthetics Some of the many considerations that influence the selection of a light source include color rendition, initial cost, operating cost, efficacy, size, operating life and the ability to control output from a luminaire.

When would furniture samples or mockups be obtained by the designer? A. upon receipt of the client's deposit B. during the schematic design phase C. after the purchase orders have been issued D. after the designer has completed research and narrowed the search for furniture to a few specific types

D. after the designer has completed research and narrowed the search for furniture to a few specific types Once a designer has narrowed the search for furniture to a few specific types, actual samples or mockups are often required for the designer and client to make a final decision.

Which of these would an interior designer put into a schedule? A. hardware B. finish C. door/ window D. all of the above

D. all of the above Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings Schedules show information in tabular format with rows and columns of data. They are used because they are a very efficient way to communicate a large amount of complex information in a small space. Common schedules for interior design construction drawings include room finish, door, kitchen equipment, millwork, and hardware schedules.

Where do the NFPA life safety and fire codes apply? A. evacuation facilities of a building during a hurricane B. interior finishes, fire protection equipment, and means of egress C. means of egress, smoke control, sprinklers and other fire protection equipment D. all of these

D. all of these Source: NFPA, List of NFPA Codes & Standards NFPA Life Safety Codes apply to danger from fire, means of egress, all fire-related protection, and non-fire emergencies.

When estimating how much fabric will be required for custom designed draperies, which of the following will you need to consider when determining the total fabric width needed? A. the opening size, the amount of fullness, the return B. the return, the opening size, the stacking space C. the amount of fullness of the drapery, the opening size D. all of these

D. all of these Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition. [VitalSource Bookshelf]., Wall and Window Finishes, Window Treatments, Draperies and Curtains, Measuring In estimating fabric for draperies, the total fabric width must be determined. The window width and finish length are measured to calculate returns, overlaps, stacking, hems, headers, fullness, and pattern matching. Draperies are usually 3′′ to 3-1/2′′ (76 to 89 mm) deep. Multiple layers add depth and width.

Fabric flammability is rated in terms of? A. flame spread B. smoke developed C. fuel contributed D. all of these

D. all of these Source: The Association for Contract Textiles, ACT Voluntary Flammability Guideline for Woven Fabrics For most materials, flammability refers to the measurement of a fabric's performance when it is exposed to specific sources of ignition and is rated in terms of flame spread, smoke developed, and fuel contributed. The intended end use for the fabric determines the requirements for the different flammability tests: UpholsteryCalifornia Technical Bulletin 117-2013 Section 1 - Pass Direct Glue Wallcoverings and Adhered PanelsASTM E84 (Adhered Mounting Method) - Class A or Class 1 Wrapped Wall Panels and Upholstered WallsASTM E84 (Unadhered Mounting Method) - Class A or Class 1 Panel System FurnitureAny one or combination of the following: UL recognized component under Office Panel Fabrics category, UL 1286 Listed, ASTM E84 (Adhered or Unadhered Mounting Method) - Class A or Class 1 DraperyNFPA 701 Method 1 or 2 as appropriate - Pass(or ASTM D6413, newer test) Kennon, K. E. Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition.

When making furniture decisions, what should the interior designer consider? A, FF&E requirements established by a rating system such as LEED B. industry standards C. federal, state and local restrictions related to FF&E D. all of these

D. all of these Source: BIFMA, Furniture Comfort, Safety, Sustainability, and Durability Standards In making furniture decisions, the designer should consider industry standards for furniture in terms of comfort, safety, sustainability, and durability. Adherence to standards by means such as BIFMA compliance ensure that the item will perform as expected and meet minimum construction requirements. In addition to the requirements that furniture must conform to a particular standard, there may be federal, state and local restrictions related to FF&E, as well as requirements established by a client or by a rating system such as LEED. With an emphasis on sustainability and third-party certification, many clients require that FF&E conform to minimum green standards.

Poor indoor air quality can be the result of? A. chemical contaminants from outdoor sources B. biological contaminants C. mold spores D. all of these

D. all of these Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Sustainable Design, Causes of Poor Indoor Air Quality There are 4 basic causes of poor IAQ: chemical contaminants from indoor sources chemical contaminants from outdoor sources biological contaminants, including mold spores poor ventilation

All of the following are true about a construction manager (CM) except? A. is a third party who is an expert in construction, costing and the management of the construction process B. typically used more for architectural projects than interior design projects C. may act as an agent of the owner and be responsible for hiring contractors, advising on costs and managing the construction process D. always participates in the construction of the project

D. always participates in the construction of the project Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Pre-Design, Construction Delivery Methods Construction managers (CMs) are typically used more for architectural projects than for interior design projects. A CM is a third party in the process who is an expert in construction, costing and management of the construction process. A CM may be hired by the owner simply as a consultant to advise on costs and construction methods, but who does not participate in the construction of the project.

An accessible ramp must have landing with a minimum area of 5'x5': A. wherever ramp changes direction B. at the top and bottom of the ramp C. every 12 lineal feet D. at the top and bottom of the ramp and wherever ramp changes direction

D. at the top and bottom of the ramp and wherever ramp changes direction Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, CHAPTER 4: ACCESSIBLE ROUTES, SECTION 405 Ramps Refer to 405.7 Landings and 405.7.4 Change in Direction See also the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design: 405.7 Landings. Ramps shall have landings at the top and the bottom of each ramp run. Landings shall comply with 405.7. 405.7.4 Change in Direction. Ramps that change direction between runs at landings shall have a clear landing 60 inches (1525 mm) minimum by 60 inches (1525 mm) minimum.

If a designer wanted to emphasize a significant feature at both ends of a space, which plan arrangement would best achieve this goal? A. clustered B. grid C. linear D. axial

D. axial Source: Ching, F.D. K. Architecture: Form, Space, and Order., Organization; Circulation An axis is one of the most basic forms for organizing spaces in architecture and interiors. It is a line or plane created by two points around which forms and spaces are arranged in a regular or irregular manner and directs movement or views along its path. The spaces arranged on either side of the axis do not have to be symmetrical, however a symmetrical condition always has an axis. Read more, Interior Design Reference Manual: Information Analysis and Synthesis, Components of a Design Concept > Axial

Which of the following is NOT a type of resilient flooring? A. cork B. linoleum C. VCT D. bamboo

D. bamboo Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Floor Finishes Resilient flooring is a generic term describing different types of composition material made from various resins, fibers, plasticizers, and fillers formed under heat and pressure to produce a thin material, either sheets or tiles. Resilient flooring materials provide a nonabsorbent surface with good durability and ease of maintenance. They tend to have a relatively firm surface, but enough springiness to resist permanent indentations and cushion noise and impacts; however, they do not absorb sound. The degree of comfort provided depends on the material's resilience, the type of backing, and the hardness of the supporting substrate. Vinyl composition tile, cork, and linoleum are all types of resilient flooring.

Which of the following is a method of integrating power and communications within a panel-based systems furniture product? A. mag safe wireless B. floor trough system C. rigid conduit sheath D. belt line distribution E. above-ceiling power feed

D. belt line distribution Source: Piotrowski, C. M. (2016). Designing Commercial Interiors (3rd Edition), Office Interior Design Elements The correct answer is belt line distribution. Specification and planning with systems furniture involve understanding which method the manufacturer has used to integrate electrical and data communications service with the panels. It is important for the designer to understand the method of integrating wiring in the furniture system to be used in the project. Each supplier has variations, and an incorrect specification can be quite costly. The most common is the base feed system. A trough runs along the base of each panel and contains separate channels for electrical conduit and telecommunications cables. By code, these communications cables must be separated from electrical wiring. A second common method of distributing these services in panels is called a belt-line system. In this case, the outlets and channels are approximately 30 inches (762 mm) above the base of the panel. That height allows for a plug-in above the work surface. A vertical channel along one side of the panel brings the service from floor entries or base feeds up to the belt-line feed unit.

Ideas are sketched, during the schematic design phase, in abstract forms/shapes in plan views that represent the program's spaces, activities, and circulation patterns. What are these conceptual sketches referred to as? A. matrices B. parti diagrams C. stacking plans D. bubble diagrams

D. bubble diagrams A designer often explores a number of alternatives arrangements with bubble diagrams. Bubble diagrams can be used for exploring functional relationships in programming and/or for conceptual space planning.

A transaction privilege tax license allows an interior design firm to? A. conduct business from a specific state B. exempt the firm from paying tax on items purchased for client C. charge clients for shipping and storage of furniture D. buy and sell furniture

D. buy and sell furniture Most local jurisdictions require every business, including professional services, to have a license. This allows the business to practice and usually serves as a basis for taxation. Most states require that interior design firms reselling goods obtain a sales tax license, sometimes called a resale certificate, resale license or a transaction privilege tax license. This type of license allows the designer to pass on the state sales tax to the client. The business must remit the tax monthly along with standard reporting forms.

In calculating lease area for a tenant space occupying only a portion of a floor, measurements are taken to the A. centerlines of walls separating tenants, and to the centerline of the exterior wall B. inside finish faces of the tenant sides of all demising walls C. inside finish faces of walls separating tenants, and to the centerline of the public corridor wall D. centerlines of walls separating tenants, and to the inside finish face of the partition separating the tenant space from the public corridor

D. centerlines of walls separating tenants, and to the inside finish face of the partition separating the tenant space from the public corridor Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measuring and Drafting, Determining the Rentable Area This is the standard BOMA (Building Owners and Managers Association) method of measuring leased space and one that is generally followed in the industry.

Planning an interior in a building with an atrium would suggest which of the following organizational concepts? A. axial B. grid C. radial D. central

D. central Source: Ching, F.D. K. Architecture: Form, Space, and Order., Form; Organization An atrium could be incorporated into any of the concepts listed, but it is most often used in a central scheme where most of the functions focus on the atrium and its activities. Centralized Organization - a central, dominant space around which a number of secondary spaces are grouped. From the additive centralized form in which a number of secondary forms are clustered about a dominant, central parent-form. Read more, Interior Design Reference Manual: Information Analysis and Synthesis, Components of a Design Concept > Centralized

Which information should the designer know first when designing a home with a passive solar heating system? A. orientation of the building to the sun B. quantity of thermal mass needed to store solar heat C. area of glazing required to achieve desired temperatures D. climate zone in which the project will be constructed

D. climate zone in which the project will be constructed substantially impacts green building design

The lobby of a building from the stair enclosure to the exterior door is called: A. exit refuge B. exit access C. exit passageway D. exit discharge

D. exit discharge Exit discharge is the part of egress between the exit and public way. Exit discharge may include building lobbies if one of the exit stairways open into the lobby, if the exit door is clearly visible, if the exit discharge area is sprinklered and separated from areas below by the same fire resistance rating as for the exit enclosure opening into it. Refer also to the 2018 IBC, SECTION 202 DEFINITIONS

Physiological human factors include which of the following? A. hot/cold faucet placement, visual acuity, sound frequency B. temperature tolerance, stimuli reaction time, short term memory C. sound frequency, hot/cold faucet placement, temperature tolerance D. color reaction, temperature tolerance, sound frequency

D. color reaction, temperature tolerance, sound frequency Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Programming, Human Comfort Human comfort is related to physiological needs and sensory responses based on the quality of these primary environmental factors: temperature, humidity, air movement, temperature radiation to and from surrounding surfaces, air quality, sound, vibration, and light. The most basic level is the physiological need for food, water, and minimal bodily comforts, including comfortable temperature. Color is not a physical property of the things we see; it is a physiological and psychological response to light waves bouncing off or passing through various objects. The response of an individual to sound involves both physiological and psychological reactions. In selecting the best response, you can rule out all answer choices that contain options not directly related to a physiological response, like hot and cold faucet placement (anthropometrics, ergonomics) and short-term memory, stimuli reaction time (special needs; universal design).

One of the primary goals of the project design is to reduce energy consumption. Which of the following would NOT be a strategy to accomplish this goal? A. avoid the use of CFC based refrigerants in tenant spaces B. specify high reflective finishes C. complete the building commissioning process D. control ventilation

D. control ventilation Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Sustainable Design There are many strategies an interior designer can use to reduce energy consumption. These can be grouped into four broad categories: Building commissioning, mechanical systems, electricity use, plumbing. Controlling ventilation is one of the 4 broad categories for maintaining good indoor air quality, but not conserving energy.

Which of these would NOT be found in the project manual? A. instructions to bidders B. performance bond C. testing requirements D. cost estimate

D. cost estimate Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Specifications, ORGANIZATION OF THE PROJECT MANUAL Cost estimates are never placed in the project manual, because the project manual is used for bidding. While a cost estimate can be useful in-house for budgeting purposes, including a cost estimate would defeat the purpose of bidding.

An interior designer has written furniture specifications for a project and has put the job out for bid to several dealerships. In this situation, purchase orders are most likely to be written by the A. interior designer B. furniture rep C. owner D. dealership

D. dealership In this situation, the dealership(s) would most likely provide the ordering, delivery, and installation services, including the paperwork needed. If the job had been put out for bidding to manufacturers, the purchase order is typically created by the interior designer or purchasing agent, if used.

Which partition system consists of individual components that can be quickly assembled, disassembled, and reused with nearly total salvageability? A. systems partitions B. modular partitions C. salvageable partitions D. demountable partitions

D. demountable partitions Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Wall and Window Finishes, Moveable Walls Demountable partitions (also called demountable walls or moveable walls) consist of a system of individual components that can be quickly assembled, disassembled and reused with nearly total salvageability. They are factory-made partition systems with steel or extruded aluminum frames that are assembled on-site. They often combine glass panels with solid panels covered with metal, laminate, textile, or wood veneer finishes. These wall systems also offer significant time and cost savings during the initial construction phase and over the lifetime of the space, as they enable easy reconfigurations when business needs change. Because they can be easily reconfigured are also recyclable, they are considered a more sustainable option. Demountable partitions differ from operable partitions in that they are intended to remain in place as standard partitions, while operable partitions act as special doors to open and close a space frequently. There are two main types of demountable walls: modular and unitized. Modular wall systems usually come in pieces and need to be assembled on site. These types of walls can require more labor and coordination. Unitized walls arrive on site as a unit assembly and typically install very quickly and can be easily reconfigured using less labor.

In what order of importance should tables for a college library be purchased? A. flammability, design, then comfort B. quality, comfort, then finish C. finish, flammability, then cost D. durability, cost, then design

D. durability, cost, then design Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Finish and Furniture Selection Because institutional furniture takes much abuse and must last a long time, durability is of primary importance. Quality can be considered a measure of durability. However, cost is also an important factor in furniture selection for this type of application, so durability, cost, then design (including finishes) is the best. Other factors that may need to be considered depending upon how an exam question is written is whether or not the tables meet the require accessibility standards, and product certifications required for sustainability.

A rational approach to design that emphasizes human-environment interaction would most likely be based on A. social influences B. Gestalt psychology C. functional requirements D. environmental design research

D. environmental design research Source: Kennon, K. E. Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition., The Project Management Process, Research as a Project Benefit Environmental design research is also called Evidence Based Design. It provides a scientifically studied view of how the environment affects human behavior and attitudes. The concept of EBD is to use research to help determine how to go about designing an interior or a building. Evidence-based design helps to create better design outcomes. The design process phases bear a direct relationship to research. The bulk of research occurs during the programming (and predesign phase(s) but can be included in any phase of a project. Functional requirements, while usually rational, do not necessarily take into account the effects of a functional design on the users of a space. Gestalt psychology is a theory of perception rather than a study of the environment. Social influences, while an important consideration in design, are so varied that a totally rational approach to making design decisions could not be based on this factor alone.

What device placed in a duct is designed to automatically close when subjected to a certain increase in temperature or with the detection of smoke? A. smoke damper B. fire suppression detector C.photoelectric detector D. fire damper

D. fire damper Fire damper: A device placed in a duct that is designed to automatically close when subjected to a certain increase in temperature or with the detection of smoke.

If minimizing cost is a concern, which style of cabinet door and drawer construction should NOT be used? A. reveal overlay B. flush overlay C. lipped overlay D. flush

D. flush Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Specialty Drawings Flush construction is a style where the doors and drawers are installed flush with the face frame. This requires additional care in fabrication and fitting at installation and subsequently increases the cost.

Why is FF&E typically placed on a budget separate from the construction budget? A. because of various discounts the designer or client receives on these items B. because clients prefer to allocate money to these items separate from hard construction costs C. for tax purposes D. for all reasons listed

D. for all reasons listed Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction and FF&E Contracts On most projects, furniture, fixtures, and equipment (FF&E) are separate budget items because of the way they are specified, purchased, and installed is different from the way constructions items are handled. They are also a separate budget item because of the various discounts the designer or client receives and the tax that must be paid. There is some flexibility in placing equipment on construction budget.

Typically what are the first items of FF&E that an interior designer should research? A. finishes B. casegoods C. flooring D. furniture or accessory items

D. furniture or accessory items The first research need an interior designer typically must satisfy is the initial selection of furniture or accessory items. Even if a designer has a specific item from a particular manufacturer in mind, it may be outside the budget limitations or its lead time may not work for the project. Furniture includes both casegoods and upholstery, while casegoods excludes upholstery which can take longer because of COM.

The use of data analytics in design helps both the designer and client: A. see easily identified client space usage data in a non-graphic, number based format. B. provide virtual ways to portray hypothetical data on how users will interact in a space. C. identify client programming items used by the design team in creating adjacency matrices. D. gather, analyze and locate hidden patterns to predict how people will use a space.

D. gather, analyze and locate hidden patterns to predict how people will use a space. Source: Using Data Analytics In Architecture to Embrace Communities In Design Data analysis in architecture and interior design is a complicated process that has its roots in evidence-based design. Design teams must gather the most accurate data and analyze it and locate hidden patterns that predict how people will most efficiently use a building or uncover hidden problems with how people use the space. For example, using sensors can help determine how long it takes people to get from one space to another within a building. Using information from existing buildings can help in the planning of new spaces. Timing can be critical in places like medical facilities or even when students have to get from one class to another.

The shop drawings for a millwork piece in the Break Room indicate a flush fit within a gypsum board wall opening at 48" wide. The interior designer approved the shop drawings with no exceptions. The final millwork piece was built according to these shop drawings; however, the opening was only 47" wide. Which party is responsible for the delay in work? A. framing subcontractor B. millwork subcontractor C. gypsum board subcontractor D. general contractor

D. general contractor Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration, Submittals Subcontractors prepare shop drawings and send them to the general contractor, who reviews them for conformance with the interior designer's drawings, specifications, and field conditions, including dimensions. The contractor then submits the shop drawings to the interior designer, who is responsible only for conformance to contract documents and design intent. The designer is not responsible for fabrication, field dimensions, or installation verification.

If an interior designer did not find an error in a dimension on the shop drawings for a custom steel door frame and the door frame was fabricated, who is responsible for paying to have the mistake corrected? A. doorframe supplier B. wall framing subcontractor C. interior designer D. general contractor

D. general contractor The interior designer's review of the shop drawings is only for conformance to the general design intent of the job. The general contractor is responsible for coordinating the job, checking dimensions, and in general, building the job according to the contract documents.

Which scale is most appropriate for design drawings that have been resized in irregular proportions? A. likert scale B. architect's scale C. engineer's scale D. graphic scale

D. graphic scale The graphic scale is used for reference along drawings, typically those that are resized to fit a specific space for presentation, for example - a magazine layout. The reproduction of the end result would not be in standard increments.

This type of lamp produces light by heating a material (usually metal) to a temperature at which it glows. A. LED B. neon C. fluorescent D. incandescent

D. incandescent Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Reflected Ceiling and Electrical Plans In the incandescent lamp, light is produced by heating a material (usually metal) to a temperature at which it glows. Most incandescent lamps have a tungsten filament or other material vacuum-sealed in a glass bulb that becomes hot and intensely bright when electricity is passed through it.

Which ceiling system would you use to accommodate acoustical ceiling tile, light fixtures, supply and return air grilles, fire sprinklers and partitions attachments in a consistent, unified way? A. suspended ceiling B. grid ceiling system C. demountable ceiling system D. integrated ceiling system

D. integrated ceiling system Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 3rd Edition ePDF, Ceiling Finishes, Suspended ceiling systems Integrated ceilings are suspended ceiling systems specifically designed to accommodate acoustical ceiling tile, light fixtures, supply and return air grilles, fire sprinklers, and partition attachments in a consistent, unified way.

Which of the following is NOT true about a change order? issued when there is a change in contract price A. is accompanied by supporting drawings or other documents as needed to B. fully explain and describe the proposed change C. is issued to the general contractor D. is prepared and issued by the interior designer

D. is prepared and issued by the interior designer Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Contract Administration, Changes in the Work Changes during construction are handled in several ways: Minor changes in work (doesn't change the contract; not affecting time or money) Construction change directive (parties agree to temporarily disagree, but don't stop work while adjustments to the contract are made later) Change order (contractual change agreed upon by owner, architect/designer, and contractor) All changes are documented in writing, no matter whether they involve additions, deletions, or any other revisions. A change order is a formal document authorizing a variation from the original contract documents that involves a change in contract price, contract time or both. It functions legally as an amendment to the construction contract. While technically a change order is issued by the owner because the owner has the agreement with the contractor, it is prepared by the interior designer, and must be signed by the owner, architect/interior designer, and contractor.

All of the following are true about a site analysis except? A. requires understanding both the neighborhood and social context of the project B. is a form of due diligence C. may be part of the programming design phase D. is typically conducted by the architect

D. is typically conducted by the architect Site analysis is a study of the site factors and existing conditions such as geographical orientation, access from/to public transportation, views, etc. Siteanalysis is the inevestigation and evaluation of conditions within which the project will be completed. It's a form of due diligence in the that the designer can only completely design the interior space after knowing the context of the project.

Which is included in the net floor area of the building? A. stairways B. restrooms C. corridors D. kitchens

D. kitchens Source: Circulation Defining and Planning Net Area is sometimes called net assignable area. It is the space a client needs for their specific program functions like offices, break rooms or conference rooms. It does not include the space needed for circulation, partitions or building amenities, like restrooms.

What information is missing from this drawing that the designer needs in order to be sure that the signage will meet building codes? A. the font is not suitable - a mix of uppercase and lowercase lettering in a sans-serif typeface should be used B. the drawing is fine - only uppercase lettering may be used C. the height of the lettering - uppercase or lowercase lettering can be used, height of lettering must range between 5/8" - 3" (16 mm - 75 mm) D. lettering height - this should be determined by the viewing distance and can range from 5/8" (16 mm) and 2" (51 mm)

D. lettering height - this should be determined by the viewing distance and can range from 5/8" (16 mm) and 2" (51 mm) Source: 2009 ICC A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 703 Signs This sign has raised characters. Refer to A117.1 703.3 Raised Characters, and 2009 ICC A117.1 - FIG. 703.3.5 CHARACTER HEIGHT, 703.3.1 General, and 703.3.5 Character Height, similar to ADA703.2 Raised Characters:Raised characters shall comply with 703.2 and shall be duplicated in braille complying with 703.3. 703.2.5 Character Height. Character height measured vertically from the baseline of the character shall be 5/8 inch (16 mm) minimum and 2 inches (51 mm) maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter "I". EXCEPTION: Where visual characters comply with 703.2 and are accompanied by braille complying with 703.3, they shall not be required to comply with 703.5.2 through 703.5.9.

An interior designer can do or specify all of the following to reduce water consumption in a commercial building except? A. specify low flow fixtures B. specify products that have the WaterSense label C. specify water sensors D. locate all of the plumbing on the same wall and or within 10 feet (3048 mm) of a wet column, plumbing chase or plumbing trench

D. locate all of the plumbing on the same wall and or within 10 feet (3048 mm) of a wet column, plumbing chase or plumbing trench Because of the cost of plumbing and the necessity of sloping drainage pipes, plumbing fixtures should be located close to existing plumbing lines. In most commercial buildings, most plumbing is concentrated in one area near the core; from this location, it serves the toilet rooms, drinking fountains and similar facilities. To provide service to sinks, private toilets and the like, wet columns are sometimes included in the building. While this consideration to location saves money and helps with drainage, it does NOT impact the water consumption or conservation.

When specifying a specialty flooring material, the interior designer can obtain unbiased information on the hazards of a cleaning agent, required for maintenance, from the A. Environmental Protection Agency B. cleaning agent manufacturer C. flooring manufacturer D. material safety data sheet

D. material safety data sheet Although the cleaning agent manufacturer would possibly provide warnings about the health effects of its products, the most unbiased source is the material safety data sheet. The flooring manufacturer would only list the recommended cleaning agents and not be responsible for detailing potential hazards of the cleaning agent.

When audible and visual (A/V) life safety alarms are used in a combination device, a general consideration that needs to be accommodated is: A. the visual devices requirements are superseded by those of audible alarms B. the strobe aspect of a device must meet those of the audible requirements C. the color of the device must be carefully coordinated with the design D. more devices may be required due to the requirements for visible alarms

D. more devices may be required due to the requirements for visible alarms Source: Kennon, K. E., Harmon, S. K. The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., Fire Protection Systems, Alarm Systems, Visual and Audible Alarm Systems Whenever a combination device is used, it must be located according to the requirements for visual alarms. Visual alarms must typically be installed in more locations than audible alarms, as a visual alarm can be observed only in the space in which it is installed, whereas an audible alarm can still be heard even when not located directly within the line of sight.

Which of the following would be the best choice for a bright, multicolored carpet to be used in a high traffic daycare center that has a moderate budget and is concerned with staining and cleaning of the flooring? A. synthetic blend B. polyester C. wool D. nylon

D. nylon Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Floor Finishes, Soft Flooring, Carpet Fibers Nylon is an economical carpet material that is very strong and wear resistant. It has a high stain resistance and excellent crush resistance, it can be dyed with a wide variety of colors, and it cleans easily. Because of its many advantages, including cost, nylon is the most widely used fiber for residential and commercial carpet. NylonDurable, resilient, quick drying; resists soil, mold, fading. Solution dyed. Nylon 6 easier to recycle than nylon 6,6. Moderate cost OlefinGood abrasion, soil, mildew resistance; colorfast, improved texture available. Recycled content but not recyclable. Lowest cost PolyesterGood fade, abrasion, soil, stain resistance; dyes well. Texture similar to wool. Low resilience, wear paths, matting. Recycled content but not recyclable. Low cost; short life WoolExcellent durability, texture, and stain, flame resistance, dyes very well. Biodegradable. High cost; long life

In terms of the programming process, what is one of the most reliable ways to gather information for a commercial project? A. field survey B. meeting with the CEO to discuss the company's needs C. client interviews D. observations

D. observations Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Programming, Information Gathering One of the most reliable ways to gather information is by observing what people actually do rather than by listening to what they say they do.

What should be the minimum distance between exits within a space? A. one-third the diagonal distance of the room area B. twice the diagonal distance C. one-half the length of the room D. one-half the diagonal distance of the room area

D. one-half the diagonal distance of the room area The exits should be placed at least one-half the diagonal distance of the room area so that a fire or emergency will not block BOTH exits. Refer to the 2018 International Building Code, SECTION 1007 EXIT AND EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CONFIGURATION

A criteria matrix is used for: A. construction schedules B. creating symmetrical floor plans C. design budgets D. organizing programming information

D. organizing programming information Source: Space Planning Basics, 4th Edition, Planning Methodology A criteria or decision matrix is a means of visually representing programming information and requirements so that alternative choices are visibly represented. It may or may not have adjacencies added such as below.

For the home of a family of 4 with two young children, the client has indicated that they would like to use a natural and environmentally-friendly hard flooring throughout the main areas of their home. The flooring must be durable and appropriate for their 2 and 4 year old children. Which of the following would be your best choice to meet their needs? A. oak hardwood with sisal and coir area rugs B. distressed walnut hardwood flooring C. 100% wool broadloom D. palm wood flooring

D. palm wood flooring Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Sustainable Design, Flooring In addition to the commonly used maple, oak, birch and beech there are many wood species, both domestic and imported, that can be used for flooring. Of the many available, two qualify as sustainable products: bamboo and palm wood. Palm wood is harvested as a by-product from plantation-grown coconut palms. Palm wood flooring is available in 3⁄4" x 3" (19mm x 76mm) wide strips with tongue and groove edges like those of standard strip flooring. It is harder and more stable than maple, red oak and white oak.

What method enables the designer and owner to evaluate the cost implication of each building component and to make decisions concerning both quantity and quality that might meet the original budget estimate? A. parameter B. life cycle cost analysis C. cost indexing D. parameter and matrix costing

D. parameter and matrix costing As the interior designer and client have a better idea of the exact scope of the work, the budget can be refined by the parameter method, which involves an expanded itemization of construction quantities and furnishings and assignment of unit costs to these quantities. For example, floor finishes can be broken down into carpeting, vinyl tile, wood-strip flooring and so forth. The areas are multiplied by an estimated cost per square foot, and the total budget for flooring is developed. With this type of budgeting, it's possible to evaluate the cost implication of each building component and to make decisions concerning quantity and quality that meet the original budget estimate. Another way to compare and evaluate alternative construction components is matrix costing, a technique in which a matrix is drawn with various alternatives and the individual elements that combine to make up the total cost of the alternatives.

If soils are weak or poor surface conditions are encountered when designing for a building's foundation, column like shafts are installed (drilled and filled with concrete, power driven) to depths to reach acceptable supporting stratum. These are: A. posts B. spread footings C. spiral footings D. piles

D. piles Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Structural Systems for Buildings If soils are weak or poor surface conditions are encountered, column-like shafts called piles are installed (drilled and filled with concrete, power driven) to depths to reach acceptable supporting stratum. Piles are constructed of steel, concrete, or pressure-treated wood, such as the piers (piles) of a boat dock over water. These piles are tied together with grade beams for the building walls or columns to bear on—transferring the loads to the bottom of the piles and stronger soils.

Indoor air quality can affect all of the following EXCEPT? A. motivation B. absenteeism C. productivity D. relationship with coworkers

D. relationship with coworkers Source: EPA.gov, Introduction to IAQ Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) refers to the air quality within and around buildings and structures, especially as it relates to the health and comfort of building occupants. IAQ is a concern for Homes, Schools, Offices, and Other Large Buildings. Understanding and controlling common pollutants indoors can help reduce your risk of indoor health concerns. Health effects from indoor air pollutants may be experienced soon after exposure or, possibly, years later. In addition to maintaining health, the quality of indoor air affects people's sense of well being, and can affect absenteeism, productivity, creativity, and motivation.

Denim insulation has been specified for a new eco-friendly daycare center. This is an example of: A. renewable material B. recovered materials C. pre-industrial materials D. post-consumer material

D. post-consumer material Source: Kennon, K. E., Harmon, S. K. The Codes Guidebook for Interiors., FINISH AND FURNITURE SELECTION In terms of sustainable product standards, credit is given particularly for reduction of pollutants in or produced by the material, use of renewable power, use of post‐consumer recycled or organic materials, product reuse or reclamation, and social equality from manufacturers and suppliers. SMaRT is one example of a sustainable product standard and label controlled by the Institute for Market Transformation to Sustainability (MTS), and is used to evaluate individual products and finishes rather than complete buildings or spaces (such as LEED) It comprises more than 50 individual standards appropriate for use for multiple types of products. SMaRT can be used to evaluate architectural products, paints and coatings, flooring, furniture, lighting, carpet, and fabric manufacturers' and retailers' processes. For example, it is considered the standard for the Sustainable Furnishings Council. SMaRT is considered a multi‐attribute standard, because it evaluates the effect of a product on the global supply chain, environment, and the multiple stages of a product from raw materials extraction to end of life/reuse, including life cycle assessment (LCA) and SMaRT's Environmental+Health Product Declaration (EPD+HPD) based on LCA.

In a project for a large call center, which plan would show the locations of computers? A. electric plan B. mechanical plan C. switching plan D. power or telephone plan

D. power or telephone plan For large or complex projects, the interior designer sometimes draws a separate power plane or telephone plan showing the locations of electrical outlets, telephone outlets, and other signal systems, like the locations of computers, and communication systems.

Which plan prepared by the interior designer would show the location of power/data/switching? A. construction plan B. reflected ceiling plan C. furniture plan D. power/communications plan

D. power/communications plan Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Construction Drawings For a plan of this type and scale or for larger or complex projects such as commercial projects, the interior designer often draws a separate power/communications plan. This is different from the electrical engineer's power plan. For a smaller scale project, the outlets are often shown on the furniture plan. The location of outlets would not be shown on the RCP, and the construction plan would become too cluttered with the required informatio

Which is the MOST important requirement for exits? A. required in buildings without sprinklers B. limited in length C. corridors or stairways D. protected by fire-rated construction

D. protected by fire-rated construction Exits are not limited in length (because they are protected), can be something as simple as a door, and are required in all buildings.

Which of the following is NOT a solution for addressing acoustical control with system furniture? A. provide panels that block line of sight between employees when seated. B. offsetting workstations so that employees do not speak "at" each other. C. provide rigid fiberglass within the hollow core of standing height panels. D. provide head height divider panels with a sheet metal inner septum.

D. provide head height divider panels with a sheet metal inner septum. Source: Avant Acoustics, AVANT's Guide to Acoustical Barriers The correct answer is "provide head height divider panels with a sheet metal inner septum." While panels can use an inner septum or a masonite or metal sheet barrier to reflect sound, in general, the greater the distance sound must travel around the barrier, the less you'll hear of that sound. Acoustical barriers should block the line of sight to the noise. If you can see it, you can hear it. Keep in mind this includes both the horizontal and vertical planes. Effective barriers typically extend well past the point where the line of sight is interrupted. The attenuation from barriers relates to the distance between the path sound travels between source and receiver and the actual distance between source and receiver. Acoustical panels help to absorb ambient sound and block sound transmission between workstations. A hollow inner core between outer panel materials is covered with one to two inches of fiberglass as a sound absorber.

Which method of veneer cut results in the straightest grain possible from most species of trees? A. half-round slicing B. flat slicing C. rotary slicing D. quarter slicing

D. quarter slicing Quarter slicing creates the most straight grained pattern because the cutting knife strikes the growth rings at a 90 degree angle.

If you were specifying the fabric for sofas in a sunroom, which would be the LEAST desirable choice? A. acrylic B. polyester C. modacrylic D. rayon

D. rayon Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Fibers, Textiles, and Leather Rayon is a cellulosic fiber made from wood pulp and while it is soft with excellent drapability, it is one of the least desirable fabrics in general due to its high flammability. It has moderate abrasion resistance, low resiliency, and specifically has very poor resistance to fading from sunlight. A better choice would be Sunbrella, the registered trademark for a proprietary blend of solution-dyed acrylic and polyester for superior weather-resistance and commercial indoor and outdoor use.

The ability of a previously used material to be used as a resource in the manufacture of a new product is? A. coproduction B. material recovery C. adaptive reuse D. recyclability

D. recyclability Source: Ballast, D. K., FAIA. Interior Construction and Detailing for Designers and Architects, eTextbook., Sustainable Design Recyclability is the ability of a previously used material to be used as a resource in the manufacture of a new product. Adaptive reuse is the process of redesigning and converting a building to a use other than that for which it was originally developed. Material recovery is collection and use of diverted waste materials Coproduction is the creation of a new coproduct from materials that would otherwise be considered production waste. These materials are used in manufacture of a new saleable byproduct. Construction and demolition (C&D) materials represent a significant waste stream in the United States generated when new building and civil-engineering structures are built and when existing buildings and civil-engineering structures are renovated or demolished (including deconstruction activities). These various C&D materials can be diverted from disposal and managed into new productive uses: - Concrete - Wood (from buildings) - Asphalt (from roads and roofing shingles) - Gypsum (the main component of drywall) - Metals - Bricks - Glass - Plastics Salvaged building components (doors, windows, and plumbing fixtures) Trees, stumps, earth, and rock from clearing sites Source: Sustainable Management of Construction and Demolition Materials

All of the following are true about the "retainage" except? A. provides the owner with leverage to ensure the job is completed B. is withheld from every application for payment C. can be used to provide money to satisfy any claims that may arise D. represents 10% of the total cost of the project and is paid up front prior to any construction work commencing

D. represents 10% of the total cost of the project and is paid up front prior to any construction work commencing An amount called the retainage is withheld from each application until the end of the job. This retainage is typically 10% of each application amount and gives the owner leverage in making sure the job is completed. The retainage amount can also be used to provide money to satisfy any claims that may arise.

On a Mechanical Plan, what is represented by the following symbol? A. supply air register B. supply air diffuser C. AHU access panel D. return air grille

D. return air grille Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Mechanical and Plumbing Plans The symbol represents a return air grille, and can be angled in either direction. On the NCIDQ Exam, refer to your drawing legend for all symbols.

You have contracted with a custom woodworker to create a conference table with a fine quality wood finish that shows minimal grain. Which veneer cut would result in the least veneer waste, but be the least desirable to use for the table? A. rift slicing B. plain slicing C. quarter slicing D. rotary slicing

D. rotary slicing Source: Qpractice Answer Vault, Wood Veneer With rotary slicing, the log is mounted on a lathe and turned against a knife, which peels off a continuous layer of veneer. This produces a very pronounced grain pattern that is often undesirable in fine quality wood finishes, although it does produce the most veneer with the least waste.

Bubble diagrams are most often part of which design phase? A. pre-design B. design development C. programming D. schematic

D. schematic Source: Space Planning Basics, 4th Edition., 2. Planning Methodology Schematic design - preliminary conceptual, spatial, and technical design of project - includes preliminary space planning often using relationship diagrams, matrices, bubble diagrams, blocking diagrams, stacking and fit plans, as well as initial furnishings, fixtures and equipment design/layout. It also includes development of a project's conceptual and thematic issues, color, material and finish studies, preliminary code review, and preliminary budgetary information. While programming may sometimes use bubble diagrams, the information collected is often restricted to a written program or matrices then expanded into drawings representing design solutions during the schematic design phase. Schematic design will always explore the spatial relationships, whereas programming is more about exploring the functional requirements and relationships.

The following symbol is used to indicate? A. elevation reference mark B. service counter elevation C. specification reference mark D. section reference mark

D. section reference mark This is a section mark and the arrow and "tail" should point toward the section view. This symbol can be vertical or horizontal and the view number as listed on the drawing sheet is at the top in the bubble. The sheet number is at the bottom.

Which of the following is TRUE about a circular accessible handrail for stairs? A. must be made of a non-slip material B. must be mounted between 36" and 42" above the front edge of the step C. must have a 1 1/2" clear space between the handrail and the wall D. should have a diameter between 1 1/4" to 2"

D. should have a diameter between 1 1/4" to 2" Source: 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 505.7.1 Circular Cross Section. 505.7.1 Circular Cross Section. Handrail gripping surfaces with a circular cross section shall have an outside diameter of 1 1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum and 2 inches (51 mm) maximum. 1 1/2″ is the MINIMUM clear space required between the handrail and wall, it can be more.

A designer would like to purchase furniture and accessories for a number of residential clients. The designer A. should not make retail sales, but bill hourly and contract purchasing out to an agent or dealer B. must sell all merchandise or workroom services at the same percentage of markup as specified in the contract C. must charge sales tax on the markup D. should research whether local zoning allow her to sell retail furniture from her office location

D. should research whether local zoning allow her to sell retail furniture from her office location Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Business Legal Filings and Licenses Most local jurisdictions require every business, including professional services, to have a license. This allows the business to practice and usually serves as a basis for taxation. The allowable business activities in a particular location are controlled by state and local zoning ordinances based upon the land use. Interior designers should also research the particular requirements of their local and state licensing and taxing agencies. Many states have laws regulating the practice of interior design. Some states have practice acts, which require that anyone who wants to practice as an interior designer meet certain requirements and obtain a license from the state to practice. Other states have title acts, which regulate who may use the title of "interior designer" (or some similar title), although anyone may have a business that offers interior design services as long as they do not use the regulated title.

All are true about pictogram signage except? A. signs must have a non-glare finish B. text description must be placed directly below the pictogram C. pictograms must be at least 6" (150 mm) high D. signs must be at least 12" (300 mm) wide

D. signs must be at least 12" (300 mm) wide Source: 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 703 Signs While there are many requirements for the different elements of signage, there is not one for the overall size of a sign. ADA 703.6.1 Pictogram Field. Pictograms shall have a field height of 6 inches (150 mm) minimum. Characters and braille shall not be located in the pictogram field. Figure 703.6.1 Pictogram Field 703.6.2 Finish and Contrast. Pictograms and their field shall have a non-glare finish. Pictograms shall contrast with their field with either a light pictogram on a dark field or a dark pictogram on a light field. 703.6.3 Text Descriptors. Pictograms shall have text descriptors located directly below the pictogram field. Text descriptors shall comply with 703.2, 703.3 and 703.4.

The typical size of an office's projects, the filing system used by the office, the capabilities of the reproduction and plotting equipment, and client requirements all determine: A. the number of technical staff required by the firm B. whether the drawings are completed by hand, CAD or BIM C. the fees charged by the firm D. size of the drawing sheet used for an interior design project

D. size of the drawing sheet used for an interior design project Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Construction Drawings, Specifications, and Contracts, Sheet Size The size of a drawing sheet used for interior design projects depends on several factors. Typically, an office will use one or two standard sized for all projects it does. Sheet size depends on the typical size of an office's projects, the filing system used, the capabilities of the reproduction and plotting equipment and client requirements. Sheet size is most typically determined by the size needed to draw a floor plan on one sheet without dividing the plan into sections.

The "brand" of any client conveys meaning to their users/consumers. In regard to a corporate brand and how it affects the design of a project, which is NOT typically a brand factor that a designer considers in creating their design solution? A. customer service quality B. corporate color(s) C. company logo D. social customs

D. social customs Source: Piotrowski, C. M. (2016). Designing Commercial Interiors., Forces That Shape Commercial interior Design, Influence of Corporate Brands A brand involves all the elements that can help to identify a company to its consumers. It includes its logo, corporate colors, company name, and the quality of customer service expected by the buyer.

A special type of adjacency diagram that shows the locations of major spaces or departments when a project occupies more than one floor of a multistory building is? A. folded adjacency matrix B. multi floor schedule C. multi level adjacency matrix D. stacking diagram

D. stacking diagram Source: Ballast, D. K., FAIA, 9425, N. N. PDF - Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam, eTextbook., Information Analysis and Synthesis, Determining and Representing Space Relationships A stacking diagram is a special type of adjacency diagram. This type of drawing show the locations of major space or departments when a project occupies more than one floor of a multistory building. A stacking diagram based on departments or major groupings of spaces is usually worked out before each floor area is planned in detail.

What type of drawing is needed if a project involves more than one floor of a building and the designer must investigate spatial relationships in a vertical manner? A. zoning analysis B. blocking diagram C. adjacency matrix D. stacking plan

D. stacking plan

You have been asked to create a formal and sophisticated space. Which elements and principles of design are most appropriate to create this type of feeling in the space? A. radial balance, vertical lines, the colors navy, gray, and white B. symmetrical balance, horizontal lines, the colors black, gray, and white C. symmetrical balance, horizontal lines, the colors navy, gray, and white D. symmetrical balance, vertical lines, the colors navy, gray, and white

D. symmetrical balance, vertical lines, the colors navy, gray, and white Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Principles of Design, Balance Symmetry, vertical line and dark colors all provide a formal, sophisticated feel to a space and would be appropriate to use to convey a sophisticated and formal mood and feel. Horizontal lines and radial balance convey a more casual and informal mood and feel.

A designer selecting glass to meet the requirements for safety glazing in a hazardous location should specify A. tempered or wire glass B. heat-strengthened glass or wire glass C. laminated glass or wire glass D. tempered or laminated glass

D. tempered or laminated glass Only tempered and laminated glass are considered to be safety glazing. Wire glass is fire resistant glazing, and tempered glass is heat-strengthened.

This drawing that generally shows most of the furniture and equipment to scale, and gives the designer an opportunity to see if the actual spaces are suitable for the proposed building space A. hierarchy plan B. matrix plan C. bubble diagram D. text fit plan

D. text fit plan generally shows most of the furniture and equipment and is drawn to scale.

All of the following are true about purchase orders except? A. list the items, exact catalog number and pricing of items to be ordered B. is issued after the designer has received the signed proposal and any required prepayments/deposits from the client C. is typically the only way that a manufacturer/ vendor will accept an order D. the PO is generated and sent after the designer receives the acknowledgment of availability from the manufacturer

D. the PO is generated and sent after the designer receives the acknowledgment of availability from the manufacturer A purchase order is the form that is sent to the manufacturer or vendor and lists the items to be purchased, their exact catalog number, pricing, shipping info and other data. A separate PO is created for each vendor. A PO serves as an internal record for the design firm. After the manufacturer receives the PO they send the acknowledgement. Most vendors do NOT accept telephone orders.

The designer transfers all warranties and manuals for all goods within a project to the client when? A. the goods are installed B. the designer creates a maintenance schedule C. after the goods have been paid for D. the designer is the seller of the goods

D. the designer is the seller of the goods If the interior designer sold the goods to the client, then he or she should be prepared to transfer the warranties and instructions, and provide appropriate training to the client. The seller of the goods is the one who transfers the warranties and manuals to client so only time a designer would do this is when the designer is the seller.

Establishing goals, collecting and analyzing facts, uncovering and testing concepts, determining needs and stating the problem describes? A. client qualification B. the principles of design C. programmatic concepts D. the five step process

D. the five step process Source: Problem Seeking, An Architectural Programming Primer, Five Steps There are several methods of programming, all of which can be used to establish the guidelines and information on which the design process can be based. One popular programming method uses a five-step process in relationship to the four major considerations of form, function, economy and time. This method is described in Problem Seeking, by William M. Peña and Steven A. Parshall. The five-step process involves establishing goals, collecting and analyzing facts, uncovering and testing concepts, determining needs and stating the problem.

As part of the process of estimating the amount of fabric required for a drapery installation, you need to account for what factor(s) when determining the cut length of the fabric panel? A. the stacking space of the fabric panel before pleating B. the return space and overlap of the drapery draw C. the % (percent) fullness of the fabric pleating D. the header dimension of the fabric installation method

D. the header dimension of the fabric installation method Source: 9425, D.K.B.F.N. N. (2018). Interior Design Reference Manual: Everything You Need to Know to Pass the NCIDQ Exam, eTextbook., Finishes, Fabric Quantity Calculations, Calculating Drapery Determine the cut length of panels needed. This is the distance from the top of the traverse rod to the bottom of the drapery, plus header and hem. Fullness, pleating, stacking, returns and overlap, all have to do with determining the widths of fabric needed, not the length.

All of the following are true about a graphic scale EXCEPT? A. is a band of alternating light and dark portions, each of which represents a certain length B. changes size in the same proportion as the drawing when reproduced C. used when drawings are reproduced at a smaller size D. the measurement of scale is dependent on having a scale instrument

D. the measurement of scale is dependent on having a scale instrument When scaled drawings are going to be reproduced at a larger or smaller size than the original numeric scale, a written scale, such as 1⁄4" = 1'- 0: will no longer be accurate. To overcome this problem and still provide an indication of scale, a graphic scale can be used. A graphic scale is a band of alternating light and dark portions, each of which represents a certain length. When a graphic scale is used, the measurement of scale is not dependent on having a scaled instrument; the graphic scale changes size in the same proportion as the drawing when reproduced. Although not as accurate as using a standard scale, a graphic scale is very useful when drawings are reproduced at odd size for presentation or publication. Graphic scales can be used alone, for presentation drawings, or with a numeric scale in case the drawing is resized.

When selecting interior partition finishes to meet flame-spread standards, the most important considerations are A. whether or not the building has an automatic sprinkler system, and the construction type B. the hourly rating of the partition on which the finish will be installed, and the construction type C. whether or not the partition is a fire barrier, and the ratings of assemblies in the partition D. the occupancy group, and the location in the building where the finishes will be used

D. the occupancy group, and the location in the building where the finishes will be used Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Finish and Furniture Selection, Determining Finish Classifications Building codes limit flammability of finishes based on the occupancy of the building and whether the finishes are in an exit or not. Occupancy classification is based upon the usage and risks or hazards of a space, and how people would react and be able exit in the case of an emergency. A sprinkler system may allow a reduction in one flame-spread class rating but it is not the overriding variable. Flame-spread requirements are also independent of the rating of the assembly on which the finishes are placed. The general rule of thumb is that stricter finishes are required in occupancies where the occupants are immobile, sleeping, or have security measures imposed on them that restrict freedom of movement. This includes Institutional occupancies, such as Health Care and Detention/Correctional facilities, or where occupants are provided with overnight accommodations, such as hotels and dormitories. In contrast, more relaxed requirements are found in Industrial and Storage occupancies where occupants are assumed to be alert, mobile, and fewer in number. Certain buildings that have fewer stories and lower occupant loads may also be subject to fewer restrictions.

An often overlooked aspect of earning CEU's (continuing education units) is: A. they always address health, safety and welfare topics and conditions. B. only those topics necessary for professional re-certification are required. C. they are always short one- or two-hour long "courses" on a topic of study. D. they provide prospective new employers with advanced learning evidence.

D. they provide prospective new employers with advanced learning evidence. Source: Piotrowski, C. M. (2013). Professional Practice for Interior Designers., The Job Search, Resumé, Education For professionals already in practice, employers are not particularly interested in grade-point average or academic activities. Instead, professionals should include continuing education units (CEUs) and any other formal educational training in their resumes. However, they should list only the most recent and any others particularly relevant to the job. You can always provide a supplemental sheet when needed.

In general, fire door assemblies are rated at what fraction of the rating of the surrounding wall? A. the same B. one and one-half C. one-fourth D. three-fourths

D. three-fourths Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Door and Window Schedules In general, door assemblies are rated at three-fourths of the rating of the surrounding wall. For example, a 45 minute door is used in a 1-hour rated wall, a 3-hour fire door is used in a 4-hour rated wall. There are some exceptions, such as a 20 minute door permitted for use in a 1-hour wall assembly separating a tenant suite from a public corridor. However, it is acceptable to use a door with a higher fire rating than the opening requires.

Why would you investigate using a leveling compound when researching the proper application of the desired finished flooring material? A. to help increase the point load impact of the flooring assembly B. to help increase the subfloor assembly stiffness to eliminate squeaks C. to allow the use of a "polished" concrete finished floor material D. to eliminate irregularities and provide for a smooth subfloor surface

D. to eliminate irregularities and provide for a smooth subfloor surface Source: Kennon, K. E. (07/2018). Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Horizontal Structural Units, Flooring Systems, Concrete Slabs Subflooring material must be smooth, level, and suitable for installation of the floor's finish material. Sometimes an existing concrete floor receives a new subfloor or the application of a leveling material to smooth out irregularities.

What is the difference between flooring underlayment and a leveling material? A. underlayments are added to the top of a subfloor while leveling materials are a part of the subflooring installation B. underlayments provide a smooth subfloor finish while leveling compounds help increase the floor assembly stiffness C. underlayments help provide a stiff subfloor system while leveling materials help eliminate subfloor squeaks and bounce D. underlayments allows impact loads to be spread across the subfloor while leveling materials provide for a flat, smooth subfloor finish

D. underlayments allows impact loads to be spread across the subfloor while leveling materials provide for a flat, smooth subfloor finish Source: Kennon, K. E. (07/2018). Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Floor/Ceiling Assemblies, Walls, and Stairs, Horizontal Structural Units, Flooring Systems, Concrete Slabs While a flooring underlayment and a leveling material both help make an existing floor suitable for the application of a new finish floor material, these are the differences the main differences between these two materials: Surface: Subflooring material must be smooth, level, and suitable for installation of the floor finish material. Sometimes an existing concrete floor receives a new subfloor or the application of a leveling material to smooth out irregularities. Function: Underlayment is an additional layer, often plywood or hardboard, added on top of the subflooring. Underlayment helps spread out impact loads on the floor, and prepares the surface for direct application of finish materials that require a smooth surface. The underlayment may be a separate layer over the boards or panels of the subfloor, or may be combined with the subfloor itself as a compound material. ... underlayment panels act together with the joists as large beams, increasing the stiffness of the floor assembly and reducing floor creep and squeaking.

Window treatments are used for all of the following functional purposes except? A. control light B. reduce sound reflections within a space C. provide privacy D. unify or disguise an awkward or undesirable grouping of openings

D. unify or disguise an awkward or undesirable grouping of openings Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Wall and Window Finishes, Window Treatments While window treatments can be used to unify or disguise an awkward or undesirable grouping of openings, this is an aesthetic and not a functional consideration/purpose.

All of the following are examples of trim or molding EXCEPT? A. panel B. casing C. chair rail D. wainscoting

D. wainscoting Source: International Building Code, Chapter 2 Definitions; Chapter 8 Interior Finishes All of these are examples of molding or trim except wainscoting, which is traditional wood paneling that extends from the floor up a portion of the wall, typically ending at the chair rail. Interior wall and ceiling finish is defined in the International Building Code (IBC) as exposed interior surfaces of buildings including but not limited to: fixed or movable walls or partitions, toilet room privacy partitions, columns, wall and ceiling finishes including wainscoting, paneling, or other finish, applied either structurally or for decoration, acoustical correction, surface insulation, or similar purposes, but not including trim. Trim is defined as picture molds, chair rails, baseboards, handrails, door and window frames, and similar decorative or protective materials used in fixed applications. The distinction is important in terms of classification and testing for fire performance. Requirements do not apply to some types of trim, including handrails and guardrails. Nor do they apply to materials that are less than 0.036 in (0.91 mm) thick and applied directly to the surfaces of walls or ceilings.

Which of the following is generally NOT considered FF&E? A. vending machines built into an opening B. vertical blinds C. a commissioned sculpture bolted to a wall D. wall-to-wall carpeting

D. wall-to-wall carpeting Carpeting is a finish item (like paint or ceiling tile) that is attached to the construction and is typically part of the construction contract. Even though a sculpture is physically attached to the construction, it is commissioned directly with the artist and may be included in the FF&E budget. Vertical blinds are sometimes included in the construction contract but not as commonly as wall-to-wall carpeting is. Vending machines can also be part of a construction contract, but if there is both a construction and FF&E contract, they are usually part of FF&E. Although all four of the items mentioned may be part of either contract as the client wishes, the question asks which is generally not.

As listed in a window schedule, which dimension is called out first? A. area B. height C. clear opening D. width

D. width Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, 2nd Edition, Door and Window Schedules, FIGURE 13.16 The placement of an exterior window involves four areas of measurement. These are the: unit size of the window assembly rough opening (ro) in the wall to receive the unit sash (size of the glass and material that grips it) glass size (measurement of the glass alone) Similar to doors and cabinetry, the width of the window is called out first, followed by the height.

A third party consultant will provide equipment for a security system and an electrical engineer will design for adequate power supply to security and control systems. Which of the following should you as the interior designer provide: A. Adequate space and support for video cameras, monitors, access devices, and control equipment B. Lighting required for surveillance and deterrence that is compatible with ambient lighting C. Coordination of speakers required for communication near doors with the D. RCP and partition details E. All of these

E. All of these Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Building Systems and Construction, Mechanical and Electrical Systems "Although the security consultant, equipment vendor, electrical engineering consultant and contractor are responsible for designing and installing security systems and providing the power these systems need to operate, the interior designer is often the person who must coordinate the efforts of these team members so that their work fits within the overall interior design and construction of the project. In most cases, this involves making sure necessary information is transmitted between the members of the team and that all required data and details are shown on the final set of drawings. It also requires that the interior design and detail portion of the construction to accommodate the security equipment."

Which of the following process drawings would a designer use to graphically illustrate spatial relationships, and the adjacencies note in the adjacency matrix? A. Test fit diagram B. proto-type sketches C. stacking diagram D. criteria matrix E. bubble diagram

E. bubble diagram

ANSI/BIFMA G1 IS?

Ergonomics Guideline for Furniture Used in Office Work Spaces Designed for Computer Use, provides guidelines for furniture intended for computer use by applying measurable principles and design requirements.

On the drawing shown, place the recommended dimensions for comfortable seating at a residential dining table in the boxes given. Some dimensions may not be required.

For comfortable dining, a 30 in (762 mm) width should be provided for each person, with an allowance of 18 in (457 mm) at the ends of the table for those diners. An 18 in (457 mm) depth should be allowed for each diner's place setting, with a 12 in to 18 in (305 mm to 457 mm) area in the center of the table. This gives a recommended table width of 48 in to 54 in (1220 mm to 1372 mm).

In a project for a large call center, which plan would show the locations of computers? A. electric plan B. mechanical plan C. switching plan D. power or telephone plan

For large or complex projects, the interior designer sometimes draws a separate power plane or telephone plan showing the locations of electrical outlets, telephone outlets, and other signal systems, like the locations of computers, and communication systems.

FSC

Forest Stewardship Council. Promulgates sustainable forestry standards

Which drawing below indicates the correct section as shown in elevation below?

From clues that can be seen from the elevation and in dimensions, one can deduce that D is the correct answer. Option A cuts through a different location in the elevation shown. Option B and Option C are from entirely different pieces of millwork in which the 30" high counter extends and is open from the front view.

what is the ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 standard

Furniture Sustainability Standard was first published in 2008 and remains the leading standard for the assessment of environmental, health and wellness, and social impacts pertinent to furniture products.

detailed quantity takeoff method

If the project has progressed to specific manufacturers and products, the designer can use the detailed quantity takeoff method for a fairly exact budget.

What is IIC?

Impact Insulation Class Rating

What is a flow diagram?

Is used as a scheduling chart or to show a flow of materials or another kind of process from one point to another

LEED

Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design

Greenguard

Low emitting products, including building materials and furnishings

Coefficient of Friction (COF)

Measurement of the degree of slip resistance of a floor surface and ranges from 0 to 1. The higher the number, the less slippery the surface.

Rectified Photography

Method of field measuring and recording that uses digital cameras to photograph facades.

Orthophotography

Method of field measuring and recording that uses digital photography and computer software to correct for optical distortion. Sim to rectified photography.

What is the vertical test code?

NFPA 701/ASTM D6413

What is NRC?

Noise Reduction Coefficient

X Academy is considered a mixed-use occupancy that occupies a 4,200 sq.ft. space on the sixth floor of a 10-story office tower. It is primarily made up of 3,000 sq.ft. of Office Space, but also has a 1,200 sq.ft. Training Classroom for SAT tutoring with tables and chairs. Utilizing IBC 1004.5 MAXIMUM FLOOR AREA ALLOWANCES PER OCCUPANT, what is the total occupant load for Company 'X'? A. 110 B. 80 C. 42 D. 54

SB. 80 ource: 2018 International Building Code, CHAPTER 3 OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION AND USE To calculate the total occupant load, occupant loads for both spaces need to be added together. The office is considered a business area and has an occupant load factor of 150 sq.ft., therefore:Office (business area): 3,000 sq.ft./150 sq.ft =20 occupants Because the training classroom primarily serves children through the 12th grade, it is considered an educational occupancy, not an unconcentrated assembly area even though it was stated there are tables & chairs. It has an occupant load factor of 20 sq.ft., therefore: Training room (classroom): 1,200 sq.ft./20 sq.ft. = 60 occupants Therefore: TOTAL Occupant Load = 20+60 = 80 occupants 305.1 Educational Group E. (2018 International Building Code)Educational Group E occupancy includes, among others, the use of a building or structure, or a portion thereof, by six or more persons at any one time for educational purposes through the 12th grade. If multiple spaces will be exiting into a common area or converging into a common path of travel, the codes require that the occupant load for the shared area be determined by adding the number of occupants who will share a common path to an exit. These methods can be used to determine the number of people that is assumed will be using the corridors, stairs, and exits in the event of a fire: To determine the occupant load for a building or space, take the area of the interior space and divide it by the load factor for the appropriate building type and/or use. If the space or building has more than one type of use, the same is done for each area according to its use and added together. This provides the number of occupants that is allowed in the space. If the total results in a fraction over a half of an occupant, round up to the nearest whole number. Depending on the project, calculations for separate areas and separate occupancies may also need to be made and added together. The final occupant load indicates the number of occupants for which the space must be designed.

Which vinyl wall covering should be recommended for the family room in a single-family dwelling? (A) Type I (B) Type II (C) Type III (D) Type IV

The answer is A. Type I vinyl wall covering is the lightest weight of the three types and is appropriate for residential use. There is no Type IV wall covering.

ANSI/BIFMA/SOHO S6.5 IS

Small Office/Home Office Furniture—Tests, provides performance and safety requirements for storage and desk furniture intended for use in the small office and home office.

What is cleavage membrane?

The cleavage membrane is designed to separate the backing surface from the mortar setting bed and tile allowing the setting bed to be unbonded and free floating; thereby not subject to the instability of the backing surface.

What is a parti diagram

a rough drawing, doodle, or diagram used early in the schematic design process to represent a design concept.

breathability

the ability of a fabric to allow moisture vapor to be transmitted through the material.

What are prescriptive codes?

guidelines stipulate specific behaviors to follow

In an HVAC Plan, what does the following symbol represent? A. Manual volume damper B. Combination fire and smoke damper C. Return air grille with device indicator D. Key note

Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Mechanical and Electrical Systems, Figure 13.4 Partial HVAC Plan This symbol represents a combination fire and smoke damper.

Where are flame-spread ratings in a building MOST restrictive? (A) in exit enclosures (B) on corridor floors (C) in access ways to exits (D) in enclosed spaces

The answer is A. Exit enclosures, such as stairways and exit passageways

What is STC

Sound Transmission Class

In a commercial space, which of the following spaces is exiting or egress not permitted through? A. kitchens B. storage rooms C. closets D. all of these

Source: 2018 International Building Code, 1016.2 Egress through intervening spaces. According to IBC 1016.2, Egress is not permitted through intervening spaces, and per Exception #5, not through kitchens, storage rooms, closets, or spaces used for similar purposes. Refer to the code for other exceptions you may encounter on the exam, including dwelling unit kitchens and conditions as applied to mercantile stockrooms.

Which is the standard test for flammability for wall and ceiling assemblies in building construction? A. NFPA 358 B. UL 268 C. ASTM E-84 D. ASTM E-119

Source: 2018 International Building Code, SECTION 703 FIRE-RESISTANCE RATINGS AND FIRE TESTS ASTM E119 or the Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials These test methods are intended to evaluate the duration for which the types of building elements noted retain their structural integrity. The test methods described in this fire-test-response standard are applicable to assemblies of masonry units composite assemblies of structural materials for buildings, including - load bearing and other walls and partitions - columns - girders - beams - slabs - composite slab - beam assemblies for floors and roof They are also applicable to other assemblies and structural units that constitute permanent integral parts of a finished building.

Which well-known proportioning system uses the human body as a starting point? A. golden section B. Modulor system C. golden ratio D. Fibonacci series

Source: Ching, F.D. K. (09/2014). Architecture: Form, Space, and Order, 4th Edition., Renaissance Theories, Modulor A well-known proportioning system is the Modulor system, developed by the architect Le Corbusier. It is loosely based on the golden section but uses the human body as a starting point.

Calculate the yards of fabric needed for full length drapery at a standard ceiling height. The draperies will hang below the 4″ crown molding. For this scenario use: 92″ finished length, 106″ finished width, 16″ pattern repeat, 20″ standard header and hems, 12″ returns and overlaps 2 1/2 to 1 fullness 54″ wide fabric yards.

Source: Estimating for Interior Designers, Drapery, Problem One, p.103 Part 1 Calculate the modified cut length to accommodate the repeat 92″ + 20″ (for hem and header) = 112″ cut length 112/16 (repeat) = 7 7 repeats (no rounding as exact) 7 x 16 = 112 new modified cut length Multiply x number of panels (you will need to know the opening and fullness for this) Part 2 Calculate the widths needed Width 106″ (finished width) x 2 1/2 (fullness) + 12 = 277 277″/54″ (width of fabric) = 5.1 5 widths (rounded) 5 (widths) x 112 (modified cut length) = 560″ 560/36 (inches in a yard) =15.5 16 yards (round up) of fabric

On a set of construction documents, a drawing view title must include all of the following except: A. Drawing name B. Scale C. Sheet number D. Drawing number on sheet

Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting On a drawing title, in order to identify what the drawing is and how to scale it, it must include the name and scale. The drawing number on the sheet is required because it relates to tags such as elevations and section cuts. Although many office standards will include the sheet number in a view title it is NOT needed because the drawing will already be on the sheet making it repetitive.

On a reflected ceiling plan, what does this symbol represent? A. Flexible duct 18" x 10" high B. Linear slot diffuser 18" long x 10" wide C. Air duct 18" long x 10"wide D. Air duct 18" wide by 10" high

Source: Interior Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, Measurement and Drafting, Mechanical Symbols The symbol shown above, when seen on a reflected ceiling plan, represents an air duct. The dimensions above tell you how wide the opening of the duct is by how high the opening of the duct is, so it is 18″ wide by 10″ high.

The interior designer is tasked with choosing the replacement carpet for the executive conference room in a tenant space. Which standard test must this carpet pass? A. Room Corner Test B. Steiner Tunnel Test C. CAL 133 D. ASTM 2859

Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Glossary Either of these answers would be correct:ASTM 2859 or theMethenamine Pill Test, often simply called the "Pill Test" Federal law requires that all carpets sold in the United States pass this test. The name refers to the methenamine tablet (or pill) that burns the carpet. Basically, the test involves eight (8) specimens 9″ x 9″. A hole is cut in each sample. One tablet is placed on each sample and ignited. If the charred area does not extend to within 2.54 cm (1.0 inch) of the edge of the hole for at least seven of the eight specimens, the carpet or rug meets the acceptance criterion. The radiant panel test, or ASTM E648 is required for rooms that are part of an exit or exit access, such as a corridor. See Radiant flooring vs. Methenamine Pill Test

Using the furniture plan & schedule, determine the type of chair used in the coffee shop and the quantity of the chair used in the project? A. Ch-02, 134 B. Ch-01, 556 C. Ch-01, 11 D. Ch-06, 4

Source: Qpractice NCIDQ Exam Guide, Construction Drawings, Specifications, and Contracts The type of chair used in the coffee shop is chair Ch-01. On the schedule the quantity of the chair used in the overall project is 556.

What is ANSI/BIFMA M7.1?

Standard Test Method for Determining VOC Emissions From Office Furniture Systems, Components, and Seating.

What is CAL TB 116 / NFPA 261

Standard method of test for determining resistance of mock up upholstered furniture material assemblies to ignition by smoldering cigarettes

Which type of drawing would typically include the symbol shown in the illustration? (A) floor plan (B) reflected ceiling plan (C) elevation (D) section detail

The answer is A. The symbol shown is an elevation reference mark and is used on floor plans to indicate (point to) a wall surface that is shown in elevation view elsewhere on the set of drawings. The bottom number is the sheet on which the elevation is drawn, and the top number is the sequential number on that sheet.

SFI

Sustainable Forestry Initiative

Performance Specifications

Tell what results the final construction assembly must achieve, but they give the contractor some choice in how they will be achieved.

ANSI/BIFMA M7.1 IS

Testing for VOC Emissions from Office Furniture and Seating, provides manufacturers, specifiers, and users with a basis for characterizing the initial release of various airborne chemicals emitted from a furniture workstation and seating.

Exit Discharge

That portion of the means-of-egress system between the termination of the exit and a public way.

87. An interior designer has specified a single downlight to illuminate a pedestal directly below. If the downlight produces 1470 candlepower (cp) and is 7 ft above the pedestal, the illumination on the pedestal is _______ footcandles (fc). (Fill in the blank.)

The answer is 30 fc. For a point source of light, the illumination, E, on a surface varies directly with the luminous intensity, I, of the source and inversely with the square of the distance, d, between the source and the point. The formula for illumination is

When selecting a sofa for a residential family room, an interior designer is generally most concerned with which of the following? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) fabric color (B) fabric type (C) cushion density (D) tufting pattern (E) flame-retardant composition (F) bacterial resistance

The answer is A, B, C, and E. An interior designer who is choosing a sofa for a residential family room would be most concerned with the sofa's color, durability, cleanability, health implications, and flammability, all of which are influenced by the type of fabric selected. Cushion density affects the durability of the sofa. While bacterial resistance may be important in commercial installations, such as a hospital or doctor's office, it would be of minor concern in a residential setting. The type of flame retardant used can have health implications. In most cases, the tufting pattern in a residential family room does not directly affect any of these, so this would be of least concern to the designer.

95. The cover sheet on a set of interior design construction drawings typically includes which of the following? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) building department data (B) client's name and address (C) index to drawings (D) small-scale reference floor plan (E) symbols used on the drawings (F) zoning department information

The answer is A, B, C, and E. Cover sheets for interior design construction drawings commonly include building department data, the client's name and address, indexes to drawings, and the symbols used. Cover sheets do not contain a small-scale floor plan or zoning department information.

106. An interior designer would minimize potential conflicts in the contract documents by doing which of the following? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) showing dimensions on only the drawings, not in the specifications (B) having someone who has not worked on the project check the drawings before they are issued (C) writing the project specifications after the drawings are completed (D) ensuring that terminology in the specifications matches the drawings' terminology (E) developing a new drawing sheet organization method to match the needs of each project (F) using a master specification

The answer is A, B, D and F. Showing dimensions on only the drawings, having someone check the drawings before they are issued, ensuring that terminology used in the specifications matches that used on the drawings, and using master specifications are all actions that an interior designer may take to minimize potential conflicts in the contract documents. The specifications should be outlined and written while the drawings are in progress, not after they are completed. The person writing the specifications and the project manager or job captain should be in constant contact while both documents are being completed to minimize conflicts. Drawing sheet organization should follow a standard format regardless of the particular job. This helps those working on the drawings to make sure the required information is included where it is required and relates to other drawings.

125. What are some of the advantages of continuing education for the interior designer? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) It is a way to advance the designer's career. (B) It is a way to keep up to date with changes in the profession. (C) It is required by all states and Canadian provinces. (D) It is required for membership in many professional organizations. (E) It ensures all designers have a comparable level of knowledge. (F) It encourages professional organizations to develop learning opportunities.

The answer is A, B, D, and E. Continuing education is most importantly needed so that designers can keep up to date with constant changes in technology, building materials and methods, legal requirements, and practice procedures. Continuing education is also useful as a way to advance a designer's career, to maintain membership in professional organizations such as the American Society of Interior Designers (ASID) and the International Interior Design Association (IIDA), and to maintain the same level of knowledge and competence as fellow professionals. Continuing education is not required by all states or Canadian provinces, only those that have a practice or title that requires it. Professional organizations are motivated by reasons other than the advantages of continuing education.

Where on the construction drawings is it MOST appropriate to indicate that corridors conform to surface requirements for accessible routes? A) on the detail sections (B) on the elevations (C) on the floor plans (D) in the schedules

The answer is A. The types of surfaces used in corridors, as well as minor changes in elevation such as those that may occur at thresholds and changes of material, usually must meet surface requirements for accessibility. Conformance to these requirements is best shown on the construction drawings' detail sections.

83. Important criteria for designing a lighting cove would include which of the following? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) cost (B) design intent (C) ergonomics (D) aesthetics (E) support framing (F) lighting level

The answer is A, B, D, and F. A lighting cove is a form of indirect lighting that is built into recesses or ceiling valences and may be used as primary lighting or for aesthetic accent. Cost, design intent, aesthetics, and lighting levels are all important criteria an interior designer should consider when designing a lighting cove. However, it is not important to consider ergonomics for a design element that occupants do not physically use or come in direct contact with. Although the framing method would have to be detailed, this is not as important, as there are many ways to detail lighting coves.

105. Which of the following generally include the MOST detailed information about doors? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) schedules (B) floor plans (C) enlarged floor plans (D) room elevations (E) specifications (F) shop drawings

The answer is A, B, E and F. Floor plans reference the door schedule using a symbol and a number to represent each door. The door schedule is included on the project drawings and lists specific information about each door. The specifications define the characteristics of each of the specified door types and also contain the hardware schedule. Shop drawings from the door supplier also show detailed information about the doors. Although room elevations show doors, they do not convey important or detailed information about the doors. Enlarged floor plans are drawn for reasons other than to show door information.

Which of the following statements are true about fire-rated door assemblies? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) Either hinges or rated pivots may be used. (B) Glass area is limited based on rating. (C) Under some circumstances, a closer is not needed. (D) Doors must be the hollow metal type. (E) Ball bearing steel hinges are required. (F) Labeling is required for both the door and frame.

The answer is A, B, E, and F. Either hinges or rated pivots may be used, glass area is limited based on rating, ball bearing steel hinges are required, and labeling is required for both the door and frame. Closers are always required at fire-rated door assemblies (protected openings). While doors with higher fire ratings (greater than 1 hour) are generally hollow metal, wood doors are available with fire ratings of less than 90 minutes.

115. Which of the following schedules are MOST likely to be found on a set of interior design drawings? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) luminaire schedule (B) window schedule (C) door schedule (D) equipment schedule (E) millwork schedule (F) toilet accessory schedule

The answer is A, C, D, and E. Because windows are part of the architectural work in a building, a window schedule would not be found in a set of interior design drawings. Information on specific types of toilet accessories to be provided would be included in the specifications, not on the drawings.

The interior designer is responsible for which of the following life safety considerations? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) maintaining compartmentation according to the original architect's plans (B) planning for an exhaust system in the remodeled spaces (C) locating fire extinguishers as required by the local fire code (D) specifying gaskets and closers on fire doors (E) including fire protection of structural members according to the building type (F) locating fire dampers in new ductwork where fire partitions have been located

The answer is A, C, D, and E. The interior designer is responsible for maintaining compartmentation, locating fire extinguishers, specifying gaskets and closers on fire doors, and including fire protection of structural members. The mechanical engineer is responsible for any exhaust system, if one is required. The mechanical engineer is also responsible for locating and specifying fire dampers, but the placement of these items is based on the location of any fire separations determined by the interior designer.

97. An interior designer is preparing drawings for a tenant build-out. Which of the following items are required by the International Building Code (IBC) when submitting for a building permit? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) finish schedule or finish plan (B) architectural millwork details (C) all portions of the means of egress (D) custom furniture drawings (E) mechanical drawings (F) plan of interior space relative to entire floor or building

The answer is A, C, E, and F. The finish schedule or plan, means of egress, mechanical drawings, and interior space plan (among other items) are all required by the IBC to be submitted for review. Architectural millwork details and custom furniture drawings are seldom required.

100. Furniture plans for commercial projects typically include which of the following? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) code number for each piece of furniture (B) computers (C) desk lamp location (D) furniture location (E) partitions (F) telephone and data outlets

The answer is A, D, E and F. Furniture plans for commercial projects must always include partitions and the location and code number of all furniture items to distinguish specific items. Telephone, data, and power outlet locations are sometimes shown to relate the furniture with required services. Desk lamp locations and computers are not shown because they are plugged into power outlets already shown.

The adjacency diagram shown is used for space planning for an executive group Which personnel should be located closest to the VP of exploration? (Choose the three that apply.) (A) CEO (B) controller (C) traffic (D) treasurer (E) Executive VP (F) VP of operations

The answer is A, E, and F. In the adjacency diagram, the heavy lines and the number "1" indicate a primary relationship. The CEO, executive VP, and VP of operations are linked to the VP of exploration in this way in the diagram, so they should be located the closest.

When completing a set of construction drawings for a restaurant kitchen, an interior designer should include an enlarged floor plan in order to (A) show all kitchen equipment and reference notes (B) indicate detailed dimensions of the countertop layout (C) show all plumbing drains and hot and cold supply points (D) satisfy health department requirements for submitted drawings

The answer is A. A commercial kitchen contains a complex collection of equipment, work surfaces, and plumbing. A standard ¼ in scale plan drawing probably would not be large enough to show all the equipment, dimensions, and annotation required, so a large-scale plan is typically necessary to communicate this information. Detailed dimensions of the countertop are not the only pieces of information required for a commercial kitchen. As with countertop layout, plumbing information (option C) is not the only information required and would be included on the mechanical engineer's drawings. Health department requirements do not require an enlarged floor plan as long as all the required information is shown. In some cases—for example, for a simple kitchen layout—this may be possible with the same scale drawing as the rest of the project.

Which standard of the Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association (BIFMA) establishes criteria for the sustainability of furniture? (A) ANSI/BIFMA e3 (B) ANSI/BIFMA G1 (C) ANSI/BIFMA M7.1 (D) ANSI/BIFMA/SOHO S6.5

The answer is A. ANSI/BIFMA e3, Furniture Sustainability Standard, provides performance criteria addressing environmental and social impacts throughout the supply chain of furniture, as well as product-based characteristics that impact the environment, health and wellness, and society. ANSI/BIFMA G1, Ergonomics Guideline for Furniture Used in Office Work Spaces Designed for Computer Use, provides guidelines for furniture intended for computer use by applying measurable principles and design requirements. ANSI/BIFMA M7.1, Testing for VOC Emissions from Office Furniture and Seating, provides manufacturers, specifiers, and users with a basis for characterizing the initial release of various airborne chemicals emitted from a furniture workstation and seating. ANSI/BIFMA/SOHO S6.5, Small Office/Home Office Furniture—Tests, provides performance and safety requirements for storage and desk furniture intended for use in the small office and home office.

In designing a room in which work will take place both at video display terminals and at standard work surfaces at each individual workstation, what approach to lighting design would be MOST appropriate? (A) Use indirect ambient lighting, and use individual task lights at each workstation. (B) Locate downlights over work surfaces, and use indirect lighting fixtures over the terminals. (C) Use low-brightness troffers controlled by dimmers, and use task lighting on the work surfaces. (D) Specify a direct-indirect system that is locally controlled at each workstation.

The answer is A. Any design with provided direct lighting, as in options B, C, and D, might result in reflections off the screens. Because the question does not state that the video display terminals are in known locations, an ambient/task light system is best.

Which seating group shown would be BEST for planning a waiting area to accommodate six people in a health clinic?

The answer is A. Because a waiting area is generally filled with strangers who prefer not to share the same sofa, a layout that provides individual seating is best, which eliminates options B and D. Option A is better than option C because it makes it easier for people to circulate to and from the chairs, and it increases the distance between people facing each other if all chairs are occupied.

When selecting interior partition finishes to meet flame-spread standards, the MOST important considerations are (A) the occupancy group and the location in the building where the finishes will be used (B) whether or not the building has an automatic sprinkler system and the construction type (C) whether or not the partition is a fire barrier and the ratings of assemblies in the partition (D) the hourly rating of the partition on which the finish will be installed and the construction type

The answer is A. Building codes limit the flammability of finishes based on the occupancy of the building and whether the finishes are in an exit or not. A sprinkler system may allow a reduction in one flame-spread class rating but is not the overriding variable. Flame-spread requirements are also independent of the rating of the assembly on which the finishes are placed.

Changing a ceiling from gypsum wallboard to acoustic tile would MOST affect the room's A) reverberation time (B) sound transmission (C) decibel loss (D) impact insulation class

The answer is A. Changing from wallboard to acoustic tile affects the total absorption of a room and thereby changes the reverberation time.

An interior designer is selecting lamps for a residential living room. What color temperature should the designer select to create a warm, comfortable atmosphere? (A) 2700K (B) 4300K (C) 6500K (D) 7500K

The answer is A. Color temperature, which is measured in kelvins (K), is the temperature to which a black body radiator would have to be heated to produce that color. The lower the temperature, the "warmer" or redder the apparent color is. A color temperature of 2700K would be good to create a warm atmosphere. 4300K is the color of a cool white fluorescent lamp, while a color temperature of 6500K is the color of a daylight fluorescent. An overcast sky has a color temperature of about 7500K. All of these would have more of a blue or "cool" component.

A designer wants to select a floor covering that is sustainable and resilient, and offers acoustical control. What flooring material BEST meets these criteria? (A) cork (B) linoleum (C) vinyl tile (D) wood parquet

The answer is A. Cork is a sustainable material, is soft underfoot, and provides the best acoustical control of the four options listed. Linoleum is a sustainable material and a resilient type of floor covering, but would not provide the best acoustical control of the four options. Vinyl tile is also resilient, but it is not a sustainable material. Wood parquet can be a sustainable material, but is hard underfoot and reflective of sound.

117. On a remodeling project with new construction, including partitions, a demolition plan is necessary when (A) there is a complex mix of items to be removed and new construction (B) the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) requires a separate demolition plan (C) the sustainability plan requires recycling and reuse of removed items (D) the contractor requests it in order to speed construction and avoid mistakes

The answer is A. Demolition plans are typically included in the drawing set when the complexity of the project is such that trying to place all the information about elements to be removed and new work to be constructed on the construction floor plan would be too confusing. With a demolition plan, all the dimensions, notes, reference symbols, and other information normally found on a floor plan can be omitted, leaving just the items to be removed indicated with dashed lines, and existing construction to remain indicated with solid lines. Additional notes can be included indicating what items are to be reused or recycled, if necessary. Option B is incorrect because AHJs do not require demolition plans by themselves, only enough information to show the AHJ what is being removed and what is new construction, which can be shown on the construction plan. Option C is incorrect because a sustainability plan does not require a demolition plan for recycling or reuse, although it is a convenient way to convey this information. Option D is incorrect because contractors do not request the types of drawings produced by the interior designer.

What are the MOST important design elements to incorporate into a hotel to provide safe egress for people with physical disabilities? (A) visual alarms and audible alarms (B) visual alarms and flashing smoke detectors (C) audible alarms and large emergency lettering (D) audible alarms and tactile signage

The answer is A. Emergency warning systems must provide both visual and audible alarms.

What type of cushioning would be BEST for a hospital waiting room? (A) high-density foam (B) cotton batting (C) combustion-modified foam with a low ILD (D) low-density polyurethane

The answer is A. High-density foam is used to create firm cushions. Firmer cushions prevent fabric coverings from stretching, thereby extending their useful life and appearance from the constant and heavy use of a hospital's waiting room. Cotton batting and low-density polyurethane are not as durable as high-density foam, and any material with a low indentation load deflection (ILD) implies a soft cushion (which is also much less durable than a firm cushion).

Which section of the International Interior Design Association's Code of Ethics requires continuing education? A) "Responsibility to the Association and Interior Design Profession" (B) "Responsibility to the Client" (C) "Responsibility to Other Interior Designers and Colleagues" (D) "Responsibility to the Public"

The answer is A. In the section "Responsibility to the Association and Interior Design Profession," the second canon states that professional and associate members shall seek to continually upgrade their professional knowledge and competency with respect to the interior design profession. There is a similar provision in the American Society of Interior Designers Code of Ethics. Options B, C, and D are parts of the International Interior Design Association's Code of Ethics, but they do not relate to continuing education.

121. An interior designer has been hired by a client to design an office space. The client tells the designer to use discount chairs in order to save money. The designer initially agrees that the style and comfort level of the chairs will be compatible with the other furniture the designer will be selecting. On further investigation, however, the designer discovers that the chairs do not meet required VOC limits or flammability standards. What should the designer do? (A) give the client documentation about the VOC and flammability standards, and tell the client that the designer cannot incorporate the chairs in the designs but will look for substitutes (B) suggest that the client try to find other chairs from the same discount source that will meet the VOC and flammability standards (C) accept use of the chairs (D) find substitute chairs as close as possible to the client's in cost but that meet the VOC and flammability standards

The answer is A. The American Society of Interior Design (ASID) Code of Ethics requires that the interior designer consider the health, safety, and welfare of the public at all times. The designer should tell the client that the designer cannot use the chairs, and show the client the information to support this decision. Only then should the designer look for substitutes. The designer should not give the task of finding alternative chairs to the client. The client will not be aware of the safety requirements. To accept the chairs while disregarding the safety issues would be a clear violation of the Code of Ethics section Responsibility to the Client. Before the designer looks for substitute chairs that meet Business and International Furniture Manufacturers Association (BIFMA) standards, the designer should first explain to the client why the designer is taking this action.

93. Which of the following terms represents the efficiency of a luminaire in distributing lamp light to room surfaces? (A) coefficient of utilization (B) lamp lumen depreciation factor (C) lamp luminance (D) luminaire efficacy

The answer is A. The coefficient of utilization (commonly abbreviated "CU") is a value that is determined and published by the manufacturer. It represents the efficiency of a luminaire in distributing light from a lamp under various degrees of finish reflectivity to the floor, walls, and ceiling.

Which of the line types below represents a property line on a site plan? A B C D

The answer is A. The heavy line with two short dashed lines in between longer lines represents a property line on a site plan.

101. Specifications can be made MOST concise by (A) using reference standard specifications (B) avoiding the use of such words as "a," "the," and "all" (C) using phrases instead of complete sentences (D) using descriptive specifications

The answer is A. The methods in options B and C are useful in writing concise specifications but are not as good as using industry standards, which eliminate a great deal of text. Option D is incorrect because a descriptive specification requires lengthy text to fully and accurately describe what the specifier wants.

The method of constructing a fire-rated partition is typically indicated in the (A) partition details (B) floor plan keynotes (C) partition schedule (D) contract specifications

The answer is A. The partition details would indicate the method of constructing a fire-rated partition. The details include the framing, type, and thickness of gypsum wallboard or other construction, as well as how the partition's edges and other penetrations are sealed. Floor plan keynotes indicate only a partition's fire rating, not the actual method of constructing it. Partition schedules are seldom used, and in any case, they indicate only a partition's fire rating. Although contract specifications include important information about standards, quality of construction, and other aspects of fire-rated construction, they would not show a partition's actual construction method.

109. The full extent of slab-to-slab partitions on a project is best shown on the (A) reflected ceiling plan (B) interior elevations (C) wall section details (D) finish plan

The answer is A. The reflected ceiling plan should show slab-to-slab partitions as well as ceiling-high partitions. Although this information is usually indicated on wall-section details and sometimes on interior elevations, the reflected ceiling plan is the one place where it is all shown at once in an obvious manner.

What does the symbol shown in the illustration indicate? (A) The area within the bubble is drawn at a larger scale elsewhere in the drawing set. (B) A section cut of the area in the bubble is shown on sheet A6 of the drawing set. (C) An elevation within the bubble is shown elsewhere at a different scale. (D) The portion within the bubble is described in more detail in the specifications.

The answer is A. The symbol shown is a detail reference mark, which can be thought of as a magnifying glass. This symbol indicates that the portion of construction within the dashed bubble is drawn at a larger scale somewhere else. In this example, a larger-scale representation of the area is shown as detail number 12 on sheet A6 of the drawing set. This symbol indicates that the larger-scale drawing will have the same point of view; that is, if it encloses part of an elevation, the drawing referenced will still be in elevation view, just larger. It can be used on all types of drawings, including plans, elevations, and details. This is not a section-cut symbol. The symbol is not limited to just elevations and is typically used mostly for plans. This symbol does not refer to specifications.

Which of the following are effective strategies for controlling moisture when detailing the area around a spa pool? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) adhesives (B) drainage (C) slip resistance (D) flashing (E) tile selection (F) sealants

The answer is B, D, E, and F. Drainage, flashing, tile selection, and sealants must be used correctly to prevent the penetration of water to the substrates. Material selection must include impervious tile. Although the correct selection of adhesives and flooring materials with appropriate slip resistance ratings is important, these choices do not directly affect moisture control.

112. An interior designer has drawn a floor plan of a large office space to a scale of ⅛ in = 1 ft 0 in (1:100) and determines that an enlarged floor plan of the toilet rooms needs to be included. What information should be shown on the enlarged floor plan that is not shown on the small-scale plans? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) room names and numbers (B) dimensions to centerlines of fixtures (C) door swings of toilet partitions (D) dimensions to walls within the toilet rooms (E) dimensions of toilet partitions (F) toilet accessories with a key to a schedule

The answer is B, D, E, and F. On a small-scale plan, there is not enough room to include dimensions to fixtures, all the required wall dimensions, toilet partition dimensions, and keynotes for accessories, so these would be shown on the large-scale plan. Option A is incorrect because the room names and numbers are also shown on the small-scale plan. Option C is incorrect because the toilet partition door swings should also be shown on the small-scale plan.

When a project includes both fixed partition walls and a full-height moveable partition system, on what plan should the moveable partition system be shown? (A) a separate moveable partition plan (B) the construction floor plan (C) the furniture plan (D) both the floor and furniture plans

The answer is B. A full-height moveable partition system should be shown on the construction floor plan, along with the fixed partition walls. This is because any type of full-height partitions will affect egress, as well as the HVAC system design, lighting, and sprinkler layout. A moveable partition plan is not necessary and is not a typical type of interior design drawing. A furniture plan would show cubicles and other moveable equipment but not moveable partitions.

120. For a member of the American Society of Interior Designers (ASID), which action is a clear violation of ASID Code of Ethics? (A) allowing the client to pay the designer with a part interest in the project instead of money (B) not disclosing that the interior designer has a financial interest in the building where the client's project will be located (C) as an employer, giving permission to an employee leaving the firm to take drawings on projects the employee worked on (D) sharing nonproprietary information about a project type with another allied professional

The answer is B. According to the American Society of Interior Designers (ASID) Code of Ethics, in the section Responsibility to the Client, the designer must fully disclose to the client all compensation the designer will receive in connection with a project. The interior designer is allowed to offer services for any form of legal compensation. Having a financial interest in the project may not provide the designer with direct compensation, but it may affect the designer's judgment concerning how the project may be designed. An employee is allowed to take drawings, data, and other material, but only with the permission of the employer. According to the section Responsibility to the Profession, designers agree to encourage and contribute to the sharing of ideas and information. For example, it is acceptable for a designer to share his or her experience and knowledge of a particular project type with another designer who is working on a similar project.

94. Surface-mounted luminaires are MOST often used for which of the following reasons? (A) Some side and uplighting is desired. (B) There is not enough space above the ceiling. (C) They are easier and less expensive to install. (D) They are used as a design feature.

The answer is B. Although all the choices are possible reasons for using surface-mounted luminaires, the lighting fixtures are most often employed when space is inadequate for recessing.

What MOST affects the flammability of upholstery? (A) type of chemical retardant used (B) cushioning and surface fabric (C) surface fabric and interliner (D) surface fabric

The answer is B. Although chemical retardants and interliners are important considerations in upholstery flammability resistance, the combination of surface fabric and cushioning has the greatest effect.

What construction should be used to enclose a 1-hour-rated corridor? (A) 1/2 in (13 mm) Type X gypsum wallboard on 35/8 in (92 mm) metal studs (B) 5/8 in (16 mm) Type X gypsum wallboard on 35/8 in (92 mm) metal studs (C) two layers of 1/2 in (13 mm) Type X gypsum wallboard on 21/2 in (64 mm) metal studs (D) 3/4 in (19 mm) gypsum wallboard on 35/8 in (92 mm) metal studs

The answer is B. Although there are several ways to achieve a 1-hour rating, a single layer of 5/8 in (16 mm) Type X wallboard is the easiest and least expensive. The size of the studs is not a critical variable. Two layers of 1/2 in (13 mm) wallboard or the special 3/4 in (19 mm) rated wallboard would work, but these are more than is required. 1/2 in (13 mm) Type X wallboard can only achieve a 45-minute rating unless there is a veneer finish.

Which standard is used for construction drawing sheet sizes for nongovernmental projects in the United States? (A) ANSI (B) architectural (C) ASTM International (D) ISO

The answer is B. Architectural and interior design drawings commonly use the architectural standard sizes, which begin with the size A, or 9 in × 12 in. Each sheet size larger is a multiple of that module; a B-size drawing, for example, is 12 in × 18 in, and a C-size drawing is 18 in × 24 in. The ANSI standard is based on a module of 8.5 in × 11 in and is not commonly used. ASTM International does not have a standard for architectural sheet sizes. The ISO standard is based on a module of 210 mm × 297 mm (8.3 in × 11.7 in), and is not used in the United States.

86. Which of the following must have AT LEAST a Class III (or C) fire rating? (A) bookshelves (B) wainscoting (C) built-in base cabinets (D) door and window trim

The answer is B. Building codes generally require flame-spread classification for wall finishes only; this includes wainscoting. Other types of woodwork, such as bookshelves, cabinets, and door and window trim, do not require a particular fire rating.

96. Composite wood veneers can be used (A) to improve the appearance of book matching (B) as a substitute for HPDL (C) as a "green" alternate to standard wood veneers (D) to increase the yield of veneer from a log

The answer is C. Composite wood veneer is an artificial product that uses readily available and fast-growing renewable trees to make veneers that are stained and reformed into an artificial log that is then sliced to produce new veneer. It is considered a sustainable or "green" product.

Which of the following organizations would be the BEST resource for an interior designer looking for independent, third-party information on the sustainability of architectural woodwork materials? (A) Architectural Woodwork Institute (B) BuildingGreen (C) Forest Stewardship Council (D) U.S. Green Building Council

The answer is B. BuildingGreen is an independent publisher offering unbiased information on sustainable building design and product information. It publishes Environmental Building News, a monthly newsletter, and the GreenSpec Directory, which lists product information for sustainable materials. BuildingGreen also offers various online tools on its website. The Architectural Woodwork Institute is the primary source for standards and information about woodwork in general, but has limited data on sustainability, and generally refers people to other sources for information on that subject. The Forest Stewardship Council oversees the development of standards for forest management principles; these standards cover all types of wood products, not specifically sustainable woodwork materials. The U.S. Green Building Council establishes criteria for the certification of sustainable buildings in its LEED rating systems. Although the rating systems contain criteria for the use of wood, they are not specifically concerned with woodwork.

Prior to determining the preferred location of luminaires, the interior designer is reviewing the mechanical engineer's HVAC layout, as shown in the partial plan in the illustration. If there is a conflict in position between a luminaire and ductwork, which ductwork would be the easiest and least expensive to relocate? (A) duct A (B) duct B (C) duct C (D) duct D

The answer is B. Duct B is a flexible duct and could be pushed out of the way or relocated easily along with the supply air diffuser to which it is attached. Duct A is a small duct for the exhaust fans in the janitor closet and the restrooms. Duct C is an 8 in × 10 in (203 mm × 254 mm) rigid duct and would be only moderately easy to relocate. Duct D is a larger rigid duct and would be difficult to move.

114. Which of the following information about gypsum wallboard partitions should be part of a project's specifications, not its drawings? (A) edge treatment (B) fastener spacing (C) stud depth (D) wallboard thickness

The answer is B. Fastener spacing for wallboard and other panel products should either be listed or referenced as an industry standard in the project's specifications. Edge treatments, stud depths, and wallboard thicknesses are always part of a project's drawings.

110. Dimensions on interior design floor plans are commonly drawn from the (A) centerlines of partitions (B) finish faces of partitions (C) face of studs or structural walls (D) centerlines of structural walls and finish faces of partitions

The answer is B. For interior design drawings, partitions are commonly dimensioned to the finished face of the wall. This is because the interior designer is most concerned with finishes and any critical dimensions that may exist between one partition and another. Option A is incorrect because dimensioning to the centerlines of partitions requires that the designer be aware of each partition's thickness and calculate the dimension accordingly, which can lead to errors in the desired size of the space. Option C is sometimes used by architects for the convenience of the contractor because it simplifies stud layout. However, this approach can result in slight errors in the desired finished size of a space, especially when the finish requires installation of additional furring or thick finish materials. Option D is incorrect because structural walls are dimensioned from their finished face, not their centerline. However, dimensions are typically made to the centerline of columns.

What ratings are the MOST important in evaluating the acoustic quality of a floor and ceiling assembly? (A) STC and NRC (B) IIC and STC (C) NRC and IIC (D) IIC and NC

The answer is B. Impact isolation class (IIC) and sound transmission coefficient (STC) are both important ratings for evaluating transmission loss through a floor and ceiling assembly.

What is the MOST important criterion for lighting a fabric showroom? (A) visual comfort probability (B) color rendering index (C) coefficient of utilization (D) apparent color temperature rating

The answer is B. In a fabric showroom, accurate color rendition is an important concern. Therefore, options B and D are the most likely choices. Although the color temperature rating of a lamp gives a general indication of the lamp's "whiteness," the color rendering index (or "CRI") is a more accurate indication of how appropriate a lamp is for a specific application.

For a member of the International Interior Design Association (IIDA), which action is a clear violation of the IIDA Code of Ethics? (A) advertising in trade journals showing projects that the member firm has completed (B) including website photos of a project that was created by an employee while previously working for another firm (C) offering support to students of interior design, including information about the firm's projects (D) refusing to accept their client's instructions concerning copying a specific desired design feature the client saw in another project

The answer is B. In the section "Responsibility to Other Interior Designers and Colleagues," a professional or an associate member may only take credit for work that was actually created by the member or the member's firm. Showing previous work by an employee that was performed while working at another firm is a clear violation of the IIDA Code of Ethics. Advertising is allowed as long as it is done without any form of false or misleading advertising or promotion. Members and associate members are encouraged to offer support, and information to students of interior design. Members may not accept instructions from their clients which knowingly involve plagiarism.

What is one feature of inclusive design that differentiates it from accessibility and universal design? (A) conforms to ADA requirements (B) considers cultural and social needs (C) does not include a broad range of diversity (D) responds to a broad range of users

The answer is B. Inclusive design as it relates to architecture and interior design is the design of environments and products in such a way that a diverse variety of people can use them. It also considers cultural, social, and other needs that extend beyond those of the typical user. Inclusive design includes accessibility, but it extends design solutions not just to people with disabilities but to all users, accommodating a broad spectrum of diverse needs. Universal design seeks to make the same design features useful to a broad range of people, including people with disabilities. For example, using a lever handle on a door serves people with disabilities but also makes it easier for all people to use. Inclusive design differs, however, in that it may involve different solutions or different groups rather than just one solution to accommodate everyone.

92. Which of the following normally shows the locations of exit signs? (A) floor plan (B) reflected ceiling plan (C) life safety plan (D) fire protection plan

The answer is B. Of the four plans given, only the reflected ceiling plan would normally show exit signs. Exit signs are shown on this plan so that their positions can be coordinated with those of other items on the ceiling. Exit signs are also shown on the electrical engineer's lighting plan, which indicates how they are powered and circuited to the emergency circuits.

When specifying the method by which two veneer pieces are to be applied, the MOST pleasing result is usually obtained with a (A) balance match (B) book match (C) center match (D) slip match

The answer is B. Of the options listed, only book matching and slip matching refer to the ways individual veneer pieces can be laid up next to each other. Of these two options, book matching is generally considered the preferred, most pleasing method. Balance matching and center matching refer to methods of applying veneers to panels.

Which of the diagrams shown might best represent a designer's concept planning for the operation and workflow of an urgent care facility?

The answer is B. Option B represents a centralized organization controlling or directing other groups. This would be appropriate for an urgent care facility where the entry/reception area is the starting point for directing patients to other parts of the facility. Option A represents a departmental organization with one person or department in the lead and other departments and groups organized below it. Option C is a linear organization where there is a starting point and subsequent activities occur in a strict sequence, which is not how an urgent care facility would operate. Option D is a network organization where activities may occur in many directions from any given starting point.

Which method of veneer cut results in the straightest grain possible from MOST species of trees? (A) half-round slicing (B) quarter slicing (C) flat slicing (D) rotary slicing

The answer is B. Quarter slicing results in the straightest grain possible from most species of trees, as shown in the following illustration.

What type of resilient flooring would be the BEST choice for a commercial kitchen? (A) 1/8 in (3 mm) commercial-grade vinyl tile (B) sheet vinyl (C) heavy-duty cork flooring (D) sheet rubber

The answer is B. Sheet vinyl minimizes the number of joints and is resistant to grease, oils, and water.

91. When reviewing flooring materials to determine which options meet life safety and accessibility standards for slip resistance, the interior designer should (A) have the material tested (B) review the coefficient of friction (COF) (C) verify requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (D) study pertinent ASTM International standards

The answer is B. The COF is used to evaluate and specify flooring materials. This value expresses the degree of slip resistance of a flooring material. Although there are many variables that affect the slip resistance of a flooring material, and no one value is universally agreed upon for all situations, the COF is the one value that must be known. Currently, in the United States, American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard A137.1, American National Standards Specifications for Ceramic Tile, references one test, the DCOF AcuTest (DCOF stands for dynamic coefficient of friction). This requires that ceramic tile for level interior spaces expected to be walked upon when wet must have a minimum value equal to or greater than 0.42. However, this is just a starting point; the interior designer should consider the type of flooring material being evaluated, specific conditions of the space in which it will be used, expected maintenance procedures, and other project-specific variables to determine if a material with a higher COF should be specified.

The construction assembly shown would be BEST for controlling which of the following kinds of acoustic situations? (A) impact noise (B) transmission from room A to room B (C) transmission from room B to room A (D) mechanical vibration

The answer is B. The assembly shown would not be the best for controlling impact noise (because it is a partition) or mechanical vibration, so options A and D are incorrect. Although the partition construction shown would be good for preventing sound transmission in both directions, it would be better from room A to room B. This is because noise transmission between two rooms is dependent on the transmission loss of the wall, the area of the wall, and the absorption of the surfaces in the receiving room.

The drawing shown occurs at the exterior wall of a high-rise building. The purpose of this detail is to (A) allow for installation of a modular partition (B) provide for lateral movement of the building (C) provide for a finished end of the partition (D) give a tight seal to limit sound transmission

The answer is B. The detail shown is a slip joint where a partition attaches to the vertical window mullion. The aluminum channel is attached to the window mullion while the partition is constructed separately, allowing the curtain wall to move in and out with wind loading without putting any pressure on the partition. Option A is incorrect because the detail is not of a modular partition. Option C is incorrect because the end of the partition could be finished with gypsum wallboard casing beads. Option D is incorrect because this detail actually is a weak point for blocking sound transmission.

102. The drawing shown in the illustration is an example of a(n) (A) electrical plan (B) power plan (C) telephone/electrical plan (D) lighting plan

The answer is B. The drawing shows the locations of power outlets and lines, and notes indicating to which circuit each outlet is connected. Although it also shows telephone outlet locations, it is primarily a power plan. The term electrical plan is too generic to be useful and is not a correct choice. A telephone/electrical plan is drawn by the interior designer to show the outlets dimensioned and in relation to furniture, and is used by the electrical engineer to produce the power plan. No lighting is shown, so this is not a lighting plan.

In working with an electrical engineer on a project, what information would the designer MOST likely put on the interior design power plan? (A) switch locations (B) dedicated outlets (C) conduit sizing (D) speaker locations

The answer is B. The interior designer would not determine conduit size or put speaker locations on the power plan. This eliminates options C and D. Switch locations would be placed on the reflected ceiling plan.

84. Which pair of performance tests should be specified for a custom-blended fabric that will be used in a recreation center's reception area? (A) vertical ignition and Fade-Ometer (B) Wyzenbeek and Fade-Ometer (C) Taber and Wyzenbeek (D) indentation load deflection and Taber

The answer is B. The three most important characteristics to assess in a custom-blended fabric that will be used in a public area are its wearability, flammability, and fade-resistivity. While any fabric can be treated to make it flame resistive, only testing can determine whether a custom fabric has sufficient wearability and fade-resistance for a specific use. The Wyzenbeek abrasion resistance test is commonly used to assess wearability, while the Fade-Ometer test is used to assess fade-resistance.

What fabric would have the BEST appearance for the longest time when used in theater seating? (A) vinyl (B) wool-nylon blend (C) acrylic-acetate blend (D) cotton-rayon blend

The answer is B. Theater seating requires a fabric that is resilient, durable, and flame retardant. The only combination that meets these requirements is the wool-nylon blend.

What kind of scale is best used to measure the size of a drawn feature in feet and decimal fractions of a foot? (A) architect's scale (B) engineer's scale (C) metric scale (D) graphic scale

The answer is B. When a feature is measured with an engineer's scale, which uses scales such as 1″ = 40′ or 1″ = 100′, the measurement is read in feet, tenths of a foot, and hundredths of a foot. Civil engineers use scales of this type, or their CAD equivalent, to mark dimensions when drafting. When an architect's scale is used, the measurement and subsequent dimension is read in feet and inches, not feet and decimal fractions of a foot. A metric scale is similar to an engineer's scale in that it has 10 graduations per division, but the resulting dimensions are in millimeters, centimeters, or meters, not feet and decimal fractions of a foot. A metric scale is used when a project is planned and presented with SI units. A graphic (e.g., graphical, bar, linear, map) scale is a feature printed in the legend of a map or other drawing. Its resolution is usually coarse. Where smaller than whole divisions are indicated on a graphic scale, they are generally limited to 1/4, 1/2, and 3/4 graduations, so it would be difficult to measure the size of features in feet and decimal fractions of a foot.

Which of the following activities can an interior designer engage in to fulfill their social responsibility as well as expand their professional development? (Choose the four that apply.) (A) avoid conduct that would involve misrepresentation in professional activity (B) develop public service announcements promoting interior designers (C) join committees that develop or review industry standards (D) serve on design review boards in the location where the designer practices (E) participate in student critiques at the local interior design school (F) volunteer time to provide public education about the profession

The answer is C, D, E, and F. Volunteering time for public education, serving on design review boards, helping to develop industry standards, and participating in student critiques are all excellent ways to give back to the community as well as to expand professional development. Option A is part of a code of ethics and would not serve as a way to satisfy social responsibility. Option B is not really a social responsibility.

What types of lamps would be best to use in the display cases inside a jewelry store? (Choose the three that apply.) (A) 75W PAR quartz (B) 150W R quartz (C) 14W T5 fluorescent (D) 90W MR-16 (E) 40W T10 (F) 20W LED

The answer is C, D, and F. There are two aspects to consider for this application: size and color rendition. T5 fluorescent lamps can be specified with a high color temperature and are small enough to fit within most types of display cases. MR-16 lamps are relatively small and are tungsten-halogen lamps that would provide good color rendition and sparkle to jewelry. Light-emitting diode (LED) lamps would be the best choice because of their small size, cool operating temperature, and availability in a variety of color outputs. Both the 75W parabolic aluminized reflector (PAR) and 150W reflector (R) lamps would be too large to use in a display case and would generate a great deal of heat. A 40W T10 would be small enough to use in the display case, but its incandescent color rendition would be too warm for jewelry display.

Door fire ratings are typically given in the (A) floor plan (B) door elevations (C) door schedule (D) specifications

The answer is C. A schedule shows data in the rows and columns of a table. The door schedule includes a column in which to indicate what fire rating (in hours or minutes) is required for each door. If no rating is required, the space is left blank or filled with a dash or a zero.

98. What should be called out on cabinet drawings to ensure the BEST fit and appearance next to existing construction? (A) reveals around all edges (B) spacers at cabinet backs (C) scribe pieces at cabinet edges (D) blocking, where necessary

The answer is C. A scribe piece is ideal in this case because it can be trimmed in the field so the edge of a cabinet or countertop can exactly fit the irregularities of the wall, which are common when working with existing construction. A reveal can only be useful in this case if the designer specifies that the piece can be scribed to fit. Otherwise, it is a recessed piece that will likely be perfectly straight and therefore may result in gaps between the cabinet and the irregular wall. Blocking and spacers are not directly related to fit and appearance of cabinets next to existing construction. Cabinets are constructed so only the frames and edges touch existing construction; the backs of cabinets are constructed to stand out from the wall by a small amount. A spacer is a small, thin piece of wood placed between the back of the cabinet and the wall at fastener locations to prevent the cabinet back from bowing outward when a fastener is used to attach the cabinet to the wall. Blocking is used inside a wall to provide a solid piece of construction to which the cabinet can be fastened.

To confirm that a particular project meets material flammability requirements, an interior designer should (A) contact each manufacturer whose materials are used (B) refer to state flammability regulations (C) contact the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) (D) review the International Building Code (IBC)

The answer is C. Although there are flammability requirements in the IBC and in state regulations, the jurisdiction in which the project is located may have additional requirements. For this reason, it is necessary to contact the authority having jurisdiction.

Which carpet type allows a complex, custom-patterned carpet with varying pile heights? (A) tufted (B) Axminster (C) Wilton (D) velvet

The answer is C. Both the Axminster and Wilton processes allow for complex patterns, but only the Wilton process allows for varying pile heights.

104. Which of the following interior design services is normally performed during a project's contract documents phase? (A) coordinating the consultant contracts (B) performing a code review (C) preparing furniture drawings (D) reviewing shop drawings

The answer is C. Furniture drawings are prepared during a project's contract documents phase. The consultant contracts should be coordinated early in the project—either before the project is begun or during the schematic design phase. A code review should be performed during the schematic design and design development phase. Shop drawings are reviewed during the contract administration phase.

119. Which of the following symbols should be used to indicate that an interior glazing jamb shown on a floor plan is detailed on another drawing sheet?

The answer is C. In the following illustration, any portion of a drawing falling within the circle or the dashed rounded rectangle will be shown in the same view (plan view, for example) at an enlarged scale with more detail shown.

Sharing common information in the same CAD file to create different types of drawings is known as (A) building modeling (B) using the drawing modules standard (C) layering of drawings (D) using the U.S. National CAD Standard (NCS)

The answer is C. Layering of drawings refers to the practice of placing different information on separate layers (or levels) in a CAD or BIM system. This allows individual layers to be shown or hidden as required to develop different types of drawings (floor plan, reflected ceiling plan, or furniture plan) using shared information from the same computer file. Building modeling simply refers to a three-dimensional representation of a structure. Drawing modules refers to how individual drawings are organized on a sheet within a grid system. The U.S. NCS is a collection of drawing standards, with layering being only one of those standards.

During space planning, the designer must locate a 36 in (915 mm) door leading from a corridor, where limited space is available, into another room. One option is to orient the corridor either perpendicular or parallel to the wall separating the corridor from the room and to swing the door in any direction. The door will have a latch only, with no closer. In order to provide for accessibility and minimize the width of the corridor, which of the following door orientations and approach directions would BEST meet the criteria? (A) front approach, door swings into room (B) latch side approach, door swings into corridor (C) hinge side approach, door swings into room (D) front approach, door swings into corridor

The answer is C. Looking at the required maneuvering clearances shown in Illustration for Solution 45, it is clear that the side approach with the door swinging into the room only requires a minimum of 42 in (1065 mm) (assuming the door has no closer). This would allow the use of a 44 in (1118 mm) minimum corridor. The front approach (door swings into room) and latch side approach (door swings into corridor) both require a minimum of 48 in (1220 mm). The front approach (door swings into corridor) would require a 60 in (1525 mm) corridor (a 36 in door plus 24 in of side clearance [915 mm plus 610 mm]).

85. Which of the following items does NFPA 701 relate to? (A) wallcoverings (B) fabrics (C) draperies (D) floor coverings

The answer is C. NFPA 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame-Propagation of Textiles and Films, establishes testing procedures for window treatments. This is also known as FR 701, so the important thing is to recognize the 701 designation.

113. An interior designer is developing a floor plan for a new tenant in an existing office space and will reuse a number of existing partitions to meet LEED reusability requirements. What notation should the interior designer use on the demolition plan to clearly distinguish partitions to be removed from partitions to be reused? (A) solid lines for partitions being removed and dashed lines for partitions being reused (B) solid lines for partitions being removed and solid black fill for partitions being reused (C) dashed lines for partitions being removed and solid lines for partitions being reused (D) dashed lines for partitions being reused and solid black fill for partitions being removed

The answer is C. On a demolition plan, dashed lines most commonly represent materials being removed and solid lines (or solid black fill) represent materials being reused.

On a large hotel project, the interior designer is collaborating with the architect and other consultants. In reviewing preliminary drawings of the consultants to finalize the reflected ceiling plans, where should the designer look to find required fire detection and alarm locations? (A) electrical plans (B) electrical drawings schedules (C) fire protection drawings (D) mechanical plans

The answer is C. On a large project, there are separate fire protection drawings that show fire detection and alarms, as well as sprinkler plans. On a larger project, electrical plans generally do not show the fire detection and alarm locations, but they may show electrical service to them. Neither the schedules nor the mechanical plans show the fire detection and alarm locations.

The MOST appropriate time to determine the exact requirements for grab bars in a building's toilet rooms is during which project phase? (A) programming (B) schematic design (C) design development (D) construction drawing development

The answer is C. Only broad planning issues related to barrier-free design need to be made during the early design phases of programming and schematic design. While decisions about detailed items, like the locations of grab bars, can be made during the construction documents phase, it is better if they have been settled before the construction drawings are begun.

103. Division 05 of the MasterFormat system includes which of the following? (A) doors (B) wall finishes (C) ornamental metal (D) architectural woodwork

The answer is C. Ornamental metalwork is included in Division 05, "Metals," in the MasterFormat system. Doors are specified in Division 08, "Openings." Wall finishes are included in Division 09, "Finishes," and architectural woodwork is contained in Division 06, "Woods, Plastics, and Composites."

99. For the most durable wood finish, which of the following finish types should be specified? (A) lacquer (B) penetrating oil (C) polyurethane (D) varnish

The answer is C. Polyurethane and polyester are both very durable, synthetic finishes.

Which type of seaming is the MOST appropriate for upholstered furniture in a smoking lounge? (A) channeling (B) buttoning (C) railroading (D) welt cording

The answer is C. When smoldering resistance, sometimes referred to as cigarette ignition resistance, is a high priority (such as in a smoking lounge), railroad seaming should be used. Railroading is the application of fabric to furniture so that there are no intermediate seam details where cigarettes could lodge and ignite. Dropped cigarettes can easily lodge and ignite in channeling, buttoning, and welt-cording seams; therefore, they should not be used.

122. Which of the following major areas is included in the ASID Code of Ethics but not in the IIDA Code of Ethics? (A) responsibility to the public (B) responsibility to the profession (C) responsibility to the employer (D) responsibility to other interior designers and colleagues

The answer is C. The American Society of Interior Designers (ASID) Code of Ethics has a section titled Responsibility to the Employer that the International Interior Design Association (IIDA) Code of Ethics does not. This section outlines the ethical relationship between the employer and the employee. For example, a designer (as an employee) cannot disclose any confidential information obtained during the course of his or her employment without the permission of both the client and the employer.

In the illustration shown, the purpose of the device in the vertical partition section is to (A) minimize reverberation (B) increase the sound absorption average (SAA) (C) reduce sound transmission (D) decrease potential impact noise

The answer is C. The device shown is a proprietary acoustic clip, which is used to provide resiliency of the gypsum wallboard mounted to it, thereby reducing the transmission of vibrations (sound) through the partition. In order to minimize reverberation or increase the SAA (which is also known as the noise reduction coefficient [NRC]), some type of absorptive material would be required instead of the hard-surface gypsum wallboard shown, so options A and B are incorrect. Although this construction assembly could decrease impact noise (option D), such noise transmission is commonly related to floor-ceiling construction rather than partition wall assemblies, and is not the primary purpose of using this type of clip.

On what type of drawing would the symbol shown in the illustration be used? (A) reflected ceiling plan (B) egress plan (C) construction floor plan (D) mechanical floor plan

The answer is C. The drawing shows a partition type indication with an accompanying flag note. It would be used on a construction floor plan to graphically show the construction of the partition and to differentiate it from adjacent partitions of another construction type. The flag note numbers are references to a legend that would give additional information about the construction, such as its fire rating, stud size, and finish.

108. In the drawing shown, where else would the capital letters under each elevation be found? (A) with the frame details (B) in the specifications (C) on the door schedule (D) on the hardware schedule

The answer is C. The elevations shown are small graphical representations of the various door and frame types used on a project. They are identified by letters that would also be part of the door schedule, which refers to the elevations to give additional details about these building components.

In a fully sprinklered office building, how many sprinklers would be required in a room measuring 20 ft × 25 ft (6100 mm × 7620 mm)? (A) 2 sprinklers (B) 3 sprinklers (C) 4 sprinklers (D) 6 sprinklers

The answer is C. The only way to locate sprinklers such that the maximum spacing between heads is 15 ft (4570 mm) and the maximum spacing from the walls is 7 1/2 ft (2285 mm) is to use four heads.

90. When considering the safety of smooth flooring materials, the interior designer should (A) specify materials with a rough finish (B) require that the dynamic coefficient of friction have a value of 0.42 or greater (C) consider the values given by the DCOF AcuTest as well as other variables (D) use the coefficient of friction values and recommendations of ASTM C1028

The answer is C. The slip resistance of flooring is measured using the DCOF AcuTest. This is the designated test procedure of the Tile Council of North America. It measures the dynamic coefficient of friction (DCOF) using a standard lubricant on ceramic tile. Other materials may respond differently. Variables that can affect safety include shoe material and the degree of its wear, the presence and nature of surface contaminants, a person's weight, the angle of impact, stride length, the wear of the flooring material, and whether the floor is flat or inclined. All these factors should be taken into account when specifying a flooring material. The DCOF value of 0.42 is the recommended minimum value for ceramic tile as contained in American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A137.1, Specifications for Ceramic Tile. While this is a good starting point, the designer should consider other variables that can affect the safety of the floor. Simply specifying a rough finish may not be enough, as the definition of "rough" is ambiguous. The test in ASTM Standard C1082 is no longer used and has been withdrawn.

When reviewing the mechanical engineer's plan to identify the location of HVAC controls in the finished space, what symbol should the interior designer look for?

The answer is C. The thermostat is the primary HVAC system control in the finished space, and is represented by a circle with the letter T in it. The interior designer would be concerned with this to coordinate its position with an elevation of the interior space. Option A is not a standard mechanical symbol. Option B indicates a fire damper in a duct when used on a mechanical plan, and is also the symbol for a floor telephone outlet when used on an electrical or telephone plan. Option D is the symbol for a smoke detector in the ceiling.

. The partial floor plan given shows the subdivision of one side of an existing building into five offices with the architectural dimensions given on the outside of the building. Why is office #305 not dimensioned? (A) It is the same width as office #304. (B) Dimension strings are left incomplete. (C) There may be a potential conflict with the existing overall dimension. (D) The dimensions can be calculated by subtraction from the existing architectural dimensions.

The answer is C. When an existing space is subdivided, the designer is relying on information gathered through onsite measurement or record drawings. The existing overall dimension may or may not be exactly what is shown on the architectural drawings. By leaving what is known as an open dimension in the dimension string, the undimensioned space can accommodate any slight variation between the actual dimension and that shown on the architectural plans without the contractor raising questions. The open dimension should be the space that is the least important to have exactly as dimensioned. There is no information given on the plan that would allow the contractor to determine that an adjacent office should be the same size as another just by visual inspection (option A). Dimension strings are not necessarily left incomplete in all circumstances (option B). The contractor should not have to calculate dimensions, and in this case, the dimension of office #305 would not be accurate because the thickness of the existing exterior wall is not known.

88. The BEST way to avoid fabric slippage over a cushion would be to specify (A) a heavy fabric pulled tightly over the cushion (B) a high-density foam cushion with an interliner (C) rounded corners with welts (D) channeling

The answer is D. Channeling is a method of attaching fabric to a cushion and direct attachment is the best way to avoid slippage. Therefore, option D is the best choice.

What is considered the primary canon of the Code of Ethics of both the American Society of Interior Designers and the International Interior Design Association? (A) not to knowingly violate any law, regulation, or code (B) not to withhold any financial interest the designer may have in a project (C) to consider the health, safety, and welfare of the public (D) to perform services in the best interest of their client

The answer is C. While all canons of the American Society of Interior Designers (ASID) and International Interior Design Association (IIDA) codes of ethics are important, the most important is to consider and protect the health, safety, and welfare of the public. An interior design member of ASID and IIDA should also always perform services in the best interest of the client; not violate any law, regulation, or code; and always disclose any financial or other interest the designer has in a project.

A designer can MOST improve the safety of a restaurant's design by (A) making the exits highly visible (B) maintaining adequate spacing between tables (C) avoiding a level change of one or two steps (D) keeping the entrance to the kitchen away from seating

The answer is C. While all the options are important in developing a safe restaurant design, a level change of just one or two steps is especially dangerous for any public space that will be used by people with a wide variety of physical abilities and limitations. Steps are also dangerous for servers carrying food.

An interior designer's client wants to remodel a one-story office building into a restaurant and nightclub. Under the IBC, the life safety of the building that will require the MOST significant change is the (A) number and location of smoke detectors (B) capacity of the sprinkler system (C) size and number of exits (D) addition of a smoke control system

The answer is C. With a change of occupancy from an office that was originally a B occupancy designed using an occupant load of 100 ft2 (9.29 m2) per occupant to an assembly occupancy, A, with an occupant load of 5 ft2 (0.46 m2) (standing space for a nightclub) to 15 ft2 (1.39 m2) per occupant (for a restaurant with tables and chairs), the size of exits will have to be enlarged to accommodate more people. This could require major changes to the size and possibly the number and location of exits. While additional smoke detectors and their precise locations are important, they do not represent a significant change to the building. Both offices and restaurants are considered light hazard occupancies for the purpose of designing the sprinkler system, so the overall capacity would not be affected, just the exact location of sprinkler heads once the floor plan is established. For a one-story building of assembly occupancy, a smoke control system is not needed, as it is in a large high-rise building or a building with an atrium.

In a 90,000 ft2 (8360 m2), single-story office building, what would be of greatest concern in space planning? (A) dead-end corridors (B) corridor widths (C) horizontal exits (D) travel distances

The answer is D. A 90,000 ft2 (8360 m2) building would be approximately 300 ft (91 m) on a side or about 250 ft (76 m) wide and 360 ft (110 m) long. The size combined with typical rectangular planning of corridors would create very long distances to exits.

Which type of lighting would BEST enhance the appearance of a rough, plastered wall? (A) fluorescent cove uplighting on all four sides of the room (B) decorative chandeliers near the wall (C) track lighting near the center of the room, aimed at the wall (D) recessed incandescents close to the wall

The answer is D. A grazing light from a point source close to the wall would best emphasize the wall's texture. The other types of lighting would appear to flatten the wall's surface.

124. The American Society of Interior Designers (ASID) is an example of a (A) constituency-based organization (B) cause-based organization (C) knowledge-based organization (D) combination of constituency-based, cause-based, and knowledge-based organization

The answer is D. American Society of Interior Designers (ASID) is organized to serve its members (constituency-based), engage in political advocacy such as licensing (cause-based), and provide continuing education with seminars, conventions, and other activities (knowledge-based).

What type of lighting system would be the most appropriate for a call center where each employee works in front of a bank of computer monitors? (A) direct-indirect (B) general diffuse (C) semi-indirect (D) indirect

The answer is D. An indirect lighting system, where all the ambient light is directed upward and reflected off the ceiling, would provide the most uniform lighting with no hot spots, and would minimize glare. Any system that directs light downward has the potential for creating glare on a reflective surface, reducing visibility and causing eye strain. Options A, B, and C would all create this condition.

82. An interior designer is selecting luminaires and lamp sources to illuminate the waiting area of a medical clinic for which the furniture and finishes have been selected. In order to maintain the most accurate color rendition of the furniture and finishes, what is the best approach for selecting the lamps? (A) Select those with the highest color rendering index (CRI). (B) Analyze the correlated color temperature (CCT) of the lamps. (C) Review the spectral energy distribution curves. (D) View the samples under each lamp being considered.

The answer is D. Because there are so many variables that affect the interaction of light sources and the objects they are illuminating, the best way to evaluate a specific situation is to look at samples of the specified materials and finishes under the specific light sources under consideration. There are typically several different colors of finishes and furniture fabrics in any given space, and while one type of lamp may render one color perfectly, it may shift the apparent color of another. Only by observing all the object colors under different lamps can the interior designer select the one that provides the best overall balance. Option A is incorrect because the CRI is only a measure of how well one light source renders color compared to a reference source. While generally speaking, the higher the CRI the better, two light sources can have the same CRI but entirely different chromaticities, and therefore render the same color differently. Option B would be the second-best way to evaluate lamps because the CCT would suggest whether the light source would enhance or dull the object color. For example, a lamp with a low color temperature and more blue components, like a cool-white fluorescent lamp, would render reds dull and washed out. As the question asks for the best way to select the lamps, option B is incorrect. Option C is incorrect because the spectral energy distribution curves would show only what colors predominate, and, like using the CCT, would give only an approximation of adequate color rendering.

Which furniture test requires that an actual piece of furniture, or an accurate full-size mockup, be tested for flammability in a large furnace? (A) CAL TB 116 (B) CAL TB 117 (C) CAL TB 129 (D) CAL TB 133

The answer is D. California Technical Bulletin (CAL TB) 133, similar to National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 266, requires an actual sample of furniture, or an accurate mockup of it, be tested for flammability in a large furnace. CAL TB 116 and CAL TB 117 test the cigarette ignition resistance of upholstered furniture and only require samples of furniture upholstery components. CAL TB 129 tests the flammability of mattresses.

A demolition plan is required when the (A) local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) requires one (B) use of an additional line type for removed items would be too confusing (C) demolition involves partitions, doors, and cabinetry (D) mix of new construction and demolition is too complex for one drawing

The answer is D. Demolition plans are required when the overlay of significant amounts of demolition interferes with the linework required for new construction. Local AHJs do not typically require a separate demolition plan. Using an additional line type, such as a dashed line, can be confusing if the plan is dense with linework, symbols, and notations. Whether demolition specifically involves partitions, doors, and cabinetry is not the important factor in determining if a separate plan is required.

107. Window treatments should be specified in which MasterFormat division? (A) 08 (B) 09 (C) 10 (D) 12

The answer is D. Division 12, "Furnishings," of the MasterFormat system includes window treatments, as well as furniture, accessories, and art. Division 08 is "Openings," Division 09 is "Finishes," and Division 10 is "Specialties."

For a project with an irregular plan and multiple wall finishes, what is the BEST method to describe finishes on the construction drawings? (A) Identify all finishes on a schedule. (B) Develop a code number for each wall that references a finish schedule. (C) Provide elevations as necessary and use a standard finish schedule. (D) Use a finish plan with codes referenced to a legend and draw elevations when required.

The answer is D. For a project with both an irregular plan (with angles, curves, and rooms with more than four walls) and multiple wall finishes on the same surface, a finish plan using lines extending the length of each finish along with a code is the best way to show where wall finishes start and stop. For walls with multiple wall finishes that may start and stop at various points above the floor, an elevation is the most accurate way to indicate finish layout. Using a schedule where finishes are referenced by room numbers is appropriate only for projects with simple finishes and on floor plans where each room has only four walls, and all are scheduled to receive the same type and color of finish. Using code numbers for each wall would result in an excessively large amount of numbers on the plan, many of which would be unnecessarily repetitious and still could not describe single walls with multiple finishes. While interior elevations would be useful, a standard finish schedule referenced to room numbers could not easily describe an irregular plan or communicate instructions for spaces where walls are to receive different finishes.

111. Drawings for a single floor in a high-rise building containing commercial office spaces would MOST likely use what form of sheet notation? (A) 1, 2, 3, 4, and so on (B) A1, A2, A3, A4, and so on (C) A1.1, A1.2, A2.1, A2.2, and so on (D) A23.1, A23.2, A23.3, A23.4, and so on

The answer is D. High-rise building drawings commonly include the floor number as part of the sheet number so it is clear to everyone on the project team (including the building owner or manager) what floor the plan and other drawings refer to. The sheet number also indicates who created the drawings: interior designer (A), structural engineer (S), mechanical engineer (M), electrical engineer (E), and so on. The correct notation indicates that the drawings were created by the interior designer and are referring to the 23rd floor.

While working on a large restaurant project, an interior designer and ASID member is given a set of drawings by the client for a public seating area that another designer developed for the client's previous restaurant. The interior designer is told to incorporate them into the current project and reduce their fee. What should the designer tell the client? (A) The drawings will be included, and the fee that was originally built into their fee proposal for developing their own seating area plans will be reduced. (B) The drawings can be included, but the client will have to pay the original design fee for that portion of the project. (C) The drawings cannot be used because of ethical concerns, and the designer must develop new plans and drawings for the original set fee, but will include as much of the previous design as possible. (D) The drawings cannot directly be included in the designer's own set of documents because the designer did not prepare or supervise their development, but the designer could use them if the client paid for the extra time required to professionally review them.

The answer is D. In the section "Responsibility to the Public," the American Society of Interior Designers (ASID) Code of Ethics prohibits the designer from sealing or signing drawings or other design documents, except where the designer or designer's firm has prepared, supervised, or professionally reviewed the documents. In this case the designer did not prepare them, but the Code of Ethics allows them to use the drawings if they review them. Options A and B are incorrect because the designer is not allowed to use the drawings directly regardless of whether the fee was reduced or remained the same. Option C is incorrect because they could use the drawings if they professionally reviewed them.

An interior designer is providing complete space planning and furniture, fixtures, and equipment (FF&E) specification services for a large law firm. The location of electrical, telephone, and communication outlets for the space is BEST shown on the (A) electrical plan (B) floor plan (C) furniture plan (D) power/communications plan

The answer is D. In this case, it is best to use separate power/telephone plans and furniture plans. There would then be sufficient space to dimension and annotate the outlets on one plan and sufficient space for furniture locations and annotations on the furniture plan. The electrical plan (option A) is produced by the electrical engineer. It indicates the general locations of the outlets and shows the circuiting, conduit, and other technical information. An electrical plan does not typically include dimensions indicating where the receptacles are to be installed. For a large commercial project, the floor plan (option B) is not an appropriate place to show outlet locations because the floor plan will most likely be crowded with other information. While outlets are sometimes shown on a furniture plan (option C), for a client such as a large law firm, there would be numerous electrical, telephone, and communication outlets, as well as many furniture items. Trying to combine them and include all necessary information would result in a cluttered and difficult-to-read drawing.

When selecting paint for a hospital, which of the following characteristics is MOST important? (A) abrasion resistance (B) chemical resistance (C) flammability (D) VOC emissions

The answer is D. Of the characteristics provided, volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions are the most important to consider when choosing interior paint for a hospital. Paints, varnishes, carpets, adhesives, and other household products can emit VOC gases, which have a variety of short- and long-term adverse health effects, such as headaches, fatigue, dizziness, or liver and kidney damage. In all indoor environments, but especially in healthcare facilities, products with low VOC emissions should be used. Where abrasion resistance is an important consideration, a finish other than paint should be used. Chemical resistant paint is a specially formulated finish that is unaffected by chemicals; for most hospitals, chemical staining is not an issue. Water-based paint is not flammable.

An interior designer has just finished reviewing the plans for a large office suite when the building department states that the lighting budget has been exceeded. If the design is composed of 80% fluorescent lighting and 20% incandescent lighting, what is the BEST course of action to begin redesign? (A) Reduce the number of luminaires by spacing them farther apart. (B) Substitute all incandescent lights with fluorescent lights. (C) Change to a task-ambient lighting system. (D) Investigate whether lamps with higher efficacies will bring the design within the budget.

The answer is D. Option D allows everything but the lamps to be left unchanged. If this investigation did not bring the design within the budget, then the other options consistent with the design could be explored. Option A is not the best action because the illumination can easily be lowered below an acceptable level. Option B is a possibility and may ultimately be necessary, but other options should be explored first because the question asks what should be done to begin redesign. Option C is also a possibility, but the original design was developed for a reason and the first action should be to try to make that work.

Working under the IBC, a designer has calculated that a total exit width of 8 ft (2 m) is required from a store. What combination of door widths would meet the most exiting requirements? (A) one 36 in (915 mm) door remotely located from a pair of 34 in (864 mm) doors (B) a pair of 32 in (813 mm) doors remotely located from one 38 in (965 mm) door (C) three 34 in (864 mm) doors remotely located (D) three 36 in (915 mm) doors remotely located

The answer is D. Options A, B, and C include doors that would provide less than a clear 32 in (813 mm) wide opening.

123. Interior designers can continue to develop their knowledge, serve their community, and enhance their professional development by (A) participating in trade association work (B) volunteering in the community (C) serving on design review boards (D) teaching or mentoring young professionals

The answer is D. Teaching is an excellent way for interior designers to share their knowledge as well as gaining knowledge. Teaching also helps in the development of students and professionals and in serving the community. The other options listed can be valuable ways to get involved outside of the office, but teaching offers all three possibilities.

In the detail shown, which dimension of the transition strip needs to be changed to meet accessibility requirements? (A) ⅜ in (9.6 mm) (B) ¾ in (19 mm) (C) 1 in (25.4 mm) (D) 4 in (101.6 mm)

The answer is D. The 4 in (101.6 mm) dimension needs to be changed. The ⅜ in (9.6 mm) carpet pile height leaves a vertical change in level of ⅝ in (15.9 mm), which must be accommodated with a ramp slope of 1:12. Either the height of the leading edge of the transition strip needs to be increased or the width of the sloped portion of the strip needs to be widened. Increasing the height of the leading edge of the transition strip to ⅝ in (15.9 mm) with a ⅜ in (9.6 mm) pile height results in an acceptable ¼ in (6.4 mm) vertical change of level from the top of the carpet to the strip, leaving a distance to the top of the wood floor of ⅜ in (9.6 mm). However, this is unrealistic because the carpet will be crushed under the weight of a wheelchair, effectively making the vertical change in level greater than ¼ in (6.4 mm). If the ⅜ in (9.6 mm) dimension remains unchanged in order to create a slope of 1:12, the width of the strip has to be widened from 4 in (101.6 mm) to 7½ in (190.5 mm) to create a 1:12 slope. ⅝ in (15.9 mm) × 12 = 7½ in (190.5 mm) The ¾ in (19 mm) dimension is horizontal and has nothing to do with accessibility. The 1 in (25.4 mm) dimension is fixed by the thickness of the wood floor. While the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) allows for a change of level up to ½ in (12.7 mm), with ¼ in (6.4 mm) being vertical and ¼ in (6.4 mm) having a slope of 1:2, this approach is not possible with the given thicknesses of the carpet and the wood floor.

116. What is illustrated in the following partial drawing? (A) floor finish plan (B) floor plan (C) lighting plan (D) reflected ceiling plan

The answer is D. The drawing is a reflected ceiling plan because it includes symbols for lighting, supply air diffusers, and elevations above the floor. If it were a lighting plan, there would be no elevation symbols. It is not a floor plan because it does not include elements such as door openings, dimensions, or elevation symbols. It is not a finish plan because it does not include typical finish plan symbology such as rectangles with numbers and letters, or lines running from corners to corners with attached notes.

Consider the following drawing. The drawing shown would typically be developed between the... The drawing shown would typically be developed between the (A) bubble diagram and block diagram (B) bubble diagram and final schematic space plan (C) concept diagram and design development plan (D) concept diagram and final schematic space plan

The answer is D. The drawing shows a block diagram, which is used as a transition-type diagram. The block diagram is typically developed after a concept diagram and before a final schematic space plan, which shows a hardline drawing of a floor plan. At this stage of a project's schematic planning process, a block diagram identifies adjacencies, relative sizes of spaces, and the location of circulation, without showing the exact positions of partitions, doors, fixtures, or other details. A concept diagram is developed based on a bubble diagram, and shows major influences and constraints on the design as well as the broad, overriding ideas the designer wants to incorporate into the project. A final schematic plan is developed from the block diagram and shows the exact positions of partitions, doors, plumbing fixtures, millwork, and other features that will later be developed into a design development plan.

Smoke detector locations are shown on the (A) floor plan only (B) reflected ceiling plan only (C) electrical plan only (D) reflected ceiling plan and electrical plan

The answer is D. The electrical engineer is responsible for locating and circuiting smoke detectors, which are shown on the electrical plan. Smoke detectors are also shown on the interior designer's reflected ceiling plan so that the designer can coordinate them with other ceiling-mounted objects.

When taking field measurements using a tape measure, what is the FASTEST way to verify accuracy? (A) Measure each dimension twice from different directions. (B) Have two people take the same measurements and compare. (C) Use a laser-based device to compare with measurements taken manually. (D) Compare a string of dimensions with the overall dimension measurement.

The answer is D. The fastest way is to take an overall dimension and compare it with the sum of a string of dimensions of the same elements. If the two values are close, the individual measurements are probably close enough to be used for planning and construction documents. If the values are divergent, the measurements should be taken a second time. While measuring twice and having two people take the same measurements may be good ways to check work, they are not the fastest methods for verifying the accuracy of the data. If a laser-based device is used to check measurements made by a tape measure, the laser should have been used in the first place.

89. The model number and color of a piece of furniture would commonly be found on (A) the furniture plan (B) the furniture schedule only (C) the specifications only (D) either a furniture schedule or the specifications

The answer is D. The furniture plan typically contains only a code number for each piece of furniture. This code number refers either to a schedule on the drawings or to the specifications, where detailed information is listed, such as the furniture's manufacturer, model number, color, finish, and so on.

When considering the initial space planning of an accessible toilet room, which of the following design elements should be of MOST concern? (A) door swing and toilet position (B) grab bar location and approach dimension (C) stall depth and grab bar location (D) door swing and approach dimension

The answer is D. The size of accessible stalls, whether standard or end-of-row type, is fixed. Factors that could affect the total space required would be use of an in-swing door (which adds to the area required) and whether the design uses a side or front approach (latch side takes the least room). Refer to the following illustration. Grab bar locations and the toilet position relative to the stall are fixed and would not be of initial concern.

Which of the following would be the best source for looking at items just introduced to the furniture industry? (A) industry magazine advertisements (B) local dealer showrooms (C) merchandise marts (D) trade shows

The answer is D. Trades shows are typically events where new furniture items are introduced to the industry. They are excellent places to see actual examples of the furniture and to talk to the manufacturers about costs and technical specifications. Local dealer showrooms and merchandise marts usually lag a little behind trade shows in making new items accessible. Magazine advertisements may show previews of what will be shown at the trade shows, but they cannot take the place of seeing the real thing and being able to sit on it or touch it.

The most naturally fire-resistant untreated fabric is (A) acrylic (B) cotton (C) nylon (D) wool

The answer is D. Wool is the most fire-resistant natural fiber. Cotton is the most flammable unless it is treated.

Plenum

The area above the ceiling tile or below the subfloor in a building.

What is a life cycle assessment?

The investigation and valuation of the environmental impacts of a given product or service caused or necessitated by its existence.

embodied energy

The total amount of energy used to extract materials and manufacture, transport, install, and use a product across its life cycle.

Drapery Calculations

The total fabric width needed must be determined in estimating fabric for draperies. This is the total of the: + window opening size+ stacking space+ return+ overlap of two sections of drapery 1. Add all of the widths 2. multiply by the total amount of fullness of the drapery. Example:+ window opening size = 96+ stacking space = 32 (1/3 of 96)+ return+ overlaps (12 R+ O)= 140 inches (3556 mm) 140 inches (3556 mm) ✕ 2.5 (150% fullness) = 350 inches (8890 mm) The procedure for estimating drapery fabric with repeats is similar to wallpaper with repeats. The total fabric width needed is divided by the basic roll width of the fabric to determine the number of fabric panel widths required. This number is then multiplied by the cut length of the drapery. The cut length is a combination of the opening size and desired length of the finished drapery. Plus the header at the top where the fabric is pleated, and the hem at the bottom. Headers and hems combined usually total 16-20 in (406-508 mm) While accounting for the proper yardage is important, window treatments include lining, interlining, and hardware. While the fabric is priced per yard, rods and hardware is often priced per foot.

What is an oblique drawing?

This is a three-dimensional drawing with one side of an object parallel to the picture plane.

The bid form sent to all bidders should ask for the following information? A. amount of base bid, price for alterations, unit prices, number of calendar or work days in which the bidder proposes to complete the work, acknowledgement for receipt of any addenda, signature of someone legally empowered to bind the contractor to the contract B. number of calendar or work days in which the bidder proposes to complete the work, signature of someone legally empowered to bind the contractor to the contract, amount of base bid, price for substitutions C. amount of base bid, price for alterations, unit prices, number of calendar or work days in which the bidder proposes to complete the work, acknowledgement for receipt of any addenda D. amount of base bid, price for alterations, cost for subcontracted labor, number of calendar or work days in which the bidder proposes to complete the work, acknowledgement for receipt of any addenda, signature of someone legally empowered to bind the contractor to the contract

To ensure that all bids will be identical in format, there should be a standard form on which all the bidders enter the required information. The bid form should contain space for the amount of the base bid, the price for alternates (if any), unit prices (if any), and the number of calendar or work days in which the bidder proposes to complete the work. Space should be provided for the bidder to acknowledge receipt of any addenda. The bid form must be signed by someone legally empowered to bind the contractor to the owner contract.

ASHRAE 62.1-2013

Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

Stacking diagram

What shows best the department relationships in a company occupying a multi-story building?

intumescent

What type of material expands upon exposure to heat & forms light fire-resistant seal?

shrinkage

a change in dimensions across the fabric's length and width after washing, usage, and exposure to the relaxing of fabrics.

Critical Path Method (CPM)

a project-management tool that illustrates the relationships among all the activities involved in completing a project and identifies the sequence of activities likely to take the longest to complete

Astragal

a convex molding or wooden strip across a surface or separating panels, typically semicircular in cross-section.

What is Axminster?

a kind of machine-woven patterned carpet with a cut pile

Lumens

a measurement of the brightness of light

What is a Gantt chart?

a method of showing expected and completed production timelines in relation to related subproject and their timeframes

dimensional stability

ability of a material to maintain its size and shape over a period of time

Local Cost Indices

conditions that must be accounted for in developing any project budget are geographical location and inflation, which can be adjusted by using the local cost indices published in various sources, including the major architectural and construction trade magazines.

What is a flow chart in interior design?

diagrams of user flows and tasks in processes. Designers use these versatile tools to visualize the interactions in designs and present easy-to-understand maps of designs to stakeholders. They connect labeled, standardized symbols with lines to show everything users might do in interactive contexts.

important aspects in selecting an appropriate textile

dimensional stability shrinkage pattern match breathability cushion types

Portland cement

dry powder made by burning limestone and clay followed by grinding and mixing; used to make concrete

what is the ANSI/BIFMA G1 standard

ergonomic recommendations for everything from adjustable-height chairs to sitting desks to 'you-name-it'.

Titration Test

measures for alkalinity, and is used in addition to pH test testing to concrete prior to application of tile adhesives or coatings. Alkalinity in concrete can cause two types of problems. High alkalinity on the surface of a slab can damage a tile installation by causing the adhesive to re-emulsify, or return to its original liquid state. It can also cause problems with other coatings. All others measure for moisture content.

vertical ignition test (NFPA 701)

measures the flammability of draperies, curtains and other window treatments. Draperies that weigh less than 21 oz./yd. are tested separately from those that weigh more than 21 oz./yd. (ex. those with blackout linings). The test is pass/fail.

What is Wilton carpet

one in which the pile threads run continuously into the carpet and are raised above the surface of the integral backing by means of wires or hooks. Wilton carpets are often cut or loop products and different yarn types can be used to produce different surface textures.

Master specifications

prewritten specifications that cover nearly all types of products, methods of installation and other variables that relate to a specific product or construction activity.

What are performance codes?

provide the objective but not specific instructions on how to achieve it.

What is a PERT chart?

shows tasks like a Gantt chart but shows them in an easy to follow pattern

What are performance specifications?

specs that dictate the end result of a project, doesn't matter how it's done

What is proxemics?

study of personal space

What are perscriptive specifications?

tell exactly what product or material the contractor must use by brand name.

What is functionalism?

the doctrine that the form of a building should be determined by practical considerations such as use, material, and structure, as distinct from the attitude that plan and structure must conform to a preconceived picture in the designer's mind.